a obeteat ~ . rs chia, terns A ne RP Re, Sn Mh an Pee ace BP Ay the a Mn ig Rm ey ite hae Me : a res ° + Wo aoe Seen hate Bete a aR bear ai eh 7 “we eas " ates ower ery : Bete cect ee eee ee a eet we ne ee ee * aos . ~ Se ree eee ae - Ee ear “ » a Pom: oN See aS andthe a aN atime ee ig Sy Seg Rate SBI ~ . eet Be ~ d zt ee ee z a eS oe eee! Tate Tate Mee Se Mate at ae ac RT ag A no rer cam ath DS a = gnc A ae Rhy tn Besa! Sgn ty eR Me Me Sea a = i s 4 r A BE Park tah Se FRI NE Nae Bi Hg “ = 5 a heat annie Eni Fattat anahe S ave atoms tatters Me! ee eee Ree eet SS ae . . = AN hn oe t= ee at ngewe . ae 3 a = Foe See eet RAI et Tan = ee eS ee aera ee ae z —s : ee Da . 2 ee Saar EN AR et Se = ah ta GI STAN. Ae este Fon Be Mh ape ce ney a De he Rac le A Me eae fod tah AS Ae AOS TH FZ. Set Se SS an i iene re ate ae B BR AR Ot eat ee —— SEERA ER A Ae LITA Ril a ea A i i panes ee al ee ee ee . ee ee ere ee ares aut a Bh Som tn ig Be Fay 6 wn ee Sn Hac - . - Wake revi A : ee “ 3 - ’ Rete Be = ” eae eer ee ee ea en eS re ee Ss = See faz : OT se —— - a ee ee re pa ua ae “TE eG MEMOIRS AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE MANCHESTER Pb RARY oc PHILOSOPETEC AL SOC TE DY. (MM AIM (GT TEES IOTIIR NSE MIO SS) VOLUME. l= (90677) MANCHESTER: 36, GEORGE STREET. 1907. 205523 NOTE. The authors of the several papers contained in this volume are themselves accountable for all the statements and reasonings which they have offered. In these par- ticulars the Society must not be considered as in any way responsible. , te Il. Ill. IV. VI. VII. CONTENTS. MEMOIRS. . A Preliminary Account of the Life-history of the Common House Fly (Musca domestica L.). By C. GORDON HEwi1T, B.Sc.... sie ee es 606 cao | oyOL (Lssued separately, October 23rd, 1906). On some Points of Chemical Philosophy involved in the Discovery of Radium and the Properties of its Com- binations. By HENRY WILDE, D.Sc., D.C.L., F.R.S. With Table, Sis sist oar 690 tb DD: (Ussued separately, Decenber 19th, 1900.) A Journey to North-East Rhodesia during 1904 and 1905. By S. A. NEave, M.A., B.Sc. With Plate. 52 {0} (Ussued separately, January 24th, 1907.) Notes on a Collection of Terrestrial and Fluviatile Mollusca, made in North-Eastern Rhodesia, during 1905, by Mr. Sheffield A. Neave, M.A., B.Sc. By JAMES Cosmo MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S., and ROBERT STANDEN, With PPUHOs gc boc poe Doo 500 600 coa [DBb (Issued separately, February 20th, 1907). . Ona Collection of Mammals made by Mr. S. A. Neave in Rhodesia, North of the Zambesi, with Field Notes by the Collector. By R. C. WRoUGHTON ... oat coe [D/L (lssued separately, March 13th, 1907). The Grouping of the Chemical Elements. By C. E. STROMEYER, M.Inst.C.E. ... a Bae oon (0) (Issued separately, March 7th, 1907). On the Structure of Syringodendron, the Bark of Szgzdlarza. By KATHARINE H. CowarbD, B.Sc. With Plate. pp: (Lssued separately, March 11th, 1907). LA I—13 N——7/ I—16 I—39 I—I5 I—6 v1 CONTENTS. VIII. The Parichnos in the Lepidodendracex. By F. E. WEIss, D.Se. With Pirate and 8 Text-figures. se SDD: (Lssued separately, April 23rd, 1907). IX. Report on the Foraminifera from the Coast of the Island of Delos (Grecian Archipelago). Part IV. By HENRY SIDEBOTTOM. Plates 7.—IV. and 7 Text-figures. pp. (Issued separately, May 23rd, 1907). X. Ona Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. By S. A. NEAVE, I—22 23 M.A., B.Sc. Weth Coloured Plate. wa: ..- pp: 1-104 ([ssued separately, June 14th, 1907). XI. Further Notes on the Adventitious Vegetation of the Sandhills of St. Anne’s-on-the-Sea, North Lancashire - (vice- county 60). By CHArLsEs BaiLey, M.Sc., F.L.S. Plates L.— VIII, Ee aa ae ec dis apps (Lssued separately, June 18th, 1907}. XII. On a Collection of Fishes, Batrachians, and Reptiles, made by Mr. S. A. Neave in Rhodesia, North of the Zambesi, with Field Notes by the Collector. By G. A. BOULENGER, IBGIRaSy) Gor on 306 a oc age DD: ([ssued separately, June r2th, 1907). XIII. On a confusion of two species (Lepidodendron Harcourte: Witham, and Z. Azchkiz, sp. nov.) under Lepidodendron Harcourti?, Witham, in Williamson’s XIX. Memoir; with a description of Z. Hzckiz, sp.nov. By I). M.S. Watson. Plates [.—/TI. ... Boe ate 550 nas Soe. JOjRe ([ssued separately, June 15th, 1907). XIV. On the Compression of Gases by means of Hydraulic Apparatus. By J. E. Peravet, M.Sc. F.R.S. Weth Text-figure. a6 oe oan ob soe sc (DD (Issued separately, June 15th, 1907). XV. On the Structure of Metals. (The Wilde Lecture). ByJ. A. Ewinec, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. Plates 7.—V. and 5 Text- figures. ... us Be oe ot a0 dso) O18 (Issued separately, June 20th, 1907). XVI. Some Tables for illustrating Statistical Correlation. - By A. D. DARBISHIRE. Worth Folded Plate. ... son |9)SF ([ssued separately, June 28th, 1907). I—I6 I—1Z I—28 I—4 I—20 USS 21 CONTENTS. : Vil PROCEEDINGS. BAILEY, CHARLES, M.Sc., F.L.S. Account of his collecting examples of Lamprothamnus alopecurordes, Braun, in 1881 KV —- Exhibit of a small slab of oak timber from a staff used for stirring up molten tin... ms ae 68 ooo ORT SOR TIT BAILEY, S1R WILLIAM B.—Presentation to the Society of a framed enlarged photograph of the statues of Dr. Dalton and Dr. Joule in the entrance hall.of the Manchester Town Fall... vil BarLtow, WIL11AM, F.G.S., F.C.S., and Pope, WILLIAM J., F.R.S.—A Development of the Atomic Theory which correlates chemical and crystalline structure and leads to a demonstration of the nature of valency. JV7th 2 text jigures ... ot 506 36 300 aco 500 See xl Barnes, C. L., M.A.--On some passages in Dante which seem to foreshadow the ‘‘ speaking arc ” Bi we te ae X1x —— Science and Poetry Ban 5B 00 580 ... XXXHI—XXxV Carson, Miss MADELINE, B.Sc,—The leaves of Passerina XXV— XXV1 Dixon, H. B., M.A., F.R.S.—Reference to the death of Professor Henri Moissan... she sue Gio es Bia XG XX1l GAMBLE, F. W., D.Sc.—On the discovery by Biitschli of strontium sulphate in the tissues of certain Radiolaria Br Bee Xvi GAMBLE, F. W., D.Sc. and KEEBLE, F., D.Sc.—The occurrence and significance of symbiotic corpuscles in the lower animals... ee ape ae Te Ken oer x XXV1I1 Hoyiz, W. E., D.Sc., F.R.S.E. —Exhibit of, and remarks on, a coloured sketch of a specimen of Beryx splendens B43 TOE —— Exhibit of skins of birds from North Eastern Rhodesia hee xlil Hurfton, Rk. S., D.Sc.— Reference to the death of Professor Henri : Moissan... oat a Bee ace ae a, fee Xxli Kay, THomas.—Exhibit of, and remarks on, a piece of New Red Sandstone containing Encrinites, found in the Roman Camp of Mancunium ... see se Bee 60 XXii—Xxiv McNicoL, Miss M., B.Sc.—The Proembryo and Bulbils of Lamprothamnus alopecuroides (Braun) oe Hs ... XIV—XV vill CONTENTS. NICHOLSON, F., F.Z.S.—Exhibit and account of some bones of the Great Auk (A/ca Zmpennzs Linn.) from Funk Island, New- foundland 50 Jig 306 ree ae we) XXVII—Xxviii OLDHAM, CHARLES.—Exhibit of a melanic example of the Brown rat (J/as decumanus Pallas), from County Wexford Soa, XOCy, PETAVEL, J. E., M.Sc.—Exhibit and description of apparatus for experimental work at very high gaseous pressures ... =e Xxl1 Pope, WILLIAM J., F.R.S., and PEACHEY, S. J.—A new class of organo-metallic compounds: trimethylplatinimethyl hydroxide and its salts Si we Bb rie XXIX—XXX RAGDALE, JOHN R.—Exhibit and description of arrow heads, obsidian chippings, pottery, etc., from the Yellowstone Park and Petrified Forest, Arizona ... ve soe ++. XX—XxXi Storrs, Miss M. C., D.Sc., Ph.D.—Reference to the coal mine in Sutherlandshire shh “ 28 06 xe po | ROS TaYLor, R. L., F.C.S., F.I.C.—Remarks on ee in some ae of silica ... aa ie sae Pat Xlll—xiv THorP, THOMAS, F.R.A.S.—An apparent case of gaseous absorp- tion by the action of radium bromide on the sides of a glass tube 309 o00 900 000 coc d00 de XX1X Weiss, F. E., D.Sc., F.L.S.— Gutta percha from a Chinese Tree (ELucommea wlmotdes Oliver). With two text-figures ... l—vi —— Exhibition of photographs illustrating the flora of Corsica... xxxvi Woopall, H. J.—A curious case of the freezing of water in a bottlesere ae sae # Se ite sia Fe XXV\ General Meetings... Bee ee = ae Vil, Xil, Xlii, xvi, xvill Annual General Meeting ae ; i si XXX1 Special Meeting for the eu: of the Wilde Lecture 3 sige Xxil Report of Council, 1907, with obituary notices of Professor M. P. E. Berthelot, For. Mem.R.S., Professor L. Boltzmann, For.Wem.R:S., Sir Michael Foster, K:C.K., B.RS:; Professor D. Mendeléeff, Ph.D., For. Mem.R.S., Professor H. Moissan, Professor H. Marshall Ward, D.Sc., F.R.S., and Mr. C. S. Allott, M.Inst.C.E. ... 28D ane xXxxvii—lvi Treasurer's Accounts ... sie aa aa a6 ee lvii—lix List of the Council and Members of the Society Ase 66 Ix—Ixxv List of the Awards of the Wilde and Dalton Medals and of the Premium... a G00 ae ue re vce soo LES List of the Wilde Lectures ane Bh ie aie ae soos [SSRN VoLesn: Parte ., MEMOIRS AND PROCEEDINGS OF He SES NCEE STE PrrhReny & PHILOSOPHICAL BOCIMTY, 19061007. CONTENTS. Memoirs : I, A Preliminary Account of the Life-history of the Common House Fly (Musca domestica L.). By C. Gordon Hewitt, B.Sc. - - pp. I—4. (Issued separately, October 23rd, 1906). II. On some Points of Chemical Philosophy involved in the Discovery of Radium and the Properties of its Combinations. By Henry Wilde, D.Sc.,D.C.L., F.R.S. With Table. - - - - pp. I—I3- (Issued separately, December 19th, 1906). Proceedings - pp. i.—xvi- MANCHESTER: 36, GEORGE STREET. Price One Shilling and Sixpence. January 18th, 1907- RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY. Presented. Arras.—Academie. Congrés des Sociétés Savantes tenu 7-10 Juillet, 1904. 1905. Batavia.—Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen. Rapporten van de Commissie in Nederlandsch Indié- voor Oudheidkundig Onderzoek op Java en Madoera, 1904, 1906. Cape of Good Hope.—Royal Observatory. Report on the Boundary Survey between British Bechuanaland and German $.W. Africa. By Lieut.-Col. Laffan and Lieut. Wettstein. 1906. Delft.—Bibliotheek der Technische Hoogeschool. Geschiedenis der systema- tische Mineralogie. Door E. H. M. Beekman. 1906. Gillespie (Mrs. H.), Trustees of. The Argument, a frzorz, for the Being and the Attributes of the Lord God, the Absolute One, and First Cause. By W. H. Gillespie. 6th...ed.... 1906. Gorlitz.—Oberlausitzische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Codex Diplo- maticus Lusatiae Superioris III., Hft. 2, von R. Jecht. 1906. —— —— Gutsherrlich-bauerliche Verhaltnisse in der Ober-Lausitz, von F. Moeschler. 1906. Greenwich.—Royal Observatory. Reduction of Greenwich Meteorclogical Observations, Pt. IV.... Under the direction of Sir W. H. M. Christie... 1906, —— —— A Catalogue of 8560 Astrographic Standard Stars between Declinations — 40° and — 52° for the Equinox 1900...under the direction of Sir D. Gill... 1906. —— —— Catalogues of Stars for the Equinox 1900'o from Observations made at the Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope, during the years 1900-1904, under the direction of Sir D. Gill.... 1906. Liverpool.— University Institute of Commercial Research in the Tropics. A Catalogue of the Aburi Gardens. By A. E. Evans. 1906. Middelburg.—Zeeuwsch Genootschap der Wetenschappen. De Uitvinding der Verrekijkers, door C. de Waard, Jr. 1906. Oxford.—University Observatory. Astrographic Catalogue 1900°0. Oxford section Dec. +24° to +32°...under the direction of H. H. Turner...vol. I. 19006. Pickering, E. C. An International Southern Telescope. 1906. —— Oration on the Aims of an Astronomer, 1906. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1906); No. 1. I. A Preliminary Account of the Life-history of the Common House Fly (A/usca domestica L.). By C. GORDON HEWITT, B.Sc., Demonstrator of Zoology t7 the University of Manchester. Recetved and Read October 2nd, 1906. During the summer of this year I have been making some investigations on the life-history of the Common House Fly, Musca domestica L. for a monograph which I am preparing on that insect. As the life-history of JZ. domestzca has not been studied previously in this country, so far as I am aware, a short preliminary account of the results obtained from this year’s experiments may be of some interest. The life-history has previously been studied in America by Packard (74) at Salem, Mass., and more recently by Howard (:02) at Washington. Their results differ slightly and are given at the end of the accompanying table. The female fly lays about one hundred and twenty eggs in the crevices of horse excrement, which must be fresh or the flies refuse to deposit their eggs. I experienced consider- able difficulty in getting the flies to lay their eggs in confinement. When excrement is exposed before an open window large numbers of the eggs of other species of flies, which inhabit houses, are deposited, chiefly, I found, those of Axzthomyza radicum L. The experiments were begun early in August and continued to the end of September. During this time five lots of larvae were reared, each batch experiencing different conditions of temperature. By keeping the conditions as regards moisture and supply of food uni- form, I was able to study the effects of the variability of October 23rd, 1900. 2 HEWITT, L2fe-history of the Common House Fly. the Manchester weather on the rate of development. I plotted out a curve of the daily mean temperatures (taken from six readings) and found that a rise in temperature produced an acceleration of the rate of development at any stage of the life-history, that is, shortened the time taken by that particular stage. In the larval state there are two moults, that is, three stages can be recognised. In the first stage the larvae have only one pair of respiratory apertures, or stigmata, which are situated at the posterior end of the body on the last abdominal segment. In the second and third larval stages a pair of prothoracic or post-cephalic stigmata are found in addition to the posterior stigmata. The latter are slit-like in the second larval stage, two slits to each of the stigmata. In the third larval stage they are roughly semicircular with thickened chitinous rims and the flat sides opposite. | The following table gives a summary of my results ; the results of Packard and Howard are given at the bottom for comparison. Larva. Series. Egg. Pupa. | Total Time. Ist stage.|2nd stage.| 3rd stage. I 24 are 3 days | 4 days| 6 days 6 days | 20 days 2 24 hrs.| 2 days| 4 days| 4 days 9 days 20 days 7 3 36 hrs. |24 days | 2 days| 6 days | 12 days | 24 days eee enelits. 2 days | 2 days| 7 days | 18 days | 30 days 5 24 hrs.| 2 days | 2 days| 8 days |17 days | 30 days Packard| 24 hrs. | 1 day | 1 day 3 or 4 days| 5-7 days |10-14days Howard 8 hrs. | 1 day | 1 day 3 days 5 days | 10 days Manchester Memoirs, Vol. le. (1906), Vo. 1. 3 Remarks. The length of-the larval stages of Series I was due to the low and variable temperatures experienced during that time. During the pupal state very hot weather supervened (September Ist) which caused the flies to emerge in the shortest time I have observed in the experiments. During the same period of hot weather Series 3 were in the third larval stage which was prolonged by the larvae being allowed to remain in rather dry conditions. Series 4 and 5 were in their first and second larval stages during the few hot days, and both these stages were short. Immediately after the hot weather which we had for a few days at the beginning of September, there was a drop in the temperature and it has been comparatively low since, referring to the mean temperature of course. This low temperature caused an excessive prolonga- tion of the 3rd larval and pupal stages of Series 4 and 5. It will be seen from the table that there is considerable difference in the time taken by different batches of larvae to develop. The shortest time is twenty days and the longest thirty. If the shortest times of the different stages be taken, it is found that they are: Time from deposition of egg to emergence of larva vas sh Ape Son Al, INONUIS First larval stage... ee i. ... two days. Second larval stage... Ee bik ... two days. Third larval stage ... ae sie ... four days. Pupal state ... ee oes ss ooh SID) Glenys The whole period from the deposition of the egg to the exclusion of the imago would last about fifteen days, 4 HEWITT, Lefe-history of the Common House Fly. so that, given a spell of really hot weather we might have flies developing in a fortnight or even less, in England. Packard and Howard found that the time taken from the deposition of the egg to the emergence of the fly was about ten to fourteen days. As this communication is only of a preliminary nature further details of the development, together with the results of further experiments, which it is my intention to make, will be incorporated in the account of the larva which will be published later. LITERATURE. 74. Packarp, A.S. ‘On the Transformations of the Common House Fly, with notes on allied forms.” roc. Boston Soc. Wat. Hist., vol. 16, p. 136—r150, 1 pl. :02. Howarp, L.O. ‘ House Flies” (‘‘ The Principal House- hold Insects of the United States,” by L. O. Howard and C. L. Marlatt). United States Department of Agriculture, Washington. Division of Entomology, Bull. no. 4, N.S. Revised ed., p. 43—47 and figs. ; and Circular, no. 35, 2nd Series, p. 1—8 and figs., 1808. De GEz, R. first described the transformations of JZ. domestica in his ‘‘ Mémoires pour servir a l’Histoire des Insectes.” 8 vols. Stockholm, 1752-78, but did not give the time taken by the various stages. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 2. II. On some Points of Chemical Philosophy involved in the Discovery of Radium and the Properties of its Combinations. Bye N RV TE DBD): Sc.) Eas or KS: Received and Read November 27th, 1906. The discovery of no elementary substance has created such profound and general interest as that of Radium. This is abundantly evident from various scientific pub- lications and from magazine articles on “The Wonders of Radium,” “ The Revelations of Radium,” “The Miracle of Radium,” and other titles equally striking. Although the new element has not yet been isolated, the fact that it has a well defined spectrum, and that its chemical reactions agree closely with those of barium, leave no room for doubt of its existence, and that it is one of the alkaline-earth family of metals. Radium, as I have already shown,’ has a definite position, atomic weight, and specific gravity in my tables of atomic weights (1878, 1894, 1903), and is the next member higher to barium, as well as the highest of the series of alkaline-earth metals. Operating with less than two grains of radium chloride, Mme. Curie deduced for the element an atomic weight of 225, and places it in the column of alkaline- earth metals, the member next above barium. From spectroscopic observations, Runge and Precht,? while agreeing that radium belongs to the barium group, 1 Manchester Memotrs, vol. 48, 1903—1904. 2 Journ. Chen. Soc., vol. 84, p. 346, 1903. Phil. Mag., April, 1903, p. 476. December 19th, 1900. 2 WILDE, Poznts of Chemical Philosophy. : propose 258 as its atomic weight, as against 225 the value assigned to it by Mme. Curie. Now, there is good reason to believe that neither of these numbers is the atomic weight of radium. An examination of the following table will show that, as a consequence of the law of multiple proportions by which the atomic weights of the series Hn and H2n are deter- mined, there is a common difference of 23 between the atomic weights of the series Hn, commencing with Ka, to the final member Hg. In like manner there is a com- mon difference of 24 in the strictly parallel series H2n. Hn H2n fe pile He = 25.90 — 6 — 6 OME RO Le 7s Meta 17 LO Oy SaGh= & — 16 —16 423. O=SINa = 23 1X 220— © — Nicer —16 —16 2X23 17, =Kal== 20 2x 24—8= Ca — 49 — 23 —24 Bb223)— 7, — Ci — 62 3x 24-—8=Z7n = 64 — 23 —24 AX 237 — hb = 985 4X 24—8=Sr = 88 3 [23 71— No — 108 5x 24—8=Cd =112 eS — 24 6 <23 7 Cs — 6X 24—8= Ba —aie6 — 23 —2 7X23-7= — =154 7X 24—8= — =160 — 23 — 24 S23 = 7S SS S177 8X 24—8=Ra =184 — 23 = Al 9X 23—7= He =200 9x 24-—8=Pb =208 I have already discussed the remarkable alternation of light and heavy metals in regular order observable in Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1906), No. 2. 3 each of these series, and have put forward suggestions as to its possible cause in my first paper on the “ Origin of Elementary Substances,” published in the Proceedings of the Society, 1878, and Memozrs, 1887. In my later tables it will be seen that the alkaline- earth metals are of small specific gravity which increases with their atomic weight. Thus we have calcium, sp. g. 1°58; strontium, 2:54; barium, 3°75; radium, 4°8 approxt- mate. Now, as the atomic weights of both series of elements increase by definite increments of 23 and 24 respectively, it follows by just analogy that if the series H2n were continued, the next member after lead would have an atomic weight of 232 (208+24) or seven units higher than Mme. Curie’s determination for radium, with an approximate specific gravity of 7, Another increment of 24 would give 256, or two units less than the atomic weight assigned by Runge and Precht for radium. But this number would transfer the new element from the series of alkaline-earth metals to the alternate series of heavy metals containing lead and zinc. Moreover, in none of the series of elements is there any with atomic weights so high as 225 and 256 correlated with specific gravity so low as 5 or 7. The determinations of Mme. Curie, and Runge and Precht, therefore, afford no reason for changing the position of radium in my table of elements as the next higher member of the alkaline- earth metals to barium, with an atomic weight of 184, and a proximate specific gravity of 5. I have shown in former papers that helium is the typical element of the series H2n, with an atomic weight of 2 (He=2),a value now adopted by French chemists in the Table of atomic weights published in the Aznzuazre du Bureau des Longitudes. This value agrees with those of the other elementary gases (H,O,N, Ci), the atomic 4 WILDE, Points of Chemical Philosophy. weights of which are the same as their specific gravities at ordinary temperatures. The atomic weight of 2 is further confirmed by the remarkable parallel differences in the atomic weights (6 and 16) of the head members of the positive series Hn and Han. I have stated in my former paper that there is abundant reason for concluding that no elements exist of higher atomic weights than those shown in each series of the table ; the series H2n containing radium, consequently, closes with lead. From the fact that lead is always found in radio- active minerals, and for other reasons, Boltwood’* and Rutherford* have each independently arrived at the con- clusion that lead is the final or end product of the transformation of radium. Dumas and other eminent chemists long ago classified lead as the homologue of the alkaline-earth metals, but the requirements of Mendeleeff’s periodic system necessitate the placing of this element in his fourth group as the homologue of thorium, and the anomalous substitution of mercury (200) for lead in the series con- taining the alkaline-earth metals. (v. Addendum.) It is a singular circumstance that, notwithstanding the wonderful powers attributed to radium, no chemist has yet seen or handled the element in its metallic state, in order that its general physical properties might be made the subject of investigation. In my last paper read before the Society,’ reference was made to the property which the sulphur combinations of the positive series H2n possess of becoming luminous 1 Phil. Mag., April, 1905. 2 Journ. Chem. Soc., November, 1905. 8 Manchester Menwoirs, 1903. Manchester Memotrs, Vol. lz. (1906), No. 2. 5 when exposed to the action of solar or electric light, and retaining their phosphorescence for more or less time after the source of light has been removed. Calcium, strontium, barium, and zinc sulphides possess this property in different degrees, while the radium combinations of the same series are permanently self-luminous. Now it is admitted on all hands that elementary metallic calcium, strontium, barium, and zinc do not exhibit the property of phosphorescence of their sulphur compounds, and in this respect behave like ordinary metallic substances. By strict analogy metallic radium would, in like manner, be divested of a'l the extraordinary properties which have been attributed to it, and opened out so wide a field for ultra-scientific hypotheses. In my first paper on elementary transformations I directed attention (1) to the strict parallelism existing between the electro-negative halogens, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, with the electro-positive alkaline metals, sodium, potassium, rubidium, caesium, and the common difference of 4 between the atomic weights of the parallel series, and (2) the like parallelism between the electro- negative elements, oxygen, sulphur, tellurium, selenium, with the electro-positive alkaline-earth metals, magnesium, calcium, strontium, barium, and the common difference of 8 between the atomic weights of these series. The numerical, chemical, and physical properties of the four series of these elements clearly indicate them to be positive and negative analogues of each other and of hydrogen. The intensely electro-negative character of the halo- gen and oxygen series induced me to affirm in my first paper that at an early period of their history the two series existed in a state of isolation from all the others. The subsequent chemical combinations of these eight 6 WILDE, Poznts of Chemical Philosophy. elements (with their beautiful gradation of properties) constitute the foundation, and much the greater part of the huge fabric of modern chemistry. As the luminous properties commonly attributed to the alkaline-earth series of elements only become manifest when in combination with elements of the halogen and oxygen series, it may be maintained, with good reason, that the extraordinary properties attributed to radium really belong to the negative elements with which it enters into combination. It is no refutation of the view now advanced to say that the property of luminescence is not manifested in all combinations of the negative elements with the other elements. The phosphorescent and other relations to light, heat, electricity, and mag- netism of the halogen and oxygen series are too numerous in inorganic, as well as in organic nature, to permit the denial to them of a selective affinity for the manifestation of properties now attributed almost exclusively to radium and its congeners of the series H2n. It will be sufficient if | mention in this connexion (1) the luminescence and radio-active properties of phosphorus by its slow orzda- tion, and (2) the phosphorescence of decaying organic matter, and of many insects; the most notable of the latter being the Pyvrophorus noctilucus, the luminous organs of which have been made the subject of experi- ment by S. P. Langley and F. W. Very’. Macaire’, Matteucci’, Langley, and others agree that the phosphorescence of insects is due to orzdation, and is attended by the formation of carbon dioxide ; the light is increased in oxygen, and cxtinguished in hydrogen and 1 Amer. Journ. Science, vol, 40, p. 97, 1890. Smithsonian Msc. Coll., vol. 41 (1258), p. 19, 190K. 2 Bib. Univ. de Geneve, 1821. * Ann, de Chin. et de Phys., vol. 9, p. 71, 1843. — Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1906), Wo. &. 7 in vacuo. Reference is made by Langley to the experi- ments of H. Muraoka in 1896, on lampyrid beetles collected in Kyoto in Japan, who found that these insects emitted both actinic and Rontgen rays, which acted through cardboard and could also be deflected ¢ Wred. Ann. Phys., vol. 59, pp. 773—781). Radium bears the same relation in its combinations with the halogen and oxygen elements as calcium and thorium in their combinations with the same elements. Now no chemist will be found to affirm that elementary calcium and thorium are the principal agents in the pro- duction of the oxyhydrogen (lime) light, or the same light from Welsbach thoria mantles. The conclusion may therefore be justly drawn that elementary radium plays the like subordinate part when in combination with the negative elements, and that these elements are the prin- cipal, if not the sole cause of the phenomena of radio- activity manifested in radium combinations. Considering the fact that, when positive and negative elements of the series Hn and H2n enter into active com- bination, the resultant compounds possess but few of the chemical and physical properties which characterize their components, the persistency with which the properties of radium compounds have been attributed to elementary radium is as interesting, psychologically, as the physio- logical cffects of its compounds on the human body and on other living structures. The incidence of the discovery of these properties, prior to the isolation of the element, has doubtless largely contributed to the illusion that they are wholly inherent in radium itself. The announcement made three years since by Sir W. Ramsay and Mr. Soddy of the transmutation of radium, 8 WILDE, Points of Chemical Philosophy. through its halogen combination, into helium was naturally received by chemists with some degree of scepticism and incredulity. The peculiar circumstances, however, under which the transmutation was effected through Rutherford’s previous suggestion that the emanation from a radium compound might resolve itself into helium, brought with itan amount of conviction sufficient to establish the reality of the transmutation in the minds of those who had closely followed the course of the investigation. More recently, Himstedt and Meyer,’ Giesel* and others, by exhaustive and decisive methods, have con- firmed the experimental results previously obtained by Sir W. Ramsay and Mr. Soddy, so that the transforma- tion of radium combinations inte helium has now the certainty of any well established fact in the natural sciences. I may here be permitted to express my satisfaction on the confirmation of the views and previsions advanced in my former papers, especially in connection with the transformation of radium into helium, and the places assigned to these elements in my tables previous to their discovery. In the first demonstration of the transformation of radium bromide into helium, Sir W. Ramsay was careful to point out that the transformation was not brought about directly, but through a gaseous emanation evolved from the radium bromide. He describes the emanation as a new elementary substance resembling members of the argon family in its chemical inertness. Hence, we have an actual transformation of radium bromide into the elementary emanation. Now, as no suggestion has been made that elementary bromine was evolved in a 1 Ann, a. Phystk, Sept., 1904, Sept., 1905. 2 Berichte, vol. 38, p. 2299, 1905. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. li. (1906), Vo. 2. 9 free state during these changes, we are confronted with the fact that both bromine and radium are indirectly and simultaneously transformed into helium. Again, Himstedt and Meyer‘ in their first experiments on the formation of helium from the radium emanation employed the sulphate, heated to a bright red heat in an exhausted quartz tube, which showed the red, yellow, green, and blue lines at the end of three wecks, increasing in bright- ness the following fortnight. Hence, we have the trans- formation of sulphur and oxygen into helium, as in the instance of bromine into helium from the bromide emanation. Moreover, as the transformations of three of the eight members of the electro-negative series of elements into helium have been effected, there is reason for assuming that the radium combinations of the other five members may also be transformed into helium, or ultimately into hydrogen. A great hindrance to investigators of radio-trans- formation products through their blind adoption of periodic systems, is the notion that the higher members of different series of elements may be transformed directly into each other, viz., uranium into thorium or into radium. These investigators might derive profit by comparing the natural series of elements in my tables with the analogous diagram in connexion with Chapter 4 of Darwin’s “Origin of Species.” No naturalist would entertain for a moment the notion of the transformation of a high member of one species into a high member of another species, ¢.g., a tiger into a giraffe,except by reversion in continuity to the original type. It would be necessary to revert to the age of the Greek mythologists and to the writings of the alchemists for precedents for the belief in the direct 1 Ann. d. Phystk, 15, 1, Sept., 1904. 10 WILDE, Points of Chemical Philosophy. transformation of higher members of different species directly into each other. While it is universally admitted that elementary substances and their combinations have structural arrange- ments of their internal parts (static or stato-dynamic) which distinguish the properties of the members of one species from those of another, the discovery of the spon- taneous transformation; of «radium combinations into helium has clearly demonstrated that the “ constitution of b) matter” is not necessarily atomic, in the sense generally accepted by chemists, and that the atoms of Newton and Dalton are not the immutable entities which they postu- lated them to be. It is, however, a profound error to suppose that the lustre of Dalton’s reputation is at all diminished by the supersession of his atomistic philosophy, and great injustice would be done to his memory by this supposition. Dalton’s abiding reputation rests upon his discovery and experimental demonstration of the law of chemical combination in definite and multiple proportions (in units of hydrogen), through which the law of definite and multiple proportions of the elements among them- selves (with their consequent transformations) is the orderly and natural development. The resolution of the radium-bromide emanation into helium necessarily raises the question whether the distinc- tion hitherto made between elementary substances and their chemical combinations has a real foundation in nature, or is only an arbitrary division arising from ideas of composition derived from mechanical mixtures used in the common arts of life, as set forth in connexion with the following extract from my first paper on elemen- tary substances’ :— 1 Proc. Manch. Lit. Phil. Soc., vol. 17, p. 194, and Memoirs, vol. 10, pp. 123—4, 1887. —s Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1906), No. 2. II “ Although it is herein assumed that hydrogen is the “ ponderable base of all elementary species, it is probable “that this element itself, as further maintained by Prout, “may have been evolved from an ethereal substance of “much greater tenuity. Further knowledge of the outer “regions of the solar atmosphere and of the zodiacal light “may possibly indicate the steps by which hydrogen was “formed. “T would also observe that the term ‘molecule’ is “here used only in the sense of a larger or denser particle ‘of matter, and does not imply the idea of a composite ‘aggregation of the separate particles, each preserving its “distinctive character after the molecule is formed, any “more than rain-drops preserve their distinctive character “after falling into the ocean. It appears to me much “more in accordance with the truth of nature to suppose “that the smallest conceivable particle of a chemical “substance or compound has the same physical properties “absolutely as the mass. If it be objected that such an “union of particles would have relations of infinity, and is “therefore inconceivable, it may be answered that the “central particles of a rotating body have mathematical “and physical relations of a similar kind. and as the “instrument of thought is incapable of forming a distinct “conception of the magnitude of the infinitesimals in- “volved in a centre of rotation, still less is it capable of “comprehending the mode of union of the unknowable “essences on which the physical qualities of chemical “substances, after combination, depend. Philosophical “chemists, I apprehend, will hereafter be able to refer the “ origin of the theory of the composite structure of matter, “after chemical union, to the influence of ideas derived “ principally from the mechanical mixtures employed in “ pharmacy and in the culinary art.” 12 WILDE, Ponts of Chemical Philosophy. Although many years have elapsed since the above paragraphs were written, I have found no sufficient reason to change the opinions expressed therein, but, on the contrary, much to confirm the conviction that the ultimate constitution of all substances, including the universal medium (ether) that fills infinite space, is abso- lutely inscrutable to’. human understanding. Not the least valuable result of the study of mental philosophy is the conscious realization of its limitations. Mathematical science has no monopoly in the production of mental wreckage, through the vain endeavours of some indi- viduals to measure the incommensurables in geometry and in numbers, and similar dangers beset the path of unwary investigators of the, as yet, obscure phenomena of radio-activity and atomic subdivision. A distinguished cultivator of natural knowledge, Sir W. R. Grove, in his epoch-marking book on the “Correlation of Physical Forces,’* has expressed himself in similar terms with reference to the limitations of man’s knowledge of the ultimate structure of “matter,” and “the harm done by attempting hypothetically to dissect it, and to discuss the shapes, sizes, and numbers of atoms and_ their atmospheres of heat and electricity.” The doctrine that dynamic forces in molecular physics are modes of motion mutually transformable, or, in other words, gualetzes of substance and not specific entities, is fully accepted by all who are versed in the history of natural and mental philosophy. Nevertheless, some eminent writers on radio-activity and sub-atomic me- chanics fail to recognize the results of the labours of the eminent philosophers who have established this doctrine on a firm basis, as they revert to the corpuscular notions prevalent in the seventeenth century, and discuss “ atoms *5th Edition, 1867, Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1906), No. 2. 13 of electricity,” z.¢., of motion, and combinations of “atoms of electricity” with matter. For such writers, Bacon, Locke, Davy, Faraday, Joule and Mayer might never have lived, and the “Correlation of Physical Forces” might never have been written. ADDENDUM. The series H2n possesses some features of local geological interest from the fact that, in the north-western parts of the adjoining county of Derbyshire, the mineral masses consist chiefly, and contain the chemical combina- tions of magnesium, calcium, zinc, strontium, cadmium, barium, and lead, all of which, except magnesium and strontium, are mining products of the district. These include fluor-spar (calcium fluoride), lime (calcium oxide), gypsum, (calcium sulphate), blende (zinc sulphide), cala- mine (zinc silicate), cadmium sulphide, baryta (barium oxide), barytes (barium sulphate), and galena (lead sulphide). Lead mines have been worked from the time of the Roman occupation, in close association with the other combinations of the series H2n. The hot spring of Buxton has been shown by Mr. Strutt to give off radium emanation, and may presumably yield helium, as was recently found in the similar hot spring at Bath by Lord Rayleigh. The occurrence of nearly all the members of the same series of elements within so limited an area, clearly indicates them as evolutionary products of the typical member, helium, at the head of the series H2n. TABLE |, Elementary Substances, with their Atomic Weights in Multiple Proportions, 18785-—1894—1902— 1903—1906 eee Saas + Hxz— + H2az— H3x Han H5 H6x H7n A tees 7) Gl = 8 C = 1%2/|— = 1|B =10|— = 1 |N = 4 S fe 4a) soe eae 12 Se ar Roe 0°59 1°64? 1° : . = 3+ 1°71§ 2°63 Kp we xXe= 63 3) Na — 23 | F — 19 | Mg—- 24 |O = 16 | Al = 27 22 PF =] 20) |= 6 Sit eas O65 A I 28 19 Bea yi\ oe 16. ee aoe aie 31 28335 0°98 174 2°56 182 2°49 4|K = 39 | Cl = 35 |Ca= 40 |S = 32 | Sc= g2/|Ti= 48 |V = 50 | Cr= 54 | Fe= 56 2b Des lice Aga °° 8 fe |e 32 | °- Mae 48 | Bical o 52°41 Mn= 56 . 0°86 i) 1°58 2°05 3°4 41t By Ta Ni = 56 Co= 56 5 | Cu = 62 Zn = 64 Ce—comGe— 72 | As = 75 oe oe 63°3 S00 65 92 : [41 ee . TOU 4s ee 75 8°9 72 6°5 5°47 5°63 6| Rb= 85 | Br = 81 | Sr = 88 | Se = 80 | Ga= 96 | Zr = 92 | Nb= 95 | Mo= 96 oo no 4 85 eo. 80 wane 87°5 ee . 19°4 we . 70 o- go ton eo. 94 a0 oe 96 1°52 370 2°54 4°8 5°95 415° 5°41 6°67 3°6 7| Ag =108 Cd = 112 Y I2Zeon— 116) Sb) — 120 Pd= 105 ETS Seo iy 61°7 V8oumiamees TIO | “= 8 “120 Rh= 105 10°6 8°69 sit 7°29 6°72 Ru= 105 Da= 105 8| Cs =13t |I =127 | Ba=136 | Te=128 | In = 150 | La=140 |x =140 |x = 144 qo POR Eee) 127 137 ee > +728 ifs to) 8 V1) so 2 TG) Ae) Od we ee e. ee Teo S a Anos 3°75 6°3 742 67 8154 root Ones | x = 160 Er = 177 * =164 |x =165 sre SES onan ee yo6| °° 1 eon NG os eee r2-2t | Tonge 94h grt 8-30f 1o| 4 =177 | Ra = 184 Ti = 204 | D = 188 | Ta =185 | W =186 221 | on oo 1 6 O PXoyal ome . 95 ao 2 OTe) OO TReyl | 48 11°85 8-of 10°78? 98 18°26 11 | Hg = 200 | Pb = 208 Th = 231 | U = 240 | Bi =210 Au = 196 som BSG | 207 “> 9 2g ae 24.0 a0 Pt = 1096 136 T1°44 T1'23 134 9°83 Ir = 196 Os = 1096 *Accepted Atomic Weights. tSpecific Gravities. {Estimated. § Anthracite. || Electro-deposited. ’ : bles of Wurtz, R: d Sch P. Cooke, F. W ** hts taken from the standard works and tal Z, Roscoe and Schorlemmer, J. P. Cooke, F. a" The accepted atomic weights are and Watts’ “‘ Dict. Chem., Supp. , p- 247—Atomicity. 56—8'r4l 55—8'00 538—8'66 58—8'96 105°6—12'0 104'4—II'2 104’4—I1'4 196 —19'34 197—21'50 198— 22°42 198—22'48 . Clarke. | Vou. sr: Parr IL. THE MANCHESTER LITERARY & PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY | 19001007. MEMOIRS AND: PROCEEDINGS | | : CONTENTS. “Memoirs : III, A Journey to North-East Rhodesia during 1904 and 1905. By S. A. Neave, M.A., B.Sc. With Plate - i Ngee - pp. 1—7. (Issued separately, January 24th, 1907). 1V. Notes on a Collection of Terrestrial and Fluviatile Mollusca, made in North-Eastern Rhodesia, during 1905, by Mr. Sheffield A. Neave, M.A., B.Sc. By James Cosmo Melvill, M.A., F. le Ss and Robert Standen. W7th Plate - = fj S - pp. 1—r6 (ssued separately, February 20th, 1907). ¢ V. On a Collection of Mammals made by Mr. S. A. Neave in Rhodesia, North of the Zambesi, with Field Notes by the Collector. By R. C. Wroughton - = ss E 3 3 4 - pp. I—39. (Issued separately, March a, 1907). VI. The Grouping of the Chemical Elements. By C. E. Stromeyer, M.Inst.C.E. - - - - - - : - - - pp. I—I5. (Issued separately, March 7th, 1907). VII. On the Structure of Syringodendron, the Bark of Sigillaria. By Katharine H. Coward, B.Sc. With Plate - - - - - pp. I—6. (Ussued separately, March 11th, 1907). VIII. The Parichnos in the ee ge F. E. Weiss, D.Sc. Math Plate - - - - - - : - pp. I—22. (Issued separately, April 23rd, 1907). Proceedings - = - . - - - - - - : - pp. xvii, —xxx. MANCHESTER: - 26, GEORGE STREET. Price Four Shillings. RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY. Presented. Balch, T. W. France in North Africa, 1906, 1906. Bashforth, F. Ballistic Experiments from 1864-1880. 1907. Bordeaux.—Societe des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles. Cinquantenaire de la Société, 15-16 Janvier, 1906. 1906. Canada.—Geological Survey. Section of Mines Annual Report for 1904. 1906. —— —— Preliminary Report on the Rossland, B.C., Mining District. By R. W. Brock, 1906. —— —— Report on the Chibougamau Mining Region in the northern part of the Province of Quebec. By A. P. Low. 1906. -Delft.—Technische Hoogeschool. Over de Exhaust-werking bij Locomotieven. (With 3 packets of diagrams). [By] F.C. Huygen. [1907]. ~Geneve.—Societe de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle. (Euvres completes de J. C. Galissard de Marignac. 2 tomes. [1907.] Janet, Ch. Anatomie de la téte du Lascus nzger. 1905. Liverpool.—University Institute of Commercial Research in the Tropics. Maize, Cocoa and Rubber. Flints on their production in W. Africa, By Viscount Mountmorres. 1907. London.—Royal Society. Reports of the Mediterranean Fever Commission. Part 5- 1907. Paoli, G. C. Dialcune importanti Questioni Filosofiche. 1907. Philadelphia.—American Philosophical Society. The Record of the Celebra- tion of the 200th Anniversary of the Birth of Benjamin Franklin; .. . April 17-21, 1906. 1906. Prag.—K. K. Sternwarte. Astronomische Beobachtungen . . . in den Jahren, 1900-1904 . , . von Dr. L. Weinek. 1907. Pratt, E. A. Licensing and Temperance in Sweden, Norway, and Denmark. 1907. ‘Wilde, Dr. Henry. A Chemical conception of the Ether. By D. Mendeleéeff. 1904. Purchased. Alder, J., and A. Hancock. ‘The British Tunicata... Vol. 2. 1907. (Ray Society.) NEW EXCHANGES. . Albuquerque.— University of New Mexico. Bulletin. And the usual Exchanges and Periodicals. | | Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lt. (1906), No. 3. ItI. A Journey to North-east Rhodesia during 1904 and 1905. 1Biy (Sy dats INA ILIA UBL Siee, Naturalist to the Geodetic Survey. (Communicated by Dr. W. E. Hoyle, F_R.S.E.) Recevved and read October 30th, 1906. I left England early in 1904 as Naturalist to the Geodetic Survey of North-Eastern Rhodesia. For this I am indebted to the great generosity of Mrs. Stoehr and her son, Dr. F. Stoehr, medical officer to the Expedition, and also to the British South Africa Company, whose guest I had the honour of being. I also received con- siderable assistance and encouragement from the Com- mittee of the Manchester Museum. Finally, I must express my unbounded gratitude to Mr. Robert Codrington, the administrator, and the other officials of the Company, who, wherever I went, greeted me with the greatest hospitality and gave me every possible assistance. Landing at Chinde, one of the mouths of the Zambesi, a three weeks’ journey, via Tete, brought me to Fort Jameson, the seat of the Administration. After some little delay, owing to difficulties of transport, I travelled down to Feira, at the junction of the Zambesi and Loangwa rivers. Here I met with some of the other members of the survey. Here also I was able to start serious collecting, having now assembled together my apparatus, much of which had not accompanied me from Fort Jameson, but had come direct from Tete. January 24th, 1907. 2 NEAVE, A Journey to North-east Rhodesia. I spent a short time on Mt. Kapsuku on the south bank of the Zambesi. Thence, having obtained a supply of carriers, 1 travelled some 60 miles along the north bank of the river, and made a short stay at this point, collect- ing specimens on both banks of the river. Thence | moved in a north-easterly direction, travelling very slowly, crossed the Loangwa at Ntambwa’s, some 4o miles above Feira, into Portuguese territory. Here I spent about a month and a half travelling slowly about. By this time the dry season, which lasts from about the beginning of April to the end of October, was at its height, and animal life was relatively speaking not very abundant. Early in October I returned to Ntambwa’s on the Loangwa, where I found the members of the survey at their base camp. The rains were now imminent, and two weeks later I deemed it advisable to start for Petauke, some 120 miles to the N.E., which was reached at the beginning of November. This place being but little to the east of the route the survey proposed to take, I had selected it for my base. This charming spot is a government station, Mr. H. S. Thornicroft being the Native Commissioner, and it was not a little due to his kindness and _ hospitality that I was able to do a large amount of work there. With the exception of a few short excursions in different directions, I made no journey of any importance until the middle of April, 1905. The rainy season being then over, I started in a S. Easterly direction, through the thickly populated Mbala country, a more open district than I had previously met with. Travelling slowly nearly to the Portuguese border, I turned westward, and crossed the Loangwa river. After visiting members of the survey not far from the west bank, I returned to that river, and spent Manchester Memotrs, Vol. lz. (1906), No. 3. 3 a considerable time amongst the abundant fauna on its banks. Retracing my steps somewhat, and with many halts, I returned to Petauke at the end of July to refit. After a short excursion northward, I started at the end of August ona trip I had long contemplated to the high plateau country west of the Mchinga range. Having crossed the Loangwa and Lukashashi rivers, which are separated by the Niamgoza mountains, a further 30 miles brought me to the well marked escarpment of the Mchingas. Upon the plateau, which extends to the Kafue and beyond it, I found a very different fauna, as the collections will, I think, show. The boundary between N.E. and N.W. Rhodesia has been recently changed, and this part of the country is now under the latter administration. Travelling slowly in a N.W. direction, through a thinly populated but magnificent country, with abundance of running streams, I reached the new Government station at Ndola, close to a large native village known as Chewallas. Here I was most hospitably received by Mr. J. E. Stephenson, the Native Commissioner. Leaving this place I turned S.W. and struck the Kafue river (there locally called the Livu) some 50 miles below its source. Thence I travelled southwards to Kapopo an old government post now deserted and spent some days ata remarkable limestone pool at no great distance from that place. This pool which is probably due to a subsidence in the limestone, is roughly square, the length of a side being about 200 yards. It lies in the midst of a flat piece of country and has precipitous sides. The surface of the water, at this, the driest season of the year, was some 15 feet below the top of the walls. Attempts were made to sound it, but although 300 feet of rope were used, bottom could not be found at that depth, 4 NEAVE, A Journey to North-east Rhodesia. even near the edge. The water itself was intensely still, cold, and pellucid. It was full of fish, but I was unsuccessful in catching them on a rod and unfortunately had no other means at my disposal. The local natives look upon the pool with great suspicion and will not even drink its water. My time being now short I turned eastward and having crossed my old route, took a more ‘northerly course. After a somewhat difficult journey owing to shortage of food supplies for my carriers, through a fine but mountainous country the Loangwa was crossed, and Petauke reached at the end of November. After one or two short expeditions, I left Petauke for Fort Jameson early in January, 1906, and thence reached the coast, travelling through British Central Africa, via Lake Nyassa and Blantyre. Wherever I went I met with friendly, peaceable, and for the most part prosperous natives. This is not a little remarkable, and reflects great credit on the Administra- tion, when one considers that less than ten years before the country was entirely unadministered and was overrun with slave dealers and raiders, the weaker tribes being in daily peril from the attacks of the stronger. The people of the Loangwa valley in particular are a remarkably industrious, tractable, and law-abiding race. They are also great agriculturists. They mostly belong to the Senga tribe, with some admixture of Chikunda and Angoni stock. Westward, on the plateau, the people belong to the Alala tribe, and westward again to the Kafue, the Alamba are found. The two latter tribes differ very much in their method of agriculture from the peoples of the Loangwa valley. Their gardens are renewed every year instead of every two or three, and they further cut down and destroy five or six acres of bush Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1906), No. 3. is land for every one that they actually cultivate. This they do in order to obtain sufficient timber to burn on the cultivated patches. This is a serious matter for the future of this part of the country, and though it is difficult, efforts should be made to teach the natives to cultivate the highly fertile but somewhat swampy lower ground which abounds in many parts of the plateau, with maize instead of sorghum and millet, which at present form their main crop. Want of space prevents me from considering further the natives of the country, who are nevertheless remarkably interesting. Three rather distinct types of country were met with. (1) The low country up to 2,000 feet, such as is found in the valley of the ].oangwa and of the Zambesi at the point where the former river joins it. This is charac- terised by patches of typically tropical vegetation, with palms, etc ; by areas of more or less dense thorn scrub ; by sandy flats covered with Copaiferous “mopani” trees, varied by small open spaces, but remarkable for the absence of undergrowth. This country breaks up in many places toward the foot hills into stony ridges, with comparatively thin vegetation. (2) The country from 2,000—3,000 feet is mainly of a broken and hilly character, and a large part of it, including nearly all the hills, is covered with a thin woodland. Large timber is not usually met with, except on the banks of streams. Here and there are open spaces, locally known as “dambos,”’ covered in the rainy season with immensely tall grass. (3) Above 3,000 feet the woodland is of similar character, but less in extent, the open grassy spaces being markedly larger. Here and there in places granite kopjes may be seen. On the high plateau towards the Kafue parts of the country exhibit the well-known park- 6 NEAVE, A Journey to North-east Rhodesia. like character so often described by African travellers. There are also patches of dense jungle, mainly composed of evergreen trees, and usually found on the banks of streams. There can be but little doubt that the annual bush fires in the dry season, universal in this country, have had a marked effect upon the flora, and to a less extent the fauna, of this part of Africa. It is perhaps one of the reasons why fine timber, except near water, is extremely scarce. The collections made cover most of the orders of the animal kingdom, and detailed accounts of the more important groups will shortly be published. An opportunity of returning shortly to Central Africa prevents me from myself publishing an account of some of the Lepidoptera, in addition to the Birds, as I had hoped to do. I am glad to say, however, that I have been able to leave this part of the work in the competent hands of my friend, Dr. F. A. Dixey, of Wadham College, Oxford. I was unable through lack of time to make a large botanical collection. Flowering plants I found chiefly conspicuous at the higher elevations, and at the beginning and after the end of the rains, ze., the Spring and Autumn of the year. I made a somewhat large number of notes upon native names of the specimens collected. They are mainly the names used by the Manganja, Achawa, and other Lake Nyassa tribes and those of the Asenga in the lower Loangwa valley. A few were obtained from the Alala and Alamba people on the plateau. The average native’s knowledge of the Fauna of his country is remarkably good, though individuals vary very much in this particular. a Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lz. (1906), Wo. 3. yi In conclusion I would remind Zoologists that Natural History collecting in Tropical Africa is a very different matter from similiar work in more temperate latitudes. The labour of preserving specimens from Ants, Termites, small Rodents and other foes is nearly as great as that of collecting them. Further from the nature of the life and methods of travel, pleasant though it is, one’s working day is necessarily a short one, especially when on the march. The very fact of travelling about, accompanied by some 50 or more natives, in itself entails attending to endless little matters, which nevertheless cannot be neglected. YSNostHo ACNAdjag Ene Sere eee t ! © ( ! | SYlOW vey H ' ! \ ! Manchester Memoirs, Vol. L1. (No. 8). wmany.Wedvmge NawMaiH> \HSOF Wom ° TH NSHOvg oN wneey Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 4. IV. Notes on a Collection of Terrestrial and Fluviatile Mollusca, made in North-Eastern Rhodesia, during 1905, by Mr. Sheffield A. Neave, M.A., B.Sc. By JAMES COSMO MELVILL, M.A., F.L.S., ROBERT STANDEN, Assistant Keeper, Manchester Museunv. ( Recewved and Read November 27th, 1906.) The collections of mollusca formed by Mr. Sheffield A. Neave a year ago (1905), mainly in the neighbourhood of the Loangwa and Kafue Rivers, North-Eastern Rhodesia, are more remarkable for quality than quantity, being select indeed both in numbers and the material gathered. Geographically, this section of Rhodesia, situate, roughly speaking, long. 28°50’ to 34°E., lat. 8°50’ to 16°S., impinges on the West on the vast Congo Free State, Northeastward on German East Africa, and due East ony ebritishy Central Airica) “and Nyasaland) 9As) Dr: Pilsbry* well remarks, the “West African Achatine are “usually more richly coloured than the East African, “and are more diversified in form, size, and coloration. “No species are yet known to be common to the West “and the Lake region or East coast.” And what is here said concerning the large Agate snails may be held good for the majority of the other families of mollusca. The productions of Rhodesia may best, we think, be compared with those of German East Africa, a vast a Man Conch. a volet7. pans: february 20th, 1907. 2 MELVILL & STANDEN, Mollusca Jrom N.E. Rhodesia. area indeed, but which during the past twenty or more years has been especially studied, and the results given to the world in such classical treatises as Dr. Eduard von Martens’ “Beschalte Weichthiere Ost-Afrikas” (1897). In this the author, whose recent demise has been universally deplored, names about 420 species as occurring in that region, a number now considerably augmented. Another work of great interest is that of J. R. Bourguignat, “Mollusques de l’Afrique équinoctiale” (1889). M. M. Dupuis and Putzeys have mainly studied the mollusca of the Congo basin, while the late C. F. Ancey*; in a more general way, has described many species from several tropical areas. Lastly, Mr. Edgar A. Smith, I.S.O., has published much on the subject during the past five and twenty years, and to him we are now especially indebted for having examined, in our company, the whole of Mr. Neave’s gatherings, and given the benefit of his advice and past experience with regard to them. Our thanks are also due to the authorities of the Manchester Museum, for having requested us to undertake the following enu- meration, and placing all facilities in our way. The types will be placed in the Manchester Museum. LOCALITIES VISITED. Mr. Sheffield Neave writes regarding this :— Petauke. The majority of the mollusca collected came from Petauke or its immediate neighbourhood. This is the Government Station of the westernmost section of the East Loangwa district, and lies some 25 miles east of that river,and some 600 feet above it. Elevation about 2,400 feet. The country here is mountainous and wooded Burtoa arnold: (nilotica) and the Achatine generally are *It was whilst writing this present paper that we heard, with much regret, of the death of M. Ancey, in the autumn of 1906. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 4. 3 found on the ground after heavy rains. I never met with living specimens during the dry season, viz., from April to October. Mtertze River. Yhe Mterize River is a tributary of the Loangwa, and flows 50 miles South of Petauke, through well-wooded and hilly country. Elevation, 2,000 TeSE, Loangwa River. A few species came from the main bed of this important river, say at lat. 15° 30. Elevation, 1,700 feet. The neighbourhood of this river and its tributaries was found poor in mollusca, perhaps owing to the scarcity of limestone. Alala Plateau. The Alala Plateau lies due West of the Mchinga escarpment. More open country prevails here, with large stretches of grass land. (September I15—20, 1905.) Elevation 4,000 feet. Kafue River. A few shells were collected on the banks of a small stream at Ndola, a Government Station near the Kafue River. The country is fairly open, but with patches of very dense forest in the proximity of streams. Elevation 4,000 feet. Kapopo.* Vhe famous limestone pool near Kapopo was visited 26th and 27th October, 1905. Judging by the great abundance of dead shells, mollusca must here be plentiful as regards individuals, though the number of actual species is apparently very limited. Country more or less open, with forest-patches as at Ndola, and about the same elevation (4,000 feet). Mollusca are known to the natives as “ Mkorno,” and many of the larger terres- trial species are dried and eaten by the people of the Alamba Tribe in this neighbourhood (Kapopo), but not, ‘so far as can be ascertained, elsewhere. S: Aly Ni *N.B.—In Keith Johnston’s Atlas (Ed. 1905) Kapopo is spelt Chepopo. 4 MELVILL & STANDEN, Mollusca from N.E. Rhodesia. We may add that, although this very interesting col- lection is small numerically, yet but few similar gatherings from tropical Africa made at one time and under similar circumstances much exceed it in actual count of species. Vast numbers of individuals, identical specifically, occur in certain favoured spots, accumulated together and eregarious, but there does not seem to be the wealth of variety that is obtainable in many other parts of the world, several of them of lesser area, if such an excep- tional locality as Lake Tanganyika and its peculiar quasi-marine fauna be not taken into account. — CLASS GASTROPODA. Fam. CYCLOSTOMATID& (Pomatiaside). Pomatias nyassanus, Smith. Pomatias nyassanus, E. A. Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1899, P: 591, pl. 35, fig. 5. Hab. Petauke ; living good examples at 2,400 feet. Mterize River, Loangwa, one, dead, at 2,000 feet. Also. good, but dead, specimens from the banks of the Loangwa River Jdatwi5e On at 1.700meet This species is conspicuous for its many close and prominent spiral carine. In this it to some extent ap- proximates to P. transvaalensis (M.&P.) and P. pluriliratus (Fulton), both species occurring further South, but the riblets on these latter species are not so pronounced. It is really nearer P. zzsaularzs (Rve) or P. hemastoma (Anton). P. letourneauxt (Bgt.) and P. zanguebaricus (Petit) from contiguous neighbourhoods, are likewise akin. It is probable several of these species occur in Rhodesia. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 4. 5 Fam. VIVIPARIDA. Cleopatra mterizensis sp. n. (Fig. 2 of Plate). Cl. testa angusté umbilicata, ovato-oblonga, lzvigata, solidula, pallidé straminea, anfractibus 6, tumidulis, quorum apicales brunnei, Jeeves, tribus infra apud medium acuté spiraliter carinatis, ultimo anfractu carina conspicua ad medium, utrimque obscuré spiraliter angulato, quasi- tricarinato, apertura ovato-rotunda, peristomate continuo, feré rotundo, tenui, margine columellari paullum incrassato. le 4s) Diam S mam: Hab. Bed of Mterize River, a tributary of the Loangwa River. A plain little species, with the upper whorls once spirally keeled, the penultimate twice, the lower carina only just above the suture, and partially obscured by the erowth of the body whorl, this latter being provided with a central keel, and a rudimentary one on each side, causing the semblance of two slight angles. No colour zones are visible, this and the straw-coloured surface being perhaps both owing to a bleached condition. In form and general appearance C. dulzmotdes Oliv. is approached, but that species is never carinate. Cl. ement E. A. Smith (Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1888, Pp. 54, fig. 2) is nearer. This species is considered by von Martens synonymous with CZ pzrvothz Jickeli (1881), this name having thus a priority of seven years. Here the keels are very acute and distinct, blackish brown on a pale ground, and the body whorl decidedly bicarinate. The form is gradate, and not in the least ventricose, as is Cl. mterczenszs, And, lastly, Cz johnstonz, E. A. Sm. (Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1893, p. 637, pl. 59, fig. 9) differs entirely in sculpture, not being therefore in any degree comparable. 6 MELVILL & STANDEN, Wollusca from N.E. Rhodesia. Fam. AMPULLARIID/. Lanistes. affinis Smith. Lantstes affinis, E. A. Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1877, Ob Oy, [elle aly NSE Ye Lantstes ovum Pet. var. affinis, E. A.Smith; E. von Martens “‘ Beschalte Weichthiere Deutsch-ost-Afrikas,” p. 166. Hab. Mterize River, Loangwa, July, 1905, and Zambesi River. Seems to us a distinct species. Some fine examples from Nyasa are in the British Museum. Mr. Neave’s examples are characteristic, but small. Lanistes neavei sp. n. (Figs. 1 and 3 of Plate). L. testa sinistrorsa, ovato-rotunda, solidula, profundé umbilicata, albo-cinerea, spiraliter arcté multi-zonulata, zonulis variis, sepe apud basin anfractus ultimi evanidis, anfractibus 5, ad suturas multum impressis, infra suturas paullum planulatis, deinde ventricosis, lineis incrementa- libus arctis longitudinaliter in speciminibus adultis, praeci- pué ad anfractum ultimum, fortiter preeditis, apertura feré rotunda intus, ut extus, zonulata, zonulis ultra marginem interiorem evanidis, peristomate paullum in- crassato, albo, nitido, continuo, margine columellari obliquato. Alt. 20. Diam. 25 mm. spec. maj. Hab. Kapopo, Oct. 26th, 1905. A considerable number of examples, mostly somewhat immature. These latter are smoother and more shining, clearly exhibiting the characteristic spiral brown-zoned marking, especially on the body whorl. Two examples of a variety occurred in which these zones are entirely absent, these might be designated as var. wuzcolor (Fig. 3). It gives us much pleasure to connect with this interesting Manchester Memotrs, Vol. le. (1907), No. 4. Ti form, of which unnamed examples from Nyasa exist in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.), the name of its discoverer, Mr. Sheffield A. Neave. Lanistes ovum Peters. Lanistes ovum, Peters; Troschel, Archiv f. WMaturgesch., Jahrg. LVOl ise De 2 koe) Dla Ones Ti OAS. Hab. Banks of a small stream at Ndola, at 4,000 feet alt. Two living examples with opercula. Both seem juvenile, and we are not quite sure of the identification. The species undoubtedly would occur in Rhodesia, being widely distributed, and reported also from Delagoa Bay, to Tanganyika and Nyasa. | Fam. MELANIID~. Melania tuberculata O. F. Miiler. Nerita tuberculata, O. F. Miller, “ Hist. Verm.,” vol. 2, p. 191, 1774 Melanoides fasciolata, Olivier, ‘Voy. Emp. Ottoman,” vol. 2, Os AS, Olle Baty wes Fe Melania tuberculata (Mull.); Philippi, “‘ Abbild. neuer Conch.,” WO 1, Ol, Ty ty, VG). Hab. Bed of Mterize River, a tributary of the Loangwa. May 23, 1905. One of the most widely distributed of all tropical or subtropical mollusca. The original types came from the Coromandel Coast. It is reported as far south as the Transvaal, and will very probably be found in Natal. Fam. LIMNAEID. Planorbis bowkeri Melvill and Ponsonby. Planorbis Bowkert, Melvill and Ponsonby, Anz. Mag. Nat. Hist., (G), WO, 12s jo, TItin, ITS. sie), nsyO\er. 8 MELVILL & STANDEN , Mollusca from N.E. Rhodesia. Hab. Bed of Mterize River, May 23, 1905. Also from Ndola, Kafue River, at 4,000 feet. A small Planorbis, allied to P. natalensis, Krauss, but of inferior size, with the disks both more deeply excavate proportionately. Described originally from examples collected in the Transvaal by Colonel Bowker (E. L. Layard). This shews a great northward extension of its range. Fam. PHysID&. Physopsis africana Krauss. Physopsis africana, Krauss, “ Siidafrik. Mollusken,” p. 85, pl. 5, fig. 14, 1848. Hab. Bed of Mterize River, May 23rd, 1905. Also in the Kafue River, near Ndola. A well-known tropical and South African species, occurring as far south as Natal. Our specimens seem intermediate between the type and P. ovozdea Bgt., which surely can be but a variety. This latter shell is figured by von Martens (Zc. pl. 6, fig. 13). Fam. TESTACELLIDA. Streptaxis nseudweensis Putzeys. Streptaxis nseudweensis, Putz., Ann. Soc. Malac. Belgique, vol. 34, Bull. p. lv. fig., 1899. Petauke, at 2,400 feet. One specimen only, immature. The species is beauti- fully longitudinally striate on the upper portion of the whorls. Distrib., Congo, W. Africa. Fam. LIMACID&. Helicarion nyassanus Smith. Flelicarion nyassanus E. A. Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1899, p. 582, fig. 9. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. le. (1907), No. 4. 9 Var excellens nov. (Fig. 7 of Plate). Hab. Petauke, 25 miles E. of Loangwa River, at PAO Teets Several examples, mostly with the animal, all agree- ing in deviation from the type by greater planulation or flattening of the upper portions of the whorls. The nearest approach to this species seems to be //. cazllaudt Morelet*, a form likewise planulate, but not quite to the Same extent. Martensia mossambicensis (Pfeiffer). Flelix mossambicensis Pfeiffer, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1855, p. 91, Dion tigen Mone Elelice4 vole 45 plea. Nanina (Trochomorpha) Mossambicensts (Pfr.), v. Martens, J7Za/. Llatt., vol. 6, p. 211, &c., 1859. Martensia mossambicensis Semper, ‘Reis. Archip. Philippin.,” part 2, vol. 3, p. 42, pl. 3, fig. 5 ; H. Godwin-Austen, Proc. Neth, SO Maps S76 Ty Js PSi; Fe iO, SS, T= 1e (anatomy), 1895. Trochonanina mozambicensis Mousson, Journ. de Conch., vol. 17, p- 330, 1869 ; Bourguignat, ‘‘ Moll. Afrique équat.,” p. 17 ; E. A. Smith, Proc. Mat. Soc. Lond., vol. 1, p. 164, 1894. Hab. Petauke. February 19, 1905, and near Loangwa River, June 12, 1905. A fine variety of this widely distributed and common species, conspicuous for its very fine microscopical spiral concentric striz, omnipresent over the whole surface, espe- cially conspicuous towards the base. Most varieties of M. mossambicenszs are smooth basally. Of the several varietal names imposed, Mr. Neave’s specimens most assimilate JZ. nseudweensts Dup. and Putz. *C.f. von Martens ‘‘ Ost Afrika,” pp. 37, 38, pl. 1, f. 4, and pl. 3, f. 2. 10 MELVILL & STANDEN, Wollusca from N.E. Rhodesia. Fam. PUPIDZ. Ena (Rhachis) melanacme (Pfeiffer). Bulimus melanacme, Pfeiffer, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1855, p. 96, pl. 31, fig-8; /@, “Monogr. Helic. viy.,” p. 486. Bulimus (Rhachis) melanacme (Pfr.), von Martens in Albers, “‘Heliceen,” ed. 2, p. 231; La, Wachr. deutsch. mal. Ges., vol. 4, 1869, p. 152. Pachnodus sesamorum, Bourguignat, ‘‘ Moll. Afrique équat.,” Ob (lO, JO By HGS, By Ss WSL Hab. Petauke, March 15, 1905. A living, but not quite mature example, well coloured, and shewing the brown spiral zones so characteristic of the species, as also the black apex, from which it takes its specific name. Ena (Rhachis) sticta (v. Martens). Bulimus (Rhachis) stictus, . von Martens, Afal. Blitz, vol. 6, Po 2ni. pl. 2, fig. 6; 1850: Pteitier, Monogr Helicyives. WOl, O} JO, WAI Hab. Petauke, March 15, 1905. Though dead in condition, referred without much doubt to this species, a very characteristic and easily discerned one, described originally from Mozambique. Fam. STENOGYRID&. Limicolaria sp. Hab. Kapopo, October 26, 1905. One perfect, but somewhat bleached representative of this genus, which may, perhaps, be a form of L. saturata, BA. Smith'* Whe head quarters ot this latteniseenimne be the Victoria and Albert Edward Nyanza districts. At the latter locality it was discovered by Mr. G. F. Scott- Elliot in 1894. " Proc. Mal. Soc. Lond., vol. i, p. 323, fig. 1, 1895. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 4. II Burtoa nilotica (Pfeiffer). Bulimus niloticus Pfeiffer, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1861, p. 243 Mat. Blatt., vol. 8; p. 14, 1862. Limicolaria nilotica Pfr., “‘Novitat. Conch.,” vol. 4, p. 5, figs. I—3. (var. Schwernfurthit inclusa.) Achatina nilotica von Martens, Alal. Blatl., 1870, p. 22. Burtoa nilotica Brgt., “Moll. Afrique équat.,” p. 89, March, 1899. Livinhacia nilotica Crosse., Journ. de Conch., 1889, p. 109. Lirinhacia arnoldi Sturany, “ Stidafrik. Mollusken,” p. 59, 1898. Hab. Petauke. Many varieties of this large and imposing mollusc are described and figured by various authors, notably von Martens* and Bourguignat. The latter, indeed, has unduly created a new genus (Aurtopszs}, besides several so called species, all formed out of the B. zzlotica, and the remarks of Mr. Edgar Smith, in reference to this subject, may be read with profitable interest. The distribution is wide, extending over a very large area both North and South of the Victoria Nyanza, where seem to be its head-quarters. Achatina craveni Smith. Achatina kirkit EB. A. Smith, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (5), vol. 6, p- 428, 1880, non A. kirkit (Pseudoglessula kirkit), Craven (1880). Achatina cravenit E. A. Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1881, Ob BSS. jo Be, lie, Ts (OD, Gir WSOC), 1, SOO, Ole Bi, why tip 2 Hab. Petauke, and its immediate neighbourhood, up to 2,400 feet. A very handsome, but variable species, of fairly wide distribution, abounding in the Tanganyika, M’bwa, and Massai Countries, also in Nyasaland, and not unknown at Zanzibar. Several examples in various stages of growth. * « Ost Afrika,” pp. 94—98. + Proc. Mal. Soc. Lond., vol. 1, p. 324. 12 MELVILL & STANDEN, Wollusca from N.E. Rhodesta. Achatina immaculata Lamarck. Achatina tmmaculata, Lamarck, ‘‘Anim. s. vert.,” vol. 6, Ath 2 Oeen2 6, aNOs93, La22- Hab. Petauke, February and March, 1905. A few examples of this old established : bank of, Zambesi. | May 23 moe Alt. 1250. KR. 16. No skin: Fetra-Zambesi..”) May, 20a@ens AM; TARO) R. 254. East of Loangwa. Portuguese East Africa. Sept. 10; 19042) Alt, 1400: ROA, 50S, 712. Petauke, Nov. 16 and tomnees and March 9, 1904. Alt. 2400. “«Mpundu’ of the Asenga.” Tatera panja. Tatera panja, Wrought., Anu. Mag. Nat. Hist., (7), vol. 17, p. 476, 1906. Re 3 92S: bank of Zambest. ‘May 27, 1904.) tltaa 25e" Tatera neavei, sp. n. K. 125 12019 9. Ndolay October 2 1o0r mma about 4000. A rather small Yadcera, much resembling xzzgrzta in general appearance, but having a marked pale (albescent) streak on the face, above and below, from about the middle of the eye extending to the ear; this streak, how- ever, is broken by a blackish patch just below the base of the ear.. The skull dimensions are also as in zzgrz¢a, but so far as the material available shows, the interparietal is Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 5. 19 longer and much more convex posteriorly, giving a pos- teriorly tapering look to the skull when viewed from above. The grooves of the incisors are obsolescent. The following are measurements of these two speci- mens and of the type of zzgrzda. R. 138 (type). R. 139. zigrita?. Head and body es ete ee) RAAT ey) a1 es Manly ccs oa ee Meee 27. meas T40 Hind feet Hee a See SOUS 34 32 Beate ek aha bh 20 22 20 Greatest length of skull Soe 1 ? 38 Basilar a if 29 ? 30 Zygomatic breadth ... Lh AO ? 20 Length of upper molar row ... 6 6 6 Avmt, eos. § lemein OF louiliee ... ~— LOS ? iit All these specimens are fully adult. In my review of the Genus VJazera,* I pointed out that short-tailed forms were characteristic of the country between the Zambesi and the Equator. In this character neavelt supports my view, but instead of resembling xyas@ or uyas@ shirensis, its near neighbours, it must in my key (Lc, p. 477) be placed at the end of the first group of Section I]. under c. with the Uganda form zigvzta. From that species it may be distinguished exteriorly by the face marking, by the comparatively shorter tail: and larger hind feet. In skull characters the most distinctive is the obsolescence of the grooves of the incisors, as in fallax, which suffices to distinguish it from any Tazera of its size. “The note in my diary on this species says ‘ Perhaps a variety of “ Mpundu,” but a much less red skin. Typical “«Mpundu” also occur here.’” * Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (7), vol. 17, p. 474, 1906. 20 WROUGHTON, Collection of Mammats from Rhodesia. Gerbilliscus boehmi. Gerbillus boehmi, Noack, Zool. Jahrb., vol. 2, p. 241. 1888. Re ron", . Mbala Country, May 7; 1905, Aligeue: R 104. Mbala Country. May 13,1905. Alt. 2600. The type came from Tanganyika and was distinctly smaller, in all dimensions, than these specimens, but there iS a specimen from the Nyika Plateau, British Central Africa, which is almost as large. “T had heard of the existence of this species lone before I succeeded in obtaining specimens. It prefers. somewhat open sandy country, living in burrows. It is exceedingly active. The Asenga call it ‘Mtoroka’ and state that adult males are much larger than either of the above specimens.” Dendromus pumilio. Dendromys pumilio, Wagn., Miinch. Gel. Anz., vol. 12, p. 437, 1820. R 21¢. Pakolwe Mountain. August 20, 1904. RV261320 6520 9°) Portuguese Mast Africa, Sepemo——ma 1904. IR BAG Wilterias INivee, OG Bi, 1OOA, These specimens are quite the same in all essential characters as a series from Nyasa in the British Museum Collection. No species have been described from this. part of Africa and the material available for examination is rather meagre. It seems to me best to refer these specimens, at any rate for the present, to one of the two. South African species. Skulls which have been identified as mesomelas Brants are consistently distinguishable by the shape of the frontals from the present specimens which I therefore call provisionally pumzzlzo. “This small species is said to be especially common in Banana plantations. ‘Msuntwa’ of the Lake tribes as. well as of the Asenga.” Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 5. 21 -Steatomys pratensis. Steatomys pratensis, Peters, S.B. Akad, Wiss. Berl., 1846, p. 258. Steatomys edulis, Peters, ‘‘ Reis. Moss.,” p. 163, 1852. Reo Cni4g a Ne bankvon Zambest. july 16) 1604, ANNE, TSO), Ik, 52,532 @. Uesiemlxe,” IDecy 241, noo. — ANhe 2xicte, IN BOS, G7 Bo Ieetailie, IDEs BO, liGiewl, ANE BAO) Roy om meichunionwnear Betaukes ~Atoril 7, 1905. “This species, which is very common, is called ‘Neambwa’ by the Asenga. I was much struck by the fact that a large number of the individuals I saw, were blind in one or both eyes. “When I was in the Mbala Country on May 4, 1905, six specimens of this mouse were dug out of a burrow in the middle of my camp. Of these two were blind in both eyes and two others in one eye. “ All mice and rats are eaten by the natives, but this is considered a special delicacy on account of its fat.” Mus rattus. NDS. FRBCOS, Veiiotor, SySie INEM” OGk: op 10 Oly WSS. R.18¢. Ntambwa’s. August 3, 1904. . Alt. 1400. IR, UO) 2s tambwa’s. August 5, 1904. Alt. 1400. IR, Og. Wewivlke, IDecennoer 17) woo, 7) ake, Bzieo: cae ? P ? These are not unlike specimens of vattus from the Nyika Plateau, British Central Africa, but there is less brown in the colouring, and the skull is somewhat shorter and wider. “*Koswe’ of all local tribes. It is a great pest in many native villages.” Mus walambe, sp. nov. Rete Ome tien latcalky mm September 2.) 1OO5: Alt. 4000. 22 WROUGHTON, Collection of Mammats from Rhodesia. Reig2ig. Katue "River... Oct-19; 1905. “Ali eos: ke 143%.) Nisofu River, Nov.3, 100m. A medium sized rat with the outward characters and proportions very much as in /zxdez, Thos. from British East Africa. Fur soft and glossy ; hairs of back about to mm. in length. General colour bright tawny, dulled by the dark slate almost black bases of the hairs showing through; paler on the sides. Cheeks, throat and belly dull white (the hairs with slatey bases), the last not sharply defined from the upper side. Tail short, above brown, darkening distally to almost black, below dull white also darkening towards the tip. The skull characters on the whole as in Azuzdez but the anteorbital plate, though “not concave below” as in #zudez, shows a distinct angle where the upper and anterior edges meet as in zyzke. The palate, however, does not extend backwards as in /zzdez, not even so much so as in 2yzke@ ; both molars and bulle larger than in either Azxzdez or nyike. The dimensions are as follows. (Type). hindet. nyike. Rersicalkor42 thee — Pleadtandibodyaerssese sca: E50. 1475 155 170@) 57 ale sine eek Agent 124s 120) 128 are I51 FAitncltOot hase cceeectvcne ss 2575 { e2O0nt) 2504. seve memes IBD auras eee ee ee age Pian PAO Che. IO) 18 Skull: sereatest length) 7, 27 27 8) 28 eas Basilar length ...... 32 BG wise paso P Zygomatic breadth 20 20°} 21.3) ,.tOW7 ae is oluppesmolamseriesse. 9471 Vi 7 59 6:7 Ant. post length of bulle 8 8 8 7 6'5 Age and Sex.j2adult 2) old’¢ - eld G@yadulee Though geographically mzyzke intervenes, qwalambe certainly more nearly resembles /zmdez, the brighter colouring and larger molars and bullz.serve to distinguish Manchester Memotrs, Vol. li. (1907), No. 5. 23 = it. From xyéke as from its other neighbour chrysophilus its short tail at once separates it, and its broader skull and much larger bull serve to further distinguish it from nytke. “«Mtuku’ of the local natives. Inhabits swampy grass country and is seldom trapped.” Mus. sp. (multimammate). RAS (ye) Ss: bank of “Zambest: | May 27, 1904: JE MMe, LBRO), Rete On (ve®) a Noken of) Zambesiy = jully 14) 19048 Alt. 1500. (No skull). R. 20g. Ntambwa’s. Aug. 6, 1904. Alt. 1400. Rew2 2s ee ortusuese, Mast Aunicay | Auer 926, 1904: Alt. 1400. R26 ie 7 ctaukes Manchin. O05, seat 2400. IR, SOE. Ieee, Wlevteln BO, NOOR. ANI, 22100). (R.99¢6?). Mbala Country. May 6, 1905. Alt. ou ? 6s ? ? Mr. Thomas, writing (P. Z. S., 1897, p. 936) on some rats similar to these from Nyasa, spoke of them as “belonging to the groups characterized respectively by “their numerous mamme (multimammate) and by having “the mammary formula 3—2=10. It is impossible to “work them out more definitely at present.” No one has yet so far as I know, tackled this problem. The present specimens seem to belong to a form having 8 pair of mamme. “*Mtika” of all the local tribes. This species swarms all over the country. I have trapped as many as 80 specimens in a single night.” Thamnomys dolichurus. Mus dolichurus, Smuts, “Enum. Mamm. Cap.,” p. 38, 1832. Mus arborarius, Peters, “ Reis. Moss.,” p. 152, 1852. 24 WROUGHTON, Collection of Mammals from Rhodesia. Ro 36¢5, Petauke, Nov.3; 1904) VAdlt 2300: RAO oy ) Petauke> Dec) 12,1904) iEredoe: R.62¢. Petauke. Feb. 12, 1905. Alt. 2400 (no skull). Ro7o?. Petauke,” Miarchy21, 1005.) Aleezytou: RG-O4 Oy Retake: sap riles elOOknT ali 200 R. 93. Mbala Country. May 2, 1905. Alt. 2600. R. 117. E. bank of Loangwa. Portuguese East vias, une 2A 1WOOS, ANE, Aooroy R. 1194. E. bank of Loangwa. Portuguese East ENING, lM 27, IGOG, Ault BAGO. R. 120¢. E. bank of Loangwa. Portuguese East Africa. July 4, 1905. Alt. 2200. R.123¢. E. bank of Loangwa. Portuguese East Mica, Jby O, 1OoOs. Ale 226. RetAS Oe Petaukes) Deci20) 1Oole we Alto: These specimens have longer tails (both absolutely and proportionately to the body) than Peters’ arborarzus. Specimens from Ruwenzori recently received by the British Museum have tails as long, but the body also is slightly longer. Smuts’ dolichurus from the Cape is said to have a black mark before and under the eye, and a golden tinge on the belly (1 cannot detect either of these characters in Smuts’ plate), and Peters relies on these characters to distinguish dolechurus from his arborarius. Sundevall’s pedulcus is said to have a much shorter tail. None of these types is available for examination by me. Mr. Thomas has used dolzchurus for Nyasa specimens, so, at any rate for the present, these specimens must rank as dolichurus. “This species is known to the Asenga as ‘ Sakasse.’” Manchester Memozrs, Vel. i. (1907), No. 5. 25 Mus, sp. Re OM weeetaulc “There are a few of this animal still left in the mid- Loangwa Valley. They are now totally protected. A specimen, a fine old bull, shot by Mr. H. S. Thornicroft for the British South Africa Company, did not at first sight appear to differ materially from specimens of those from south of the Zambesi.” [Bubalis lichtensteini (Lichtenstein’s Haartebeeste)]. a Ncondomuor the lake tribes: = Nikonze a of the Asenga, ‘ Kondikondi’ of the Alala. “Common and widely distributed throughout the country, but prefers the more open districts of the high plateau, where it may often be seen in herds of from 20 to 30 individuals.” Twog 6. 34 WROUGHTON, Collection of Mammals from Rhodesia. [Connochaetes taurinus (The blue Wildebeeste) |. “«Nyumbu’ of all the local tribes. “This animal occurs very sparingly in the Loangwa Valley, especially to the north. I found it exceedingly shy and only obtained one specimen, a female.” EO [Cephalophus sylvicultor (The yellow-backed Duiker)}. “«Chikwinti’ of the Alamba. “ Appears to occur sparingly near the Upper Kafue. From a very circumstantial native story one specimen appears to have been recently trapped on the banks of the Loangwa River. It seems to be a very shy animal, inhabiting for the most part dense jungle.” w@- [Cephalophus natalensis (The red Duiker)]. “*Guapi’ of the Chikunda, ‘ Insia’ of the Asenga. “This little buck is common all over the country. It seems to prefer somewhat wooded districts.” Be, Oe Cephalophus nyase. Cephalophus nyase, Thos., Ann. Mag. Nat. Fist. (7), vol. 9, D5 Os LOOL: The specimen does not altogether agree with typical nyas@ especially in skull characters but neither does it agree with the description of yase@ defriesz, Rothsch. This subspecies is based on specimens from the country between Mwaru and Tanganyika and also from the Kafue River, while typical zyas@ is from Mlanje, British Central Africa, so that geographical considerations are here no good in choosing a name. With only one specimen and without having seen the type of defrzest I prefer to call this specimen zyase. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. li. (1907), No. 5. 35 “ Inhabits dense jungle and is only obtained by snaring. It is called ‘Campalanga’ by the Alamba, and is said to feed largely on fruit.” Oreotragus aceratos. Oreotragus aceratos, Noack, Zool. Anz., p. 11, 1899. 29. Asingled from the hills near Petauke. “Chinkoma’ of all the local tribes. “Klipspringers are somewhat scarce throughout the country mainly, apparently, owing to the rarity of suitable localities.” [Ourebia, sp. (The Oribi)]. “Called ‘Chosimbe’ and ‘ M phwintio’ (in imitation of its cry) by the Asenga. “ Occasionally seen in pairs in the more open parts of the country.” Raphicerus sharpei. Raphicerus sharper, Thos., P.Z.S., 1896, p. 796. Bom Neat Retaukes "Dec, 1905, The type was from Angoniland ; the present specimen is younger and has lighter horns and a greater proportion of white hairs on the back, but is undoubtedly sharpez. “This species is fairly common throughout the country. It is not unlike a hare in its habits often lying close in the grass until nearly trodden on. “Tt is called ‘ Kasenye’ by the Lake tribes, ‘Kafundu’ by the Asenga, ‘ Timba’ on the Alala Plateau.” [Kobus vardoni (The Puku)]. «*Seula’ of most neighbouring tribes. “The Puku is common near the larger rivers, especially near the Kafue. It is usually in herds of 20 to 30 indi- viduals, containing, however, as a rule, only one adult male.” Dek ee 36 WROU GHTON , Collection of Mammals from Rhodesza. [Kobus ellipsiprymnus (The common Waterbuck)]. “«Niakozwe’ of the Chikunda, ‘Chuzu’ of the Asenga, ‘Mkulu’ of the Alala. “ A common antelope occurring in very large numbers on the banks of the Loangwa River. It does not, how- ever, develop as large horns as South African examples. The largest I obtained measured 28? inches on the curve. I only heard of one specimen over 30 inches being shot. Kobus defassa (the Sing Sing) is reported from further north, as also is Kodus leche (the Lechwe), locally known ais © Ibayzio ~ 266. [Aepyceros melampus (The Palla or Impala)]. “*Mpala’ of all local tribes. “This antelope is very abundant throughout the Loangwa Valley, much scarcer on the plateau toward the Kafue. It affects a particular type of country, viz., the ‘Mopani’ flats, near the larger rivers, and is seldom seen elsewhere. It would seem to have a _ singular aversion to long grass or dense bush, and can scarcely be driven into it. Specimens from the Loangwa and Zambesi valleys are consistently much smaller both in bulk and in horns than those from British East Africa. A pair of horns measuring over 20 inches is exceedingly rare from this country.” 2G vs. [Egocerus equinus (The Roan)]. “*Chiroko’ of the Asenga, ‘ Mpewa’ of the Alala. “This is perhaps the commonest and most widely distributed of all the larger antelopes in the country. Specimens with long horns are however rare, especially on the Alala Plateau. This is not a little remarkable, as Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 5. By) from that country come the finest Sable horns in Africa. The explanation is probably to be looked for in the food supply, the Sable being much more of a leaf and shrub eater than the Roan. The idea that these two species do not occur together is quite erroneous, as they may be found together over a large area. I have even seen them feeding within a few hundred yards of each other.” TG: [Egocerus niger (The Sable)]. “«Mpalapala’ of the Lake tribes, ‘ Ntuwakanwa’ and ‘Mpenembe’ of the Asenga. “The Black Bulls are called ‘Niambuzi’ or ‘Ngom- bengombe’ by the Asenga, and ‘Nkumbi’ by. the Alala. “There is some confusion in the native minds netwecn the Sable and Roan, owing to the redness of the females of the former. , “Occurs in fair numbers on the higher plateau, especially towards the Kafue, where very large specimens aren met, with) | lf once met with a> herd of -over 50 individuals. The horns of the largest specimen brought to England measured nearly 48 inches on the curve. The Sable on this plateau belong to the form in which the cows do not darken with age, but remain a bright reddish colour.” BEG 5 Ue [Tragelaphus spekei (The Situtunga) |. “«Sowe’ of the Awisa. “Ts said to occur fairly numerously in the more northern portion of the territory.” Tess 38 WROUGHTON, Collection of Mammals from Rhodesia. [Tragelaphus, sp. (The Bushbuck)]. &‘Mbawala® of the Chikunda and Lake Stmabes: ‘Mkwiwa’ of the Asenga. “Common in the more wooded parts of the country. It is somewhat wary and old males are hard to find.” t Oy [Strepsiceros strepsiceros. (The Kudu)]. ““Ngoma’ of the Lake tribes, ‘Mpulupulu’ of the Asenga. “This magnificent antelope is fairly common and very widely distributed over the country, but is exceedingly wary.” iG eae Ge [Taurotragus oreas (The Eland)|. “«Nchefu’ and ‘ Nsefu’ of Asenga and Lake tribes, ‘Nsongo’ of the Alala. “The Eland is fairly numerous, preferring the more open country. The specimens I met with all belonged to the striped tan-coloured form.” [Bubalus caffer (The African Buffalo)]. ““Njati, nzati, of the Lake tribes, “Mboo fonsthe Asenga, ‘ Kakuli’ of the Alala. “ Buffaloes are now exceedingly scarce having suffered much from the Rinderpest of some IO years ago. There are still a few scattered herds of small size in the country. I succeeded in obtaining a solitary old bull the only one J met with.” Id. Manchester Memozrs, Vol lt. (1907), No. 5. 39 [Manis, sp. ]. “A species of Manis appears to be known to natives from the mid Zambesi Valley, and it is not unusual to see its scales worn by them as charms. Further north, except from Nyasaland, I could hear of no record of its occur- Hence,” [Orycteropus afer (The Aard-vark)]. “ " al 1 \\ reas a eo NE ee s AR 8 P35 Ruin aa. CHS 4 ane SS eeu 1. GO Ones wee a tS mek “<8 oe ee i: eet SHA SO AL Se ric SR a TH ie D wees s & Y Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. %. VII. On the Structure of Syringodendron, the Bark of » Sigeillaria. By KATHARINE H. COWARD, B.Sc. Platt Exhibitioner of the University of Manchester. (Communicated by Professor F. E. Weiss, D.Sc., F-L.S.) Read December rrth, 1906. Received for publication, January 29th, 1907. In the spring of this year, some preparations of a plant from the Lower Coal Measures of Shore were sent to the Manchester Museum by Mr. Lomax, of Bolton. These were so different from any specimens yet received that it was very difficult to determine to what plant they belonged. They were evidently tangential sections through the bark of some large plant, but the block from which they were cut contained no remains of the vascular LissHemOle tiem plantz salhe) ereaten part Om) Ene tissue consisted of elongate periderm cells between which were embedded at fairly regular intervals large oval patches of thin-walled cells sharply differentiated off from the surrounding tissues, and about half an inch long by a quarter broad. (See Azg. 1 of the Plate.) Professor A. C. Seward has suggested that this bark may have been that of a Szgzl/arza in the condition known as Syringodendron, which is characterised by the possession of similar large oval marks generally arranged in rows. A comparison of the sections with several specimens of Syringodendron in the Manchester Museum confirms Professor Seward’s identification. The patches March 11th, 1907. 2 COWARD, Structure of Syringodendron. in the sections are in long double rows, the horizontal distance between these being about an inch and a half. The vertical distance between two consecutive pairs in the same double row is half an inch, and between the two members of one pair, rather more. This arrangement exactly corresponds with that found in one part of a large Fic. 1. Parichnos scars on impression specimen. (Nat. size to compare with Fig. 1 of Plate), compressed specimen in the Museum. (See Fg. 1 in the text and compare with Fzg. 1 of the Plate.) On the same specimen single rows are also found, and these are some- what bilobed or indented at the top, and as transition stages from the double row to the single are also seen, it Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. %. 3 is evident that the double row is formed by the branching of each strand in the single row. These scars are generally interpreted as having been caused by the parichnos strands which are usually seen as two small marks on the leaf scar, but are of somewhat larger dimensions below the leaf cushion, as can be seen in partially decorticated specimens. (See Fzg. 2 in the text.) In the specimen from which the sections were taken, and also in some other specimens of Syringo- dendron, the very large scars would appear to have been due to subsequent growth of the parichnos strands as they become nearly an inch in length. In the sections the periderm cells are much elongated and sclerised, and are closely packed together. Towards Fic. 2. Stgvlaria Bradi with bark slipped slightly to the right and displaying Syringodendron markings. (After Weiss.) the patches of thin-walled tissue they become shorter, and end in a layer of thick-walled cells, which forms a very definite margin to the oval patches of tissue. (See Figs. euaniceon on themtlate) dhe rcellisiim theses patchesare fairly uniform and well preserved, thin-walled, and in most cases devoid of cell contents; but there are many groups of cells with contents which may be the preserved 4 COWARD, Structure of Syringodendron. remains of protoplasmic activity, such as mucilage, in which case these sections certainly lend support to the view that the parichnos strands remain, and enlarge as secretory organs. In the impression specimens, however, the scars have numerous little lumps or “roughnesses,” which are probably these groups of cells preserved, and it seems much more likely that these cells have once been sclerised, but the thickening of the walls has been so acted upon by acids that it has swelled up, and is no longer recognisable as such. In view of the persistence and enlargement of the parichnos strands there is reason to suppose that they were respiratory in function, and the sclerised patches may have served the purpose of support. The strands may then be directly compared with the lenticels of Dicotyledons with which they would be analogous though not, of course, homologous. In the sections and in the impression specimens which shew a similar stage of decortication, no trace of the vascular strand which accompanies the parichnos to the leaf can be distinguished. The vascular tissue, having become useless when the leaf has fallen off, has not continued its growth, and while the remains of the bundle become less conspicuous, the enlarged parichnos strands become more so. In different specimens of impression, material, every gradation of size of parichnos strand, can be traced from one sixteenth of an inch in diameter on small stems, to an inch in the largest ones. Comparing these various stages with the sections under consideration, there seems to be no doubt that they agree, and the structure material really must be that of Syringodendron ; and although we have thus obtained sections of the structure material of the enlarged parichnos strands, their function is not entirely settled by it, though the evidence at present seems greatly in favour of the Manchester Memoirs, Vol. li. (1907), No. %. 5 view that they act as respiratory organs by keeping open a free passage between the outside air and the inner tissues of the plant. Parichnos strands in a fairly good state of preservation, and very similar to the above have been described and figured by Seward and Hill in their paper “On the Structure and Affinities of a Lepidodendroid Stem from the Calciferous Sandstone of Dalmeny, Scot., possibly identical with Lepidophloios Harcourtii (Witham,)” published in the TZvansactions of the Royal Society Edinburgh, vol. 39, part 4. 6 COWARD, S¢ructure of Syringodendron. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATE. Fic. 1. Tangential longitudinal section of Syringodendron, consisting of long periderm cells with two double rows of parichnos strands cut transversely. Natural size. Fic. 2. Tangential longitudinal section of the same, shew- ing one parichnos strand with surrounding periderm cells, and the groups of cells with contents just indicated. (x 6.) Fic. 3. Tangential section of the same, shewing the end of one parichnos strand and periderm cells. For further descrip- IO, SSS wae wer (se 05.) Manchester Memoirs, Vol. li. (1907), No. 8. VIII. The Parichnos in the Lepidodendracez. Isy7 185, 10, WisiSs, IDS, Professor of Botany tn the University of Manchester. Read December rith, 1906. Recetved for publication Lebruary r3¢h, 1907- The term parichnos (from aca =beside and tyvoc=a footprint) was used by Bertrand (91) to describe two lateral prints on the leaf scar of the Lepidodendracez which stand on either side of the vascular bundle. These marks can be clearly seen on any well preserved leaf scar both in Lepzdodendron and in Szgzllarza (see Text- fesealinanG|2)): fig. 1.—Leaf hases of Lepzdoden- Fig. 2.—Leaf bases of Szged- avon showing leaf scars with marks of /arta showing similar marks on the vascular bundle (v.d.) and of parichnos leaf scar. strands (far). The ligular pit is also seen (“ig./). At first these lateral marks were supposed to be the scars of lateral bundles given off in the leaf base by the April 23rd, 1997. 2 WEISS, The Parichnos in the Lepidodendvacea. central vascular bundle; but this view was shown to be erroneous by Renault (75), who found that in Szgzd/arza, at all events, the tissue coming to the surface at these points was parenchymatous and not vascular. As these lateral marks in Szgz//arza agreed so closely with those of Lepzdodendron, it was clear that they were homologous structures, and consequently shere, too, as Solms-Laubach (91) pointed out, they could no longer be considered as vascular. Subsequent investigations by Bertrand (’91) and Hovelacque (’92) have shown that both in Lepidodendron Harcourtit and in Lepidodendron sela- ginoides these parichnos-scars communicate with strands of parenchymatous cells in the leaf cushion as is the case with the similar lateral scars in Szgzlarza. If one traces these parichnos strands through the leaf base into the stem, one finds that they unite in the leaf base into a single somewhat kidney-shaped strand which, running on the underside of the vascular bundle, penetrates together with it the periderm and the hard outer cortex, and joins the soft and often lacunar middle cortex of the stem. This can be seen from the series of excellent drawings made by Hovelacque of the leaf trace of Lepzdodendron selaginoides at different positions in the cortex, whence we can discern that the parichnos makes its appearance as a parenchymatous strand, accompanying the leaf trace on its entrance into the outer cortex (‘écorce moyenne’ of Hovelacque). (See Hovelacque ('92) Zert-jigs. 35 to 37.) Similar figures of the course and bifurcation of the parichnos strand have been figured by Williamson in the case of Lepzdophloios fuliginosus. (See Williamson (93), #7gs. 31 to 37). None of these figures, however, show the actual union of the parichnos strand with the middle cortex, though this continuity was recognised by the above Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), Wo. 8. 3 authors. It can, however, be seen in Tert-fig. 3 of the present communication, drawn from a longitudinal section of Lepidodendron selaginotdes which shows the passage of the parichnos canal, its tissue being defective, into the space occupied formerly by the mid-cortex of the stem. = eseesmdeaun ss’, Q Les tl Fig. 3.—Longitudinal section through the stem of Lepzdoden- dron selaginotdes showing the parichnos strand (gar) in continuity with the remains of the mid-cortex (z.c.). 5.z.c. =space left by defective middle cortex. v.6.=vascular bundle running from central cylinder to outer cortex (0.c.) and accompanied below by the parichnos strand. A figure showing the parichnos strand of Lepzdophloios fuliginosus, consisting of large rounded parenchymatous cells, joining the well-preserved middle cortex of the axis was figured by me (:03) in the Zvansactions of the Linnean Society (pl. 26, fig. 15). Interest in the nature and function of the parichnos has been renewed by the recently completed account by 4 WEISS, Zhe Parichnos in the Lepidodendracee. T. G. Hill (:06) of the occurrence of similar structures in the leaves of recent Lycopodiales, more especially in the sporophylls, and these structures he considers to be phylogenetically identical with the parichnos of the Lepidodendracee. Potonié (’99) had already drawn attention to the resemblance between the mucilage passages of Lycopodium and the parichnos of Lepzdo- dendron,* though he considered the function ‘of the two sets of organs to be different. Hill has extended the comparison to /soétes hystrix where a double strand of tissue comparable with the parichnos exists. In Lycopodium the mucilage duct is single. This does not however lessen the possibility of their being homologous structures, as Maslen (99) has found Lepzdostrobus, the cone of Lepidodendron, to have an unbranched parichnos strand. As Hill mentions, the state of preservation of the parichnos strand varies considerably. In some cases we have very well preserved parenchymatous cells as seen in the figures of Lepzdodendron selaginoides in M. Hovelacque’s Memory, and still more so in the longitudinal section mentioned above, and figured in the Zvaus. of the Linnean Society (Weiss, :03). In other cases, such as those figured by Mr. Maslen, the parichnos strand is represented by empty canals showing no cellular tissue at all. As this latter is also the condition in the mature tissues of those living Lycopodiacez in which secretory strands have been observed, while the young organs have a very definite tissue in this position, Mr. Hill concludes that in fossil] forms, too, the empty canal is the mature structure, while the well preserved condition represents the immature stage. This might possibly apply to the parichnos strands occurring in the sporophylls, but as * Potonié (99), p. 239. sia : jessie sees sata tater ities night: hk Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 8. 5 regards the vegetative organs, the explanation must, | think, be a differént one. For the Halonial stem described by me (:03) must have been a fully developed axis, as is indicated both by its size and also by the secondary thickening which it had undergone. The stem, too, of which Fzg. 1 of the Plate of this Memozr is taken was certainly a mature stem, and yet the parichnos tissue is entirely well preserved and obviously not secretory.. The better preservation seems to me to be entirely due to the firmer nature of the mid-cortex, of which the parichnos is an extension. On the other hand, quite young stems of Lepidodendron selaginotdes may have a defective ' parichnos tissue, but then they have a defective middle cortex as well. Of course if we assume the parichnos canal to have been primarily a secretory canal, the more defective might represent the more mature tissue. But though admitting that the corresponding tissue in recent plants is secretory, forming as it does a mucilage canal, yet we may well suppose that in the more elaborate Lepidodendracee the function may have been a different one, though a secretory function is by no means excluded. Hovelacque (92), indeed, considered the parichnos strand primarily glandular, and Renault, too, compared the tissue to gum canals. If secretory one would expect the tissue to end abruptly both in the leaf and in the stem as it does in the recent plants in which it has been described by Hill. But in the fossil plants the parichnos strand goes off insensibly on the one hand into the mesophyll of the leaf, and in the other direction into the mid-cortex of the stem from which it is in no way separated off or differentiated in structure, as can be seen in the best preserved sections. Potonié (97 and ’99) has attributed to the parichnos strands a transpiratory function, and compares them with 6 WEIsS, The Parichnos in the Lepidodendracee. the curious strands of parenchymatous cells running through the awn of the barley, and which, according to. Mikosch (92), are concerned in increasing the evaporation of water. Such a function might be quite in consonance with the actual structure of the parichnos tissue, but it would not explain the continuation of this tissue into that of the lacunar middle cortex of the stem. One would expect a tissue concerned in transpiratory processes to be definitely connected with the vascular tissue of the leaf base, as the mesophyll of the leaf is through the inter- mediary of the transfusion cells. But of such connection there is no sign in any of the Lepidodendracez, the parichnos running on the outer or phloem side of the leaf trace. Moreover, there seems no reason in the case of the vegetative leaves to make special provision for facilitating the transpiration, when one remembers the xerophytic nature of the leaves of Lepidodendron and particularly of Szgz//arza. In both cases the stomata are sunk in narrow grooves, such as one finds in recent plants requiring to reduce the evaporation of moisture from their leaves. Special transpiratory strands would be in direct opposition to the whole structure of the leaf. Dr. Scott (:00) considers the function of the parichnos. strands somewhat problematical (p. 145), but believes that while it is highly probable that they were in part secretory, “the persistence and enlargement of the parichnos on the surface of old stems suggests a respiratory function like that of lenticels” (p. 202). With this latter view I agree entirely. The parichnos strand, connecting as it does the delicate and lacunar tissue of the mid-cortex with the intercellular spaces of the leaf, and consequently through the inter- mediary of the stomata, which are found in the longitudinal grooves of the Lepidodendroid leaf, with the surrounding Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 8. 7 atmosphere, enables the inner living tissues of the stem, such as the cambium, for instance, to be supplied with the necessary oxygen. The transpiration of the plant is probably sufficiently maintained by the transfusion tracheids which connect the vascular bundle with the mesophyll of the leaf. A respiratory passage through the dense outer cortex, and the impervious periderm would seem to be an essential requirement of the Lepido- dendroid stem. And as the vascular tissue of the leaf trace cannot supply this want, a passage of parenchymatous cells parallel to the leaf trace undertakes this function, An examination of these parenchymatous cells in their best preservation, shows that the tissue is well provided with intercellular spaces. In some cases, indeed, the tissue seems to have been more or less lacunar, and hence often defective in preservation. If we were to look for a tissue with analogous function among recent Lycopodiales, we should probably find it in the trabecular tissue surround- ing the stele of Selag7nella. This view seems to me to be in complete consonance with the actual structure of the parichnos strands seen in their best preservation. It need not exclude the possi- bility of the parichnos acting in a secretory capacity in some instances as indeed Scott (:00) has suggested. As stated above the parichnos strands are visible when the leaf has fallen away, as two lateral marks on the leaf scar, which is situated at the end or in the middle of the leaf cushion in the different genera of the Lepidodendracee. The very distinct appearance of this strand on the leaf scar is suggestive of its having still some part to play in the life of the plant, and if its function was a respiratory one, then the parichnos scars may be aptly compared in function to the lenticels of the higher plants as indeed has been done by Scott, Potonié, and others. This would 8 WEISS, The Parichnos in the Lepidodendracee. sufficiently account for the retention of these parichnos scars in all their distinctness after the fall of the leaves. That the parichnos scars continued their function for some considerable time may be gathered from the fact that in some old stems of Szgz//aria, even after the leaf scars have disappeared, the parichnos strands can be observed. The fossils formerly described as Syrzngodendron are now known to be the decorticated stems of various species of Szgz//arza on which, though the leaf cushion can no longer be seen, the underlying bark shows sometimes the scar of the vascular bundle, but more generally only two very large parichnos scars. These are indeed often of such dimensions, being sometimes nearly an inch in length, that one cannot help concluding that this organ was endowed in some Sigillariz with powers of growth after the fall of the leaf, and thus came very near the lenticels in structure as well as function.* Some markings very like those of Syrzngodendron were observed by Stur (77) in Lepzdophlovos crassicaulis, and also by Potonié (99) in a Lepidophiozos in the col- lection of the Prussian Geological Museum in Berlin. According to Potonié’s figure (223), two longitudinal patches of tissue come into appearance in those parts where the reflected leaf bases are in part broken away. These scars are, as Potonié shows, patches of the parichnos strands laid bare, and he considers that on the under surface of the reflected leaf base the parichnos strands come very close to the surface, and suggests that the epidermis disappears at this point, and that the parichnos strands are thus exposed. (See Zeztig. 4.) I have examined very carefully several sets of well preserved * For further information, see the paper of Miss Kk. Coward “On the Structure of Syrzngodendron,” Memozrs of the Manchester Lit.and Phil. Soc., vol. 51, No. 7, 1907. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 8. 9 radial and tangential sections of Lepzdophloios, without being able, however, to confirm Potonié’s view that the parichnos strands were exposed directly. In specimens Fig. 4.—Leaf bases of Lepzdophloios (after Potonié) showing parichnos strands (av) on leaf scarsand also (to the left) on leaf base where overlying tissue has broken away. fig. =ligular pit. which are particularly well preserved, and which show the parichnos tissue in its entirety similar to the section figured by Scott (:00), fg. 57. There is no indication of any break in the epidermis, but the parichnos strands run for some way very close to the surface and communicate with a very delicate subepidermal tissue containing well developed intercellular spaces. This tissue must have been defective in the specimens examined by Potonié, for in his drawing of the leaf base it is represented by a large lacuna. The tissue was undoubtedly a spongy parenchyma or,an aérenchyma, with either transpiratory or respiratory function, or possibly both. But as far as I can make out in Lepzdophloios it was always covered over by an epidermis, and whenever this is seen at all in surface view, or even occasionally in sectional view, it seems to be provided with numerous stomata, offering a very efficient communication with the exterior. These stomata, opening as they did on the under surface of the reflexed leaf base would be well protected against rapid transpiration, and at the same time provide the necessary air channels through the hard periderm to the interior of the stem. It would seem therefore that when 10) 6°WE ISS, The Parichnos in the Lepidodendracea. the parichnos strand is laid bare as in Potonieé’s figure, it is by subsequent breaking of a portion of the leaf base. In some species of Lepzdodendron, however (e.g., L. aculeatum, L. sternbergz, etc.), there appear below the leaf-scar two very definite oblong marks, one on either side of the median line, which, as Scott mentions, seem to have some connection with the parichnos, and to which Potonié compares the scars of Lepzdophlotos mentioned above. These marks on the leaf-cushion (see 7¢xt-fig. 5), which were called “vascular glands” by Stur (77), Fig. 5.—Leaf cushion of Lepzdodendron show- ing the lateral pits (/.2.) beneath the leaf-scar, on which the ends of the parichnos strands are seen (par). ég.=ligular pit. have been compared by Solms Laubach (97) to the orifices on the leaf-stalks of tree ferns, and Potonié (97) approves of this comparison, though at the same time maintaining that their function is a transpiratory one. I have been able to study from a series of sections in the Manchester Museum the nature of these lateral scars and their relation to the parichnos strands in a Lepzdo- dendron, the internal structure of which showed it to be of the “ Harcourtiz type,’ though differing from the typical Harcourtzz in some respects.” * It resembled very closely the Lefzdodendron figured by Williamson in Memoir X1X., and which Mr. D. M. Watson, who is reinvestigating this form considers to be a different species, and proposes to call Lepzdoden- adron Tickiz. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), Vo. 8. Il The leaf cushions, as can be seen both from transverse and tangential longitudinal sections, were diamond shaped, their long axis coinciding with that of the stem, so that they were of the Lepidodendron rather than the Lepi- dophloios type. In transverse sections the parichnos strands can be seen running almost horizontally in the leaf base, often showing very clearly the bifurcation (see fig. 1 of Plate), which takes place in the leaf base and not in the outer cortex as has sometimes been stated. In some instances the parichnos strand can be followed to quite near the edge of the cushion, and it will be seen to join two patches of specialised cells close below the leaf scar, on either side of the median ridge of the leaf cushion. That is the case in /zg. 1, where the left-hand branch of the parichnos is not yet in touch with the exterior, while the right-hand branch (the section being slightly oblique), which is cut a little higher up, joins a pit-like depression partially filled with a group of cells which will be described in more detail a little further on. That these cells lie a little below the leaf scar is indicated by the presence of a median ridge which disappears on the leaf scar itself. At the point where the parichnos strand stops, there is a gap probably due to the delicate nature of the cells which join the parichnos to the group of specialised cells, which in the sections have slipped somewhat out of their position. An examination of the cells on either side of this gap shows that the tissue in which the split has taken place consisted of exceedingly small stellate cells (st.c. in Pe Ola) wamuche simallenm thanpthe acellsmone ric parichnos strand, or of any of the neighbouring tissues. These stellate cells were, by their shape, separated from each other by wide intercellular spaces, and formed consequently an admirable “aérenchyma” similar to that 12 WEISS, Zhe Parichnos tn the Lepidodendracee. found in the ground tissue of many recent aquatic and marsh plants. This stellate tissue appears at first sight to go over towards the outside into a tissue consisting of large rounded cells (see Fzg. 2 of Plate); but a careful examination of this tissue leads me to think that the large white areas of this tissue are not cell cavities, but round intercellular spaces lying between small slightly irregular, or sometimes even rectangular cells. This it is difficult to make out from the tissue which is dark and dense, but a detailed study of it in various sections, particularly the transition to it from the stellate cells makes it the more probable explanation, and brings it into consonance with the structure of the underlying fig. 6.—The Stellate tissue (aérenchyma) in which the parichnos strands terminate in Lefzdo- dendron Hickze (slightly diagrammatic). tissue of stellate cells (c.p. Ter¢-fig. 6). I believe that all this tissue to which the parichnos strand joins up is acrenchymatous, and it is in close agreement with such tissue as one finds, for instance, in the roots of some of the mangrove plants, such as Avicennza, where we also get a transition from somewhat stellate cells to a tissue of smaller and more rectangular cells surrounding large intercellular spaces. What was the external boundary of this aérenchyma, I am unable to state. The preservation of the tissue is Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lz. (1907), Wo. 8. 13 not sufficiently good to allow this to be definitely deter- mined. A consideration of /7z¢. 2 of the Plate leads one to suppose that if replaced into its normal position adjoining the parichnos strand (par.), it would not come up to the surface of the leaf base, but terminate in a slight depres- sion, and from the appearance of longitudinal sections I conclude that it was covered in by an epidermal layer, provided with numerous stomata, as seems to be the case with the epidermal layer overlying the parichnos strands of Lepidophloios. In Lepzdophloios, where I have also found aérenchyma in connection with the parichnos strand, the reflexed and imbricating leaf-bases offer some protection against undue evaporation from the parichnos strands, while in Lepidodendron the aérenchyma com- municates with the exterior through stomata, set in a ‘depression, and thus also preventing undue transpiration, while giving every facility for the aeration of the plant. That such pit-ike depressions which can only be inferred from the transverse sections actually exist, becomes evident from an examination of a series of tangential sections taken through the leaf-cushions of a Lepidodendron (see fzg. 3 of Plate). Examining a series of these, one sees that they are lozenge-shaped and vertically elongate. Those cut close to the axis show the leaf-trace and a single parichnos strand. A little nearer the outside the parichnos strand divides into two, and almost at the same time one notices traces of the ligular pit showing that this organ must have been very deeply Semme ittle! Muntner trom) (ie sstemm ton cavities) limed with dark epidermal cells make their appearance (1p. in Oe, 2 (i) OlI2Wewe), Aw0Cl WiesS Om SScwioms Coe ey ice further from the base open out on either side of the median ridge (zg. 3 (ii.) of Plate), thus showing that they were the inner terminations of pit-like depressions, which 14. WEISS, The Parichnos in the Lepidodendracee. open out more and more widely as they approach the leaf-scar. There can be little doubt from their position, that these pit-like depressions correspond with the inferior scars noticed on the impressions of many Lepido- dendron leaf-bases. Now, what is the relation of these pits to the parichnos strands? In the sections in which these pits first make their appearance, they are separated from the parichnos strands by some six or eight layers of undifferentiated cells; but as soon as they communicate laterally with the exterior, one can see a patch of specialised cells on the wall of each pit (aer., Fug. 3 (iv.) of Plate) close to the underlying parichnos strand, and subsequently in contact with it. The glandular appearance which these patches have, is I believe due to defective preservation, though undoubtedly a different explanation might be put upon it. They are covered in by a more or less distinct epidermal layer, though in some cases it is defective. I have not been able to observe. any stellate cells such as occur in the transverse sections ; but this may be due to two causes. In the first place we have no certainty that this Lepzdodendron is the same species as that of which the transverse sections above are figured and described. Secondly, the transverse sections described above must have passed somewhat obliquely through the aérenchyma, and the stellate cells may on the tangential section of the leaf-base be much less conspicuous. What is, however, obvious on these tangential sections is that the parichnos is separated from the glandular-looking tissue by a layer of small cells which correspond in position with the stellate cells described above. Beyond these small cells the tissue, which, as stated, is very defective, consists of larger elements, or of cells with larger air spaces, but they have undergone so much degeneration that it is impos- Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lz. (1907), Vo. 8. 15 sible here to say definitely that it consisted of aérenchyma. But the general concurrence with the transverse sections leads me to suppose that this was the case, and I believe we may conclude that the inferior scars were really respiratory cavities, and were intended to reduce rather than to accelerate the transpiration from the leaf-bases. Reconstructing from the series of tangential sections, the appearance of the leaf-base as it would appear in a radial section, one would get the appearance seen in J7ert- jig.7. This section is not quite median so as to show the parichnos strand and the lateral pits. Projecting this section on to a plan, one sees that it gives one the picture of a typical leaf-base of a Lepzdodendron. fg. 7.—Reconstruction of the leaf cushion of a Lefzdodendron (probably Zep. Azckzz) from four tangential sections similar to those in 77g. 3 of Plate. v.6. = vascular bundle. /g.f. = ligular pit. far. = parichnos strands. /.f.=lateral pits running into the leaf cushion below the parichnos strands. ae. =aérenchymatous tissue clothing the top of the lateral (respiratory) pits. In the radial longitudinal section on the left hand side the membrane separating the two lateral pits is indicated by oblique shading. 16 WEISS, The Parichnos in the Lepidodendracee. It will be seen that the radial section of the leaf cushion has somewhat the aspect of that figured by Williamson (93) (see pl. IIL, fig. 19), of which he says that the margin of the leaf was “more deeply lobed than usual.” This lobing is really the beginning of the lateral pit, his section, though passing through the vascular bundle, being slightly oblique, and not following the crest of the leaf-base. A section a little more out of the median would show even a deeper lobing, as in the reconstructed one, Zert-fig. 7. In his excellent memoir of Lepzdodendron selagenozdes, Hovelacque, has figured a series of tangential sections, which show that in this species there also existed a pit- like depression running into the body of the leaf cushion. fig. 8.—Radial (a) and tangential (2) sections through the leaf cushion of Lepzdodendron selaginordes (diagrammatic after Hove- lacque) showing the inferior groove z.g. (sillon inférieur) which corresponds to the lateral pits of other Lepidodendra. fig.p.=ligular pit. v.é6.=vascular bundle. fav.=parichnos. This is plainly seen in the figures (jigs. 2 and 3 of pl. Iv.) of his memoir, and still more clearly in fig. 3 of pl. v. To this depression, which is shown in radial view on fg. 6, pl. vil, Hovelacque has given the name of “sillon inférieur,” as it comes close below the leaf scar. It differs, as is Manchester Memotrs, Vol. le. (1907), No. 8. 17 directly apparent (see Zext-jig. 8), from the similar pits described above, in the fact that we have there only a single cavity running right across the leaf cushion in the form ofagroove. This groove Hovelacque has represented diagrammatically in jig. 41, p. 82,and though so different in aspect from the lateral pits, it may possibly have served the same function. Hovelacque, it is true, does not mention any connection between it and the parichnos strands, but in his figures on pl. Iv. there seems some evidence that the parichnos strands come close to the surface in this sillon, and that there were some specialised cells lining the upper surface of this groove. If special provision is made by the parichnos strands for the respiration of the stem in the Lepidodendracee, we should also expect that scme provision would have been made for those parts of Lepzdodendron and Sigillarza, which were embedded in the water-logged soil of the marsh in which they are supposed to have been rooted. As far as the Stigmarian axis is concerned, it would no doubt receive the air necessary for its respiration through the lacunar tissue of the mid-cortex, which we must suppose to have been in continuity with that of the aerial stem, and thence through the parichnos tissue with the mesophyll of the leaf, or in addition, through these laterally pits smore directly) swith, the exterior But the Stigmarian appendages or rootlets would also require air for respiratory purposes, and their very defective mid-cortex suggests that it was through this tissue that the air must have reached the rootlet from the rhizom. The rootlet, as is well known, springs from a rootlet cushion of apparently parenchymatous cells on the outside of a dense mass of cortex, and partly of periderm, through which the vascular bundle passes out into the rootlet. Is this periderm layer penetrated like 18 WEISS, The Parichnos in the Lepidodendracee. that of the stem by any strand of thin-walled parenchy- matous cells, provided with intercellular spaces capable of conveying air to the rootlet? Is there anything corresponding to a parichnos strand of a leaf? As a matter of fact this is the case,and /zg. 4 of the Plate shows the group of small parenchymatous cells accompanying the rootlet bundle on its way outward through the outer cortex in a Stigmaria, described by Hick (92), under the name of Xenophyton. An examination of a series of sections shows that this parenchymatous group is in con- tinuity with the mid-cortex of the Stigmarian axis, and it must therefore be regarded as the equivalent of the parichnos strand of the leaf cushion. In my re-description of Xenophyton (:02), I. mentioned the continuity of this small-celled tissue below the rootlet bundle with the mid- cortex, but the correspondence of it with the parichnos of the leaf cushion did not then occur to me. It will be noticed that this “parichnos” of the rootlet running on the underside of the rootlet bundle, is really on the morphologically upper, z.e., apical side of the Stigmarian axis, and consequently on the xylem side of the bundle, not on the phloem side, as in the case of the parichnos, which runs in connection with the leaf trace. This strand of middle-cortex cells runs right through the outer cortex and periderm to the “cushion” from which the rootlet springs, and there passes into the close parenchyma of which the cushion is largely formed. No doubt this parenchyma had intercellular spaces ; and indeed in very well-preserved Stigmarie they are apparent, though very small,and through them communication was set up between the lacunar mid-cortex of the Stigmarian axis and that of the rootlet. Thus air could be brought to reach the rootlets or Stigmarian appendages, which we believe to have been embedded in a water-logged medium. This correspondence Manchester Memoirs, Vol. tz. (1907), No. 8. 19 in structure between the leaves and root will undoubtedly be used by those who believe in the morphological identity of these organs in support of their contention. Never- theless, we may, I think, equally well maintain, without adopting that view, that in both cases for similar purposes a communication has been established between the aérenchy ma of a lateral organ (leaf or rootlet) and that of the axis (stem or rhizom) to which it belonged. It will, I think, be obvious that the presence of an aérenchy- matous strand running to the rootlets, lends additional support to the view that the parichnos was concerned in maintaining the respiration rather than the transpiration of the plant; for the roots surely could have no trans- piratory function to perform. The parichnos in the Lepidodendracee had the function of taking in air through the leaf or through the leaf-base, and of conducting it inwards to the stem and downwards to the Stigmarian rhizom, and even into the lateral organs (rootlets) of the same. The whole structure of the parichnos and its mode of communicating with the exterior 1s in consonance with this view. 20 WEISS, The Parichnos zn the Lepidodendracee. BIBLIOGRAPHY. BERTRAND (QI). ‘‘ Remarques sur le Lesidodendron Harcourtit de Witham.” TZvavaux et mémotres des Facultés de Lille, VO! 2, Loon. Hick, Tu. (92). ‘On a new fossil plant from the Lower Coal Measures.” Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., (Botany), vol. 29, no. 198, 1892. Hitt, T. G. (:06). “On the presence of a parichnos in recent — plants.” . Oh SHS INSITE, “WO, AViaAs WOll i, JO. AGS § W. L. Sclater, ““ Fauna 8. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 232. 540, 550. 6 gd ad. Petauke. December 28, 1905. Lill, pale horn, reddish at base; zs, olive-brown ; feet, blackish ; top and back of “ead and round xostrils crimson red ; casque dusky-horn in colour ; ordzts, sides of head and throat pale blue mottled with darker blue; /appets pale blue, the distal half crimson red; mxeck blackish in dorsal line, rest pale blue with a large cobalt blue patch in midventral line. Common everywhere in Loangwa Valley and to the east of it. It is doubtful if this species occurs on the Alala Plateau, west of the Mchinga range. If they occur at all there, they will not improbably be found on the southern and eastern borders. Toward the Kafue, this species appears to be replaced by WV. marungensts. Usually in flocks of 10 to 15 individuals, which separate for pairing early in November. Occasionally seen in the 6 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. height of the dry season in very large flocks of from 100 to 200 individuals. “Kanga” of ali the neighbouring tribes. 8. Numida marungensis. Numida marungensts. . Schalow, Zeitschr. gesamm. Orn., vol. I, p. 105 (1884, Marungu); Reichen., ‘Vog. Afrikas,” VOL Mp 443 465. 6 ad. E. bank of Kafue, near Ndola. October 24, 1905. Lill, horn-colour, tips of mandzbles paler; base of lower mandible reddish; zrzs, brown; /eet, black; dare skin round nostrils and above eves blood-red; casque and back of head, orange-yellow ; around eyes, ears, side of cheeks and throat pale greenish-blue ; /appet, purplish- blue, tipped red. Two flocks only seen; both on the Kafue River. Appears to have the sate habits as WV. mztrata. This appears to be the true JV. marungensis of Schalow, being distinguished from the Benguela birds, NV. maxima of Neumann, by its orange-yellow casque. 9. Guttera edouardi. Numida edouardt, Hartl., Journ. f. Ornith., 1867, p. 36 (Natal). Numida cristata, Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 399. Guttera edouaraz, Grant, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 22, p. 382; W. L. Selater, “‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 233 (1906). Guttera cristata edouardt, Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 451- 305, 300. 6 9 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 6, 1905. Lill, horn-colour, greyish at base; zrvzs, deep red; feet, dark grey in male, blue-grey in female; dare skin of Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 10. 4 head and neck blackish, except the fold on the nape, which is a dirty white. © Native name, “ Kangatori.”. Not uncommon, but local in Loangwa Valley. Frequents denser bush, and seems more independent of water than JV. mztrata. ORDER PTEROCLIDIFORMES. Family PTEROCLIDID&. to. Pterocles bicinctus. Pterocles bicinctus, Temm., “ Pig. et Gall.,” vol. 3, pp. 247, HOR § Bocage, ‘“‘Orn. Angola,” p. 395; Grant, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 22, p. 30; Reichen., “ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p- 309; W. IL. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” ‘vol. 4 p- 189. ney 6 ad. Near Petauke: April 8, 10905; 144. 6 ad. Near Petauke. April 12, 1905. Bill, yellowish-brown colour ; z7zs, pale brown ; Jeet, yellowish-brown ; other dave parts, yellow. 290. d ad. Bank of Loangwa. July 1, 1905. nes ill, orange yellow ; zrzs, brown ; /eez, pale dull yellow ; other bare parts, yellow. | “ Chikwalakwala” of the Asenga. Not uncommon in “Mopani” flats and sandy areas near the big rivers. Nearly always in pairs. A South African species, now found for the first time to the north of the Zambesi. ORDER COLUMBIFORMES. Family TRERONIDZ. 11. Vinago wakefieldi. Nivenonm WaAReclat, Sianpe,y) £.2.5.. 1573) 0: PJs Di. GO, Be. 2 (Mombas). 8 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. Vinago wakefieldi, Salvad., “‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 21, p. 23; Shelley, Jé2s, 1898, p. 381 (Mpala); Reichen, “ Vig. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 398. 22: 9 ad. Mseizi river, Feira district. July 21, 1904. 113. 9 ad. -Petauke. March 20, 1005. Bill, whitish, with a red base; z7zs, blue or biuish-red (22) ; feet, orange red. ; Common everywhere. “Kombo Kombo” and “Miuliti” of the AsSenga’ This is an East Afriean species, which has been found on the Zambesi and Shire rivers. 12, Vinago delalandei. Phalacrotreron delalandii, Bonap., ‘‘Consp: Av.,” (1854: Port Natal.) Vinago delalandei, Salvad., ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 21, p. 24; Shelley, /ézs, 1898, p. 381 (Zomba Plains), /d., /dzs, 1901, p- 166 (Liwonde) ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 397. Vinago delalandu, W. L. Sclater, ‘‘Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” ‘ vol. 4, p. 157. 184. ¢ ad. Mbala Country. May 16, 1905. 185. ¢ ad. Mbala Country. May 18, 1905. 270. @ ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 25, 1905. VOl=325) spaloe Bill, whitish, red at the base ; z7zs, blue ; /ee/, in males, coral red, in females, orange red. ‘Not distinguished by the natives from V. wakefield. Family PERISTERID. 13. Turtur semitorquatus. Columba semitorguata, Riipp., ‘ Neue Wirbelth., Vog.,” p. 66, pk 23 hee.) (£835 2) Albyssinias) Turtur semitorquatus, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 383; Salvad., , “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 21, p. 416; Shelley, 2dz5, 1898, p- 555 (Zomba); Reichen., ‘“‘Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 409 ; W. i. Sclater; ‘\auna Ss. Africas bindsvaavolasns p- 167. Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 10. 9 AB. € 2G. Wien Iie, Jeorciufaiisss: JeRise WaUiniery September 23rd, 1904. 389. dg ad. Mlembo River. September 9, 1905. 440. @ ad. Ndola, Alala Plateau. October 12, 1905. Bill, blackish ; zvzs, brown ; /eez, dull purplish. A common species. “ Njiwa” of the Asenga. 14. Turtur damarensis. Turtur damarensis, Finsch & Hartl., ““Vog. Ostafr.,” p. 550 (1870: Damara Land and Great Namaqua Land) ; Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 385; Salvad., “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 21, p. 426 (Zomba). Turtur capicola damarensis, Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p41 We Sclater, “Bauna’s. Africa, Birds,7 vol. 45 [Gh Ute 476. dad. Near Kapopo, Alala Plateau. October 29, 1905. Ene, @ acl INieare etawike, IDecsmmlose QA, MOOS, Bill, dusky ; zvzs, brown ; feet, purplish-crimson. A common species in the country. Native name, “ Njiwa.” 15. Turtur senegalensis. Columba senegalensis, Linn., ‘‘ Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 283 (1766). Turtur senegalensis, Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 388; Salvad., Cates brite Muss vole 20, p. 44.9. Rerchenm ioe Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 406; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, ISVS.” OL AL, JD 18572 363. 2 ad. Msanzara River, North of Petauke. August 5, 1905. Lill, blackish ; zvzs, dark brown ; feet, purplish-lilac. The only specimen met with. “Kapere” of the Asenga. 10 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesza. 16. Oena capensis. Columba capensis, Linn., ‘‘ Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 286 (1766). Oena capensis, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 392; Salvad., ‘‘ Cat. B. : Brit.) Mus.,” vol. 21, sp. sons, Reicheniy ate Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 429; W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 174. 175. @ ad. Mbala Country, E. TI.oangwa district. May 9, 1905. Lill, brownish-black ; z7zs, brown ; fee¢, purple red. Fairly common; often in flocks. “ Niakutundulu” of the Asenga. 17. Tympanistria tympanistria. Columba tympanistria, Temm. and Knip., “ Les Pigeons,” vol. 1, p> SOepl 336, {TOL E.) Feristera tympanistria, Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 393. Tympanistria tympanistria, Salvad., “ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 21, p. 504; Shelley, 7écs, 1898, p. 381 (Mount Mlosa and Mount Zomba) ; Reichen., “‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 424. Tympanistria bicolor, W. lL. Sclater, ‘Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 178. 243. 6 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 17, 1905. 388. ¢ ad. Mlembo River. September 9, 1905. Bill, dark purplish ; zvzs, dark brown; /ee¢, dark lilac. A very scarce species compared with C. chalcospilos. Occasionally occurs amongst castor-oil plants in native gardens. 18. Chalcopelia chalcospilos. Columba chalcospilos, Wag)., ‘‘ Syst. Av., Columba,” sp. 83 (1827), Chalcopelia afra (nec Linn.) ; Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 389 ; Salvad., “ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 21, p, 506; Shelley, Lois, 1898, p. 555 (Lake Shirwa); Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 426; W. L. Sclater, “‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 180. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 10. II Chalcopelia chatcospilos, Erlanger, Orn. M.£., 1901, p. 183; Sharpe, Bw/l: Brit. Orn. Club, vol. 12, p. 83 (1902); Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 3, Nachtrag, p. 811. 23. ad. Zambesi Valley, Feira district. July 25, 1904. 235. ad. Ulungu Mountain, W. Loangwa. June 1@, ICONS. Lill, blackish ; zvzs, dark brown ; /ee¢, purplish. Common all over the country. Native name, “ Nia- kutundulu.” ORDER RALLIFORMES. Family RALLID&. 19. Crex egregia. Crex egregia, Peters, Monatsh. k. Preuss. Akad. Berlin, 1854, p. 134 (Mozambique) ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 278; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds, vol. 4, p. 248. Ortygometra egregia, Bocage, “‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 479. Crecopsis egregia, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 23, p. 81. neour42) 5 6 ad. Wichunio; near Retauke, “Aipriler i 1905. Bill, grey, black above in middle line, with amethyst base ; ovbzt, orange red ; z7zs, bright red ; feez, olive brown. “Sapata” of the Asenga. I did not meet with this elsewhere. 20. Limnocorax niger. Rallus niger, Gm., “ Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 717 (1788: Cape of Good Hope and other parts of Africa). Limnocorax niger, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 481; Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 23, p. 150; Shelley, /ézs, 1898, p- 381 (Lake Shirwa), /d@., Zécs, 1901, p. 167 (Karungwesi and Mbara); Reichen., ‘“‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 279; W. I. Sclater, “Fauna S: Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 260. 12 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia Io, 11. 9 juv. Bank of Zambesi, Feira district. June 22, 1904. 172, 173. 6 9 ad. Mbala Country. May 8, 1905. Bill, sulphur yellow; zvzs, red. 298. dimm. E. bank of Loangwa. July 4, 1905. 477. 2 ad. Near Kapopo, N.W. Rhodesia. Sept. 29, 1905. Not uncommon in long grass near rivers. Native name, “ Nkukuruzi.” Has a barking note like a leopard. ORDER CHARADRIIFORMES. Family CHARADRIID. 21. Xiphidopterus albiceps. Vanellus albiceps, Gould, P.Z.S., 1834, p. 45 (Fernando Po). Xiphidopterus albiceps, Sharpe, “‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 24, D 1475, Reichen!,.* Voo. Airikas) vole mpage: 210. 6 ad. Bank of Loangwa. June 5, 1905. 258. 9 ad. Bank of Loangwa. June 22, 1905. 269. 6 ad. Bank of Loangwa. June 25, 1905. Lill, black and yellow ; z7zs, pale greyish-green ; /ee?, pale yellowish-green ; /apfets, yellow, but internal proximal half, black. Native name, “ Kankolinkoli.”. Common on _ sand- banks on the Loangwa. Has a harsh wailing cry. This is by far the most southern record for this species. 22. Oxyechus tricollaris. Charadrius tricollaris, Vieill., ‘“N. Dict. d’Hist. Nat.,” vol. 27, p- 147 (1818, Africa); Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, job 17s Higtalitis tricollaris, Bocage, “ Orn. Angola,” p. 433; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 367. ° Manchester Memozrs, Vol. le. (1907), No. 10. 13 Oxyechus tricollaris, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 24, p. 247. 288. g ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 30, 1905. 307. g ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 7, 1905. 541. 6 ad. Near Petauke. December 24, 1905. Bill, black, pink base ; orbzz, scarlet ; z7zs, brown ; feet, flesh-colour, with dusky ‘oes. “Goma” of the Asenga. Common on sand-banks on the Loanewa. 23. A®gialitis tenellus. Charadrius tenellus, Hartl., ‘Faun. Madag.,” p. 72 (1861). i gialitis marginatus, Bocage (nec. Vieill.), “Orn. Angola,” Pp. 433- igialitis pallida (Strickl.), Sharpe, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 24, p. 284. Charadrius marginatus tene/lus, Reichen., “ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 1, Os 1a tigialitis marginata pallida, W. 1. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 373- 207. 6 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 4, 1905. a7t. 2 ad: Be bank of Loangwa, August 15, 1905. 3d Bill, black ; zvzs, brown ; feez, whitish. ° Bilt, blackish ; zvzs, dark brown ; /ee¢, greyish-pink ;. blackish oes. “Ndiondio” of the Asenga. Common on sand- banks on the Loangwa. The female was sitting on 3 eggs laid on the shingle. The eggs of this species were found by Lieutenant Boyd Alexander near Chichowa, on the Zambesi. The two found by me measure as follows:—Axis, 1:2; diameter, ‘9. The markings on these eggs are of a sepia-brown colour, and I do not see any of the reddish- brown described by Alexander. 14 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from NE. Rhodesia. 24. Himantopus himantopus. Charadrius himantopus, Linn., ‘Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 255 (1766). Himantopus autumnalis (Hasselq.): Bocage, “ Orn. Angola,” p. 470°. Himantopus himantopus, Sharpe, ‘‘ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,’ p. 310; Shelley, /ézs, 1898, p. 557 (Karonga); /d., /d1s, 1901, p. 167 (Mbara and Lake Mweru); Reichen., “ Vég. B) vol. 24, Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 207. Himantopus eandidus, Bonn.: W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 380. 272. dad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 25, 1905. 274. 9 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 26, 1905. Bill, black ; zvzs, crimson red ; /ee¢, rose pink. A pair, the only ones seen, were nesting on a sand-bank. Obtained by snaring. No nest was made, the eggs being merely laid in a hollow amongst the stones. Four eggs were found. The male bird was remarkable for much greater length of leg than the female. 25. Glottis nebularius. Scolopax nebularius, Gunner. in Leem, “‘ Lapp. Beschr.,” p. 251, (1767). Totanus canescens (Gm.): Bocage, ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 464. ; Glottis nebularius, Sharpe, “ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 24, p. 481. Totanus nebularts, Shelley, Zbis, 1898, p. 557 (Karonga). Totanus littoreus (Linn.): Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 27 Zotanus glottis (Lath.): W. L. Sclater, ‘‘Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 392. 520. dad. E. bank of Loangwa. Nov. 26, 1905. Bil, black; ventral surface of mandible, yellowish ; zris, yellow ; feet, orange yellow. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 19. 15 26. Rostratula capensis. Scolopax capensis, Linn., ‘“‘Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 246 (1766). Rhynchaea capensis, Bocage, ‘‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 476. Rostratula capensis, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 24, p. 683; W. L. Sclater, ‘* Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 418. Rostratula bengalensis (Linn.): Reichen., ‘“‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. r, p. 237- 505. ? ad. Near Chiwali’s, Alala Plateau. Novem- ber 14, 1905. Bill, olive-brownish, dark brown at tip; z7zs, olive- brown ; feet, greyish-green. The only specimen seen, though reported common from the Lukanga swamp and the shore of Lake Banegweolu. Family PARRIDA. 27. Actophilus africanus. Parra africana, Gm., “Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 709 (1788) ; Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 477- Phyllopezus africanus, Sharpe, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 24, p. 76; Shelley, Zézs, 1898, p. 556 (Lake Namaramba) ; /d., bis, 1901, p. 167 (Karungwesi). clophilus africanus, Reichen., “ Vg. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 267; W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 338. 530. 6 ad. FE. bank of Loangwa. December 21, 1905. Billand frontal shield, bluish-grey, tipped with greyish- horn ; zvzs, dark brown; /eez, slate. Only met with on one particular pool near the Loangwa river. A common bird on the upper Shire river. 16 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. Family CURSORIID. 28. Rhinoptilus seebohmi. Rhinoptilus seebohmt, Sharpe, Bull. Brit. Orn. Club, vol. 3, p. 13 (1893 : Ondonga, Ovampo-land) ; /d., “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 24, p. 47, pl. 3, fig. 1; Reichen., “ V6g. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. ron; W. I. Sclater, “Mauna S. Atnicay birds; A, Pp. 328. Cursorius cinctus, Bocage (ec Heugl.), “Orn. Angola,” p. 421. 138. 9 ad. lWLichunio, near Petauke. April ages: 373. 6 ad. ‘Lichunito, near Petauke, Aussies 274. 9 ad. Wichunio, near Petauke. “Auoersmneor Bill, black at the tip, yellow at the base; orbit, yellow ; zvzs, brown ; /eez, dull whitish. Common in one or two sandy localities in the Loangwa valley. Native name, “Gula.” Has_a remarkably harsh cry at night. This is a new locality for this species. 29. Rhinoptilus chalcopterus. Cursorius chalcopterus, Temm., ‘‘ P]. Col.,” vol. 5, pl. 298 (1824: Senegambia) ; Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 420. Rhinoptilus chalcopterus, Sharpe, “‘ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 24, p. 48, pl. 4, fig. 1; Shelley, /dzs, 1898, p. 557 (Songwe) ; Reichen., |“ Vos. Airikas,” voli 1, 9p: 1575) Wedeawsclates “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 329. 5. @ ad. N. bank of Zambesi, Feira district. June 17, 1904. Bill, black, red base ; z7zs, dark brown ; /ee?, red. Not met with by me further north than the Zambesi. Family CEDICNEMID&. 30. Gedicnemus vermiculatus. Qdicnemus vermiculatus, Cab., Journ. f. Ornith., 1868, p. 413 5 Bocage, ~ Orm-Angola,; 1p. 0423 > sharpe,we. Catwbemrats Mus.,” vol. 24, p. 11; Shelley, /d2s, 1898, p. 557 (Lik- wenu); /d., /éis, 1901, p. 167 (Lake Mweru) ; Reichen., ‘“Vog. Atrikas,” vol.1; p.200;3°W. 1. Sclater, **Waunaro: Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 318. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 10. 17 268. 9 ad. Bankof Loangwa. June 24, 1905. 273. g ad. -Bank of Loangwa. June 25, 1905. 284. ? Bank of Loangwa. June 20, 1905. Lill, black, yellow at base; zrzs, brownish-yellow, inwardly golden; feet, very pale greenish-yellow. The stomach of No. 284 contained two mice. “Chintunia,” of the Asenga. Considered a delicacy by the natives on account of its fat. Common on the Loangwa River. Family OTIDID&. 31. Otis melanogaster. Otis melanogaster, Bocage (nec Rtipp.), ‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 417 ; Sinamos, “Crate, 13, Iori, WOO.” oll, 2%, jo. BelG (\oBvdE) 3 Shelley, Zézs, 1898, p. 381 (Mount Mlosa and Zomba plains) ; Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 256; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S$. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 302. 480. ¢ ad. Near Kapopo, N.W. Rhodesia. October 30, 1905. Lill, yellowish-white, blackish above; zrzs, hazel brown ; /eez, pale yellowish. One of the only pair of Bustards seen, though reported by natives of the Loangwa valley to occur there occasionally. Native name, “Chisupasupa” of the Asenga, “Kasewa” of the Awisa, “ Chindokowa” of the Alala. ORDER ARDEIFORMES. Family CICONIUDZ. 32. Pseudotantalus ibis. Tantalus 1bis, Linn., ‘Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 241 (1766) ; Bocage, “@rm Angola,” p: 454; shelley, 7075, 1398; p> 556 (Nyasaland) ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 333. Pseudotantalus ibis, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 26, "ip. 327; W.L.Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 49. 18 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesta. 538. 9 ad. Bank of Loangwa. December 21, 1905. 539. ? Bank of Loangwa. December 21, 1905. Bill, orange yellow; dare skin on head, crimson, on throat and back of head, orange; zrzs, dark brown; /egs, pinkish ; ¢arsz, flesh colour ; foes, dusky. Occasionally seen in flocks on the Loangwa River. 33. Ciconia nigra. Ardea nigra, Linn., “‘ Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 235 (1766). Ciconia nigra, Sharpe, ‘“‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 26, p. 303 ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 346; W. L. Sclater, Hana Ss. Aunicas sbirds, voles ps.30: 201. ¢ juv. Niamadzi River, Loangwa Valley. June I, 1905. Bol “dull ned > Gare ski om jace also. reGa-aaayas brown ; feez, reddish-yellow. Native name, “ Matowankorno.” One of a very large flock. This is a new locality for the species. 34. Leptoptilus crumeniferus. Leptoptilus crumeniferus, Less., “‘ Traité d’Orn.,” p. 585 (1831: Senegal) ; Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 453 ; Sharpe, ‘ Cat. 13}, Joye, AWK Ol AO, joe eu) § INenelnsi, 9 Woe. Avinlkas.”” vol. 1,p.333> W. LL. Sclater, Mauna ys: Atriea,eBindsi vol. 4, p. 46. 548. 29. Near the Irumi Mountains, Alala Plateau, in captivity. Bill and feet, dirty yellowish-white ; z7zs, brown. Native names, “Mkanga,” “ Namkulanchandwe.” Occasionally seen in large flocks on the Loangwa. This individual was one of a pair obtained by natives from the nest, which was built in a patch of dense timber at the top of a tall tree. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 10. 19 Family SCOPID. 35. Scopus umbretta. Scopus umbretta, Gm., ‘Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 618 (1788) ; Bocage, “S Ola, Avaeole”’ jo. Ags Slogne, Cert, 1B, lieth, MVbus.” TO, AG, jo 2885 Neca, Woy. Awake,” Wolk i, jo B53 § W. LL. Sclater, “Fauna S: Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p: 51. I. 6 ad. Near Feira. May 29, 1904. 296. @ ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 3, 1905. Bill, black ; zrzs, brown; /eéez, black. Common on all the rivers and streams. “ Katawa” of all the local tribes. Natives have a great dislike to this bird, which they consider ill-omened. Family ARDEIDAE. 36. Nycticorax leuconotus. Ardea leuconotus, Wagl., ‘‘Syst. Av., Ardea,” p. 189 (1827). Nycticorax leuconotus, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 450; Sharpe, Cale. 1B. Wit, MIS.” YOL BO, jo whys INetnea, H Wag Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 363; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 85. 295. ¢ juv. Bank of Loangwa. July 3, 1905. Bill, black, with horn-coloured tips and yellow xostrz/s and base; zrzs, golden-yellow; /ee/, greenish-yellow ; bare skin on face and orbzt, yellow. “ Totwe,’ of the Asenga. This is an interesting new locality, for (the species, the Mearest existing records appearing to be Benguela in Angola, and Rustenberg in the Transvaal. 37- Butorides atricapilla. Ardea atricapilla, Afzel., Acta Acad. Stockh., vol. 25, p. 264 (1804 ; Sierra Leone). 20 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. Butorides atricapillus, Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 446 ; Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 26, p. 172; Shelley, zs; 1898, p- 556 (Mtondwe) ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 2705 W. i. sclater, “Fauna Ss. Almea, birdsaanvelem p. 37°- 2. oad, bank of Zambesin y)une momToo7 4. 2 juv.. Bank of Zambesi. June 16, 1904. 287. 2 ad. Bank of Loangwa. June 30, 1905. 519. 6 ad. Bank of Loangwa. November 26, 1905. Bill, dusky yellow at base; zvzs, yellow; /egs and /eez, olive-brown and yellow. (519) /rzs, blackish-brown ; /eez and /egs, very pale greenish. d “ Funkankosi” of most local tribes. Common on the big rivers. 38. Erythrocnus rufiventris. Ardea rufiventris, Sundev., Oefv. k. Vetensk.-Akad. Forh. Stockh., 1859, p. 110 (Caffraria) ; Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 441. Erythrocnus rufiventris, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 26, ps 200%; Neichen:. Voge Airikds:” voll 1, p-.3 770mm alee Sclater, “‘Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 77. 537. 6 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. December 21, 1905. Base of 02// and orbzt greenish-yellow, tip blackish ; zves, yellow ; feet, yellowish. This appears to be the first record of this species from north of the Zambesi, according to the localities given by Dr. Reichenow. 39. Ardeola ralloides. Ardea ralloides, Scop., ‘‘ Ann.,” vol. 1, p. 88 (1769). Ardeoia comata (Pall.), Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 445. Ardea ralloides (Sharpe), “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 26, p. 202 ; Reichen., “Voge. Atrikas;” vol-'1,p. 3740; We ee Sclater “Fauna Ss. inca, birds, / vole 4eyp: 7/5 Herodias ralloides, Shelley, 27s, 1898, p. 556 (Lake Shirwa). Manchester Memorrs, Vol. lt. 1907), No. 1®. 2 7. 6 ad. Bank of Zambesi. June 21, 1904. Bill, black and. grey, greenish-yellow at base; 277s, yellow ; /eez, yellowish-green. In flocks on the big rivers. 4o. Ardeirallus sturmi. Ardea sturmt, Wagl., “Syst. Av., Ardea,” p. 191 (1827). Botaurus sturmi, Bocage, “‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 447. Ardetrallus sturmi, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 26, p. 244. Ardetta sturmt, Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 368; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 89. Fo @ ach Ierulke, IDecamliogic 1, 1604, Bul, black, with the base olive ; zvzs, red ; feet, olive. ORDER ANSERIFORMES. Family ANATID&. 41. Alopochen zgyptiacus. Anser egyptiacus, Briss., “Orn.,” vol. 6, p. 284, pl. 27 (1760). Chenalopex egyptiacus, Bocage, ‘‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 497 ; Salvad., Cait, 15, lem, Milos.” sol, 2%, , 1673 Rechen, “Woe Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 131. Alopochen eevptiacus, Sharpe, “ Handl. B.,” vol. 1, p. 215; Wo Jk, Sclaiter, “leamuing S, Avista, ial Wolk, wy jo. nas; 540. 9 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. Dec. 22, 1905. Native name, “ Kamba.” Common on the Loangwa River and similar localities. 42. Sarcidiornis melanonota. Aqiser, Mmelanonorus, —Penn. in HOst. a. lads= Zool, px. 24 (1781: Madagascar). Sarcidiornis melanonota, Salvad., ‘‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 27, Pp. 54; Shelley, 42s, 1898, p. 556 (Nyasaland); W. L. Sclater, ‘Fauna S$. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 119. Sarkidiornis melanotus, Reichen., “‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 129. Sarcidiornis africana, Eyton: Bocage, ‘‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 496. 22 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesza. 179. @ ad. Mbala Country. May 12, 1905. Bill, black ; feet, black. “Chisipi” of the Asenga. Shot on a tree some 10 feet above a pond. 43. Dendrocygna fulva. Dendrocygna fulva (Gm.): Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 500; Salvad.< Cat B21 Brit Mus.;7 voli 27.ps 140s omelleye Lbis, 1898, p. 381 (Fort Johnston, Upper Shire) ; Reichen., ““Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 126; W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 1, p. 126. A462. «gad. Bank of “Katue near Ndolasi@cemecan 1905. Bill, dusky ; zris, brown ; feet, dusky grey. “ Mwilima” of the Alamba. 44. Nettium punctatum. Anas punctata, Burchell, ‘‘ Trav. Int. S. Africa,” vol. 1, p. 283, note (1822: Zak River, Cape Colony); Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 120. Querquedula hottentota, Smith ; Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 503. Nettion punctatum, Salvad., “‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 27, p. 265 ; W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 139. Nettium punctatum, Sharpe, ‘‘ Handl. B.,” vol. 1, p. 219 (1899). 367. g ad. E. bank of Loangwa. August 12, 1905. 308. 9 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. August 12, 1905. A450. 6 ad. Kafulafuta River, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct 17, 1905. Bill, bluish-grey, blackish above, in middle line ; z7zs, brown ; feet, dusky grey. “Mwidiri” of the Asenga, “ Dipita”’ of the Achawa and Nyasa-land tribes. Manchester Memoitrs, Vol. tz. (1907), No. 19. Ze ORDER PELECANIFORMES. Family PHALACROCORACID. 45. Phalacrocorax africanus. Felicanus africanus, Gm., “Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 577 (1788). Graculus africanus, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 522. Phalacrocorax africanus, Shelley, bis, 1898, p. 556 (Lake Namaramba) ; Grant, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 26, p. NOW RECN, HW Ainleg” VOl m5 jo. ORs We Jb Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 4, p. 9. 26. @ ad. Bank of Loangwa, near Feira. August 9, 1904. Bull, black ; zrzs, red ; feet, black. ORDER ACCIPIPRIPORMES: Family FALCONID. 46. Astur polyzonoides. Accipiter polyzonoides, Smith, “Ill. Zool. S. Africa, Aves,” pl. 145 (1838: north of 26, S. Lat.). Scelospizias polyzonoides, Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 1g. Astur polyzonoides, Shelley, Zb:s, 1898, p. 381 (Mpimbi, Upper Shiré and Zomba Plains); Reichen., ‘‘Vog. Afrikas,” VO, pe5505 Ve lun sclater,< Kaunas os. aimicay Birds: VOI. 3, pz 350. 67 G ju Wetaulke. Jlain. 20, 1OO5. 357. 2 ad. Mterize River, Loangwa Valley. July 25, 1905. Pon, @ acl Iremmike. IDecenmloee 5, 1005. Bill, black, yellow at base; cere, yellow; z7zs, yeilow (67), orange (357), or vermilion (521); /fee¢, orange yellow. Occurs commonly. 24 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. 47. Accipiter ovampensis. Accipiter ovampensis, Gurney, lois, 1875, p. 367, pl. 6 (Ovampo Land); Sharpe,. “ Hiand!. B.;” vol 1, p.253)5 *keiehems “Voég. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 560; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 352. ch 7. 6 ade weetauke, December 2o, 1905 Lill, black at tip, base and cere orange; zrzs, reddish- brown ; feet, orange. 48. Accipiter minullus. Falco minullus, Daud., “ Traité,” vol. 2, p. 88 (1800). Accpiter minullus, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 1, p. 1405 Bocage, “‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 20; Reichen., “ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 5615; W. I. Sclater, “ Kaunas. Atmea, Binds vol. 3, p. 348. 111. g ad. Petauke. March 17, 1905. Bill, black; cere, yellow ; zvzs, yellow; feet, greenish- yellow. 49. Asturinula monogrammica. falco monogrammicus, Temm., “ Pl. Col.,” vol. 1, pl. 314 (1824: Senegal). Asturinila monogrammica, Sharpe, ‘‘ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 1, p: 2755 Bocage, - Ore Angola, (ps 335 (shelleyars 1898, p. 381 (Zomba and Lakangula River), /d., /bzs, 1901, p- 594 (Chanda) ; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” Wl, By 105 B27 Kaupifalco monogrammicus, Reichen., ‘‘Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, Pp. 547- 25. gad. Bank of Loangwa, Feira district. August 5, 1904. 353. 2 ad. Mterize River, Loangwa Valley. July 25, 1905. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. tz. (1907), No. 10. 25 Bill, black at tip; base of bzll and cere, red, or cinna- mon brown (353); zves, red (25); ordzz, narrow yellow ; Jeet, red. | Native name, “ Kaluangwe”; but this isa generic name for most of the smaller birds of prey. 50. Helotarsus ecaudatus. Falco ecaudatus, Daud., ‘‘ Traité,” vol. 2, p. 54 (1800: Coast of Natal). Ffelotarsus ecaudatus, Sharpe, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 1, p. 300; Bocage, ““Orn. Angola,” p. 41; Reichen., ‘“ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 598 ; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Bind siavOle 15) Poe 4. ; 227. 4? juv. E. bank of Loangwa. June 8, 1905. Litl, yellowish, tip black ; z7zs, brown; /ee¢, yellowish, tinged with red. Common everywhere, but difficult to shoot. “ Chipungu” of the Asenga and neighbouring tribes. 51. Milvus egyptius. Falco egyptius, Gm., ‘Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 261 (1788: Egypt). Milvus egyptius, Sharpe, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 1, p. 320; Bocage, ‘‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 43; Shelley, Zézs, 1898, p. 556 (Zomba) ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 609 ; W. L. Sclater, ‘Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 336. ACen Mezi Niversonucuese Mast inca oepe 18, 1Gg04. 205. Ga Inoncl tO Nicola, Avlelle, JAehweeio INA Rhodesia. Sept. 13, 1905. AGO de oad » to INdola) Alala \ Plateaus ~ NW: ihodesiay “Sepin 245 1905, Bill, yellow ; zrzs, brown ; feeé, yellow. Common everywhere, especially during the winter months. “ Mwewe” of the Asenga. 20a Ni EAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. 51. Falco biarmicus. Falco biarmicus, Temm., “ Pl. Col.,” vol. 1, pl. 324 (1825 : Cape Colony); Sharpe, “Cat: B. Brit: Mus? vol) aipaeum, Bocage, ‘“‘Orn. Angola,” p. 46; Shelley, /dzs, 1898, p. 381 (Mpimbi, Upper Shire) ; Reichen., ‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 624; W. L. Sclater, ““Fauna S. Africa, Birds velo p-. 269, fig. 99. 507. g ad. Near Chiwali’s, Alala Plateau. Nov. 15, 1905. Lill and cere, bluish-grey, with darker tips; zvs, brown ; /eez, yellow. Shot flying overhead, exactly like a Parrot. Stomach contained Orthoptera. 53- Falco subbuteo. Falco subbuteo, Winnk, “Syst, Nat..; vol. 1) p) <27an@joayre Sharpe. Cat-1B Brits Musi7 voli) 1). p..c05 boca. “Orn. Angola,” p. 48; Reichen., ‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 628; W. L. Sclater, -“ Fauna S.Afrea, Birds)” vols 3; p. 272. 559, 560. ¢ Gad. On the top of a mountain near Petauke. January 3, 1906. Bill, bluish-dusky ; cere and orézt, yellow; zrvzs, dark brown ; /eez, yellow, claws, black. Not previously met with. 54. Dissodectes dickinsoni. Falco dickinsoni, Scl., F.Z.S., 1864, p. 248 (Chibisa, River Shire). Cerchneis dickersont, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 1, p. 447 Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 54. Dissodectes dickinsont, Sharpe, “ Handl. B.,” vol. 1, p. 278. Cerchneis dickinsont, Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 1, p. 637. Tinnunculus dickinsont, W. 1. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 285. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 10. Ae 30, 2 ad. Bank of Loangwa, near Feira. Aug. 11, 1904. Bill, black; cere, yellow ; zrzs, dark reddish-brown ; Jeet, yellow. All Hawks ef this size are known to the natives as “ Kaluangu.” ORDER STRIGIFORMES. Family STRIGID/. 55. otrix flammea. Siiimjlammea.., linn. Syst.) Nat.4 «vole. 1, |p: 133, (ZOO) SInzijoe, “(Cae 18, (yas IMIS.” Sol, 25 jo, BOS IBoxeaS. “Orn. Angola,” p. 63; Shelley, Zézs, 1898, p. 381 (Zomba Plains), p. 556 (Songwe) ; W. L, Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, IBIS,” WO By Do BO%7o Strix flammea maculata, Brehm: Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” VO i, Os OVO 186. 9 ad. Mbala Country, E. Loangwa district. May Om OO 5: 313. @ ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 8, 1905. Lill, whitish ; zvzs, brown; /fee¢, greyish. Native name “ Manchichi.” A bird of ill omen to the natives, as it is generally found in the “ Msitu,’ or patches of dense forest such as most tribes select for their cemeteries. ORDERT ES Mii NGL ORM S: Family PSITTACID. 56. Poeocephalus angolensis. Pionias fuscicollis (nec Kuhl.), Bocage, ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 70. Poicephalus robustus suahelicus, var. angolensis, Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. ANTMBIS” VOL 2, job “fe 28 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesza. 202. 9 ad. Niamadzi River, Loangwa Valley. June 1 WOOK: ; Lill, whitish ; zvzs, brown ; fees, grey. Scarce and exceedingly wary. “Chandwe” of the Asenga. This bird seems to belong to the race which has been called P. angolenszs. 57- Peocephalus reichenowi. Psittacus meyert, Cretzschmaer in Ritipp., “ Atlas,” p. 18, pl. 11 (1826: Kordofan). Fiontas mevert, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 68. Paocephalus meyeri, Salvad., “‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 2c, p. 373; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna (Ss. ‘Atrica, (Birds:/avolee p. 228. Powephalus meyer reicthenowt, Neum. ; Reichen., ‘‘Vég. Afrikas,” WO 25 Os WA, 16/6 juv. )Mseizi River, Feira districtage)|miyesmes 1904. 177. 6? Mbala Country, E. Loangwa district. May IieelOOE: Lill, black (16), or greyish-black (177); zvzs, red (16), orange red (177) ; feez, black. Common in pairs or small parties, but wary and difficult to procure. “Chinkwe” of Nyasa tribes, “Chimfye” of the Asenga, “Chimpse” of the Chikunda. 58. Agapornis liliane. Agapornis liliane, Shelley, bis, 1894, p. 466, pl. 12 (Fort Liwandi, Upper Shiré) ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 22; W. lL. Sclater, ““FaunaS) Atfrical) Binds\ svolames pace 217. 6 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 6, 1905. Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 19. 29 218—220. 9 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 6, 1905. BGAnca acer as, bank of Loangwa. June 19, 1905. Sill, crimson, base whitish; z7zs, light brown; /eez, grey ; orbz/, whitish. Seen sparingly in flocks on the Loangwa. Cherense = of theAsenga: All these obtained in native gardens where the millet was being harvested. | The occurrence of this Nyasa-land species in the Loangwa Valley is decidedly interesting. ORDER CORACIIFORMES. Family CORACIIDA. 59. Coracias caudatus. Coracias caudata, Linn., ““Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 160 (1766: Angola) ; Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 84: Coracias caudatus, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, (OB 8 Shelley, /dzs, 1898, p. 555 (Mwanza, Lake Shirwa, and Songwe), /d., Jbis, 1901, p. 592 (Lindipe); Reichen., pe Vioce Minikas: voll 2. pezer a Wella sclaten. « baumay Ss Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 48. 27,28. ¢ Qad. W. bank of Loangwa, Feira district. August II, 1904. 302. g ad. E. bank of Loangwa. fuly 5, 1905. Lill, black ; zrzs, dull brown ; feez, yellowish-brown. Common in Loangwa Valley, but not seen west of the Mchinga Escarpment. “Choli” of all the local tribes. 60. Coracias spatulatus. Coracias spatulatus, Uimnen, JZS-, SSO, jh Bn (sco, AamMpes)) pe onarpes sedi ba bit Wiss « volust 75 py 22%: INeichen:, ““ Voe. Airikas,’ vol) 2, 7p. 221; W. I. Sclater, “Pauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 50: 30 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia, 114. 6 ad. Petauke. March 23, 1905. 115. 9 ad. Petauke. March 23, 1905. 141. ¢ juv. Lichunio, near Petauke. April 11, 1905. Bill, black ; zvzs, brown ; feet, dull yellow. (141, /eez, greenish-yellow.) Sparingly in Loangwa Valley, not met with elsewhere. Stomach of one specimen contained Orthoptera. 61. Coracias olivaceiceps. Coracias oltvacetceps, Sharpe, “ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, p. 25. Coracias naevia, Bocage (ec Daud.), “Orn. Angola,” p. 83. Coracias mosambicus, Dresser ; Reichen., “‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p- 227; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol, 3, p- 51. ; 13. @ ad. Mseize River, Feira district. July 11, 1904. Bill, black ; zvzs, reddish-brown ; /éeé, yellow. This seems to extend the range of this species a little further north than was previously known. 62. Eurystomus afer. Coracias ajra, Lath. “Ind. Orn:,” vol: 1, p. 172 (1790 seatnicae described from specimen in British Museum). Lurystomus afer, Bocage, “ Orn. Angola,” p. 85 ; Sharpe, ‘ Cat. Be Brit. Muss vol: 17, p- 30),. shelley.) 70755 se cyomigigs (Nyasaland), /d., dézs, tgo1, p. 592 (Angoniland: Chila- sulo: Mpimbi) ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 228 ; W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 54. 417. 6 ad. Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Sept. 30, 1905. 453,454. 6 @ ad. Bank of Kafue, N.W. Rhodesia. OG BO, OO; Bill, yellow ; zrzs, brown ; feez, olive brown. Only met with on or near the Kafue River, but also known to natives from the Angoni Plateau. “Mkocho” of the Alamba, “ Ifefe” of the Angoni. Manchester Memoztrs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 10. Bi Family ALCEDINID&. . 63. Ceryle rudis. Alcedo rudis, Linn., “Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 181 (1766). Ceryle rudis, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 97; Sharpe, “‘ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. Yy {O, Ue? Neel, We, Ainley” Velez» 2O GV. sclatemm. Halinatse unica ined sy: vol. 3, p. 73, figs. 26—28. 159. ¢ ad. Matambadzi River, Mbala Country. May ZOOS: 370. 9 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. Aug. 15, 1905. Bull, black ; zrvzs, dark brown ; /eez, black. ““Tembo” of the Asenga. Common on the big rivers. 64. Corythornis cyanostigma. Alcedo cyanostigma, Rupp., ‘‘ Neue Wirb., Vog.,” p. 70, pl. 24, fig. 2 (1835: Zana Lake, Abyssinia). Corythornis cyanostigma, Bocage, *‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 96; Sharpe, 6 Cait. Is Jeinitis Mts.” WO, I, j> WORs8 INerGiea, “Woe Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 289; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Ils’? YON 4h, 0) lig Wis, Bos 162. 9 ad. Matambadzi River. May 4, 1905. Lill, scarlet, blackish over nostrils ; zvzs, dark brown ; feet, dark red. NOB LOASLOSa MOUMET Of OZ: The nest was dug out of the bank of the river. Not very common, though widely distributed. “ Mlongwe” of the Asenga. 65. Halcyon swainsoni. Flalcyon pallidiventris, Cab., Journ. f. Ornith., 1880, p. 349 (Angola); Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 538 (Talla Mo- SOngo) se shanpe, 1Cat bus bhity WiuSs™ vole T7sup. 235 : Shelley, 275, 1898, p. 555 (Tanganyika Plateau). 22 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. flalcyon swainsoni, Smith; Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 278: W. L. Selater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” wok gs p- 85. 427. 9 ad. Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. October 10, 1905. 472. 9 ad. Near Kapopo, N.W. Rhodesia. October ZT eOOsr Bill, orange scarlet ; zvzs, brown ; feez, scarlet. Only met with on the high plateau. “Mlalapamo” of the Asenga. 66. Halcyon orientalis. Flalcyon orientalis, Peters, Journ. f. Ornith., 1868, p. 134 (Inhambane));) Sharpe, “Cat. 8. Brit.) Mins aol Dp: 2385 °W. a) Sclater, ““KaumayS, Anica: bindsa angeles p. 89. Halcyon albiventris orientalis, Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, ob ANS: Oi, Qac, Wetawlke, lsebyruieiay WO), 1OOS. rig, @ acl leSrewke. Mesa 221, 100s, 283. gad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 20, 1905. Beil Ce ie 725) DLONIMs VECO uGatkemet: This species and its allies are all known to the natives of the Loangwa Valley as “ Sweswe.” 67. Halcyon chelicutensis. Alcedo chelicuti, Stanley in Salt’s ‘‘ Exped. Abyss.,” App., p. lvi. (1834, Abyssinia). flalcyon chelicutensis, Bocage, ‘‘ Orn. Angola.,” p. tor ; Sharpe, Cat: By Brit. Muss vol: 17 ps 230, ShuelleyaZizcnamaue: p. 380 (Mount Mlosa and Lakangula River). Halcyon chelicutt, W. \. Sclater, ‘““Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” VOle.3; ps oo); Weichen:, “ WVioe. Aimikas vOles2s saan. R216) ads etaukey December ti eon Ho Quad, betauke: December mm, neo7 Manchester Memoirs, Vol. tz. (1907), No. 10. 33 ¢ Maxilla, black; mandzble, red; trts, brown; feet, reddish. : . 9 Maxilla, black ; manadzble, faintly red ; zrzs, brown ; Jeet, reddish. 145. 6 ad.- Lichunio, near Petauke. April 12, 1905. 276. 6 ad. _E. bank of Loangwa. June 26, 1905. Maxilla, black; mandible, red; tris, brown; feet, dark red. Native name “ Sweswe.” Family BUCEROTID. 68. Bucorax caffer. Bucorax caffer, Bocage, P.Z.S., 1873, p. 698, figs. 2, 5, and 6 (Mossamedes) ; /d., “Orn. Angola,” p. 111 ; Grant, ‘ Cat. By brit. Mus. vol 17,)p) 350 3 welche, s: VogAtrikas,,’ vol. 2, p. 236; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3; p. 102. 516. ¢ ad. Mchinga Mountains, W. of Loangwa. November 25, 1905. Bill, black; bare skin on throat, blue black, on head and zeck, brilliant scarlet ; zvzs, light brown ; /ee¢, black. 517. 6 ad. Mchinga Mountains, W. of Loangwa. November 25, 1905. Bare skin on throat, head, and neck, dull red, tinged with bluish, brighter on lower edge of throat and above eye. Common, but very wary. The stomachs of these birds were full of snails, millipedes, termites, &c. They also undoubtedly eat tortoises. The natives have no special superstition about the bird, but do not consider it edible. Native name “ Ngomba.” 34 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. 69. Lophoceros melanoieucus. ’ Buceros melanoleucus, Licht., “Cat. rer. nat. Hambs7epee (1793): Lophoceros melanoleucus, Grant, ‘‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, Pp. 399; Shelley, Zdzs, 1898, p. 380 (Zomba Plains); Reichen., “ Vég. Afrikas,”: vol. 2, p. 249; W. L. Sclater, ‘*Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 110. 350. g ad. Mterize River, Loangwa district. July 24, 1905. 359. 9 ad. Mterize River, Loangwa district. July 26, 1905. | Bill, red, with a narrow line of yellowish-white at base ; zvzs, ochre yellow ; /eez, black. Common on the Zambesi, but scarcer to the north. It is a very wary species. Native name “ Niamlongwe.” 70. Lophoceros neumanni. Lophoceros neumanni, Reichen., “ Orn. Monatsb.,” 1894, p- 50 (Irangi) ; Zd@. Journ. f. Ornith., 1894, p. 230 (Mgera) ; Sharpe, “Handi. B.)7 vol: 2; p) 673) Reichens a avice. Afrikas,” vol..2, p. 254. O82 ) Petaukes March) 2: 1005; Bill, dusky yellow at base, brownish-black at tip ; 272s, brown ; feez, black. “Niamlongo” ox “ Niamlongwe” of the Asenga. Only previously recorded from German East Africa. 71. Lophoceros epirhinus. Buceros epirhinus, Sundev., Oefu. k. Vetensk.-Akad. Forh. Stockh., 1850, p. 108 (Upper Caffraria). Lophoceros epirhinus, Grant, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, p. 408; Shelley, /dzs, 1898, p. 380 (Zomba Plains and Upper Shiré), p. 555 (Lake Shirwa and Likwenu R.); W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 114. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. l. (1907), No. 10. 35 Tockus nasutus, Bocage (ec Lann.), ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 408. Lophoceros nasutus epirhinus, Reichen., “ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p- 258. | 146. ¢ ad. Lichunio, near Petauke. April 12, 1905. Bill, greyish-white ; mandible, brownish-black ; 272s, red brown; /eeZ, black. Native name, “ Niamlongo.” Not uncommon. 72. Lophoceros erythrorhynchus. Buceros evythrorhynchus, Temm., ‘ Pl. Col.,” vol. 2, gen. Buceros sp. 19 (1823: Sénégal et Guinée). Tockus erythrorhynchus, Bocage, ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 120. Lophoceros erythrorhynchus, Grant, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, ‘ p. 409; Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 24 DZ ae Wee les Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 116. 12. ¢ ad. Bank of Zambesi. June 25, 1904. Aas Lichunio, near Petauke. April 12, 1905. 150. 6 ad. Lichunio, near Petauke. April 13, 1905. 152. 6 ad. Lichunio, near Petauke. April 14, 1905. 209. ¢ ad. Bank of Loangwa. June 5, 1905. 376. g ad. Lichunio, near Petauke. August 19, 1905. Maxilla, red ; mandible, blackish, whitish at base ; z7zs, ochre yellow, (143, 100) grey brown ; /eez, black. This species of Horn-bill only occurs in the “ Mopani” flats, near the big rivers. “Kopi kopi” of the Asenga, in imitation of its cry. 73- Bycanistes buccinator. Buceros bucinator, Temm., “Pl. Col.,” vol. 2, part 48, pl. 284 (1824: Cape of Good Hope); Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 540. Bycanistes buccinator, Grant, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, p. 421; Shelley, Zbzs, 1898, p. 555 (Mwanza); Reichen., ““Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 243; W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 106. 36 NEAVE, Olexbo of Birds from N.E. Rhodesta. 469. ¢ ad. Near Kapopo, N.W. Rhodesia. October 26, 1905. ; Bill and casque, black ; zrzs, brown ; feet, black. Scarce, and exceedingly wary, but widely distributed. “Nga Nga” of most local tribes. Generally in pairs and usually on fruit trees. Family UPUPID. 74. Upupa africana. Upupa africana, Bechst., “Ktrze Uebers.,” p. 172 (1811: Congo); Bocage, ““Orn. Angola,” p. 124; Salvin, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 16, p. 14; Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. (2, p. 336; W. l. Sclater, “Fauna-s. Africa, iamds, WOL 25 [0h 1S) 56. 6 ad. Petauke. December 19, 1904. Bill, black ; feet, dark brown. Native name, “ Papatali.” Rather scarce, though widely distributed ; generally occurs singly. Family IRRISORID. 75. Irrisor erythrorhynchus. Upupa erythrorhynchos, Lath., “Ind, Orn.,” vol. 1, p. 280 (1790: Africa). Trrisor erythrorhynchos, Reichen., “‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 338. Lrrisor viridis, Shelley (mec Licht.), Jd2s, 1898, p. 555 (Mtondwe). Fo juve. betaukes) December) 20). 1904mmeac- black. 188. 9 ad. Mbala Country. May 18, 1905. 257. 6 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 21, 1905. 312. ¢ ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 8, 1905. Bill, red ; zvzs, brown ; feef, red. Common singly or in flocks. Freshly killed specimens have a strong and peculiar smell. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. li. (1907), Vo. 10. an 76. Rhinopomastus schalowi. Rhinopomastus schalowi, Neum., Journ. f- Ornith., 1900, p. 221. Rhinopomastus cyanomelas schalowi, Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” VOlM2 Os 3407 - Rhinopomastus cyanomelas, Shelley (xec Vieill.), Zd2s, 1898, p. 380 (Zomba Plains), p. 555 (Likwenu). 120, @ acy Ieeenilxs, IWleyKelol 2s. iGl)s. 176. 2 juv. ? Mbala Country. May 9, 1905. Bill, black ; zrzs, brown ; /eez, black. Not so common as the last species ; generally singly or in pairs ; but I have met with it in small flocks. This species, as well as J/. erythrorhynchus, is known to the Loangwa Valley people as “ Tsegeleweni.” Family MEROPID#. 77. Dicrocercus hirundineus. Merops hirundineus, Licht., “Cat. rer. nat. rariss.,” p. 21 (1793) ; Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 93. Dicrocercus hirundineus, Sharpe, ‘‘ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, JD, AS, OL my, ime, 2 § IRencngn, OH Woe Ailes.” WOl, 2, jo. ange WW. Ik, SObieis “leznioe S. vince, Iindls,< woll, 6, [D> Oe 233. g ad. Ulungu Mountain. June 12, 1905. _ Bill, black ; zres, red ; feed, grey. Not observed elsewhere. 78. Melittophagus meridionalis. Melittophagus meridionalis, Sharpe, “* Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, p: 45, pl. 1, fig. 4; Shelley, /é7s, 1898, p. 555 (Mtondwe) ; Reichen., “Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 307; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3. p. 67. Merops erythropterus, Bocage (nec Gm.), “Orn. Angola,” p. 92. Wy4, 9 ad. Petaukey April 18) 1905: ie © eyeol Ieee, Aor! Bit, es, 282. g ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 29, 1905. 38 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesza. 416. ? ad. Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. September 30, 1905. : Lill, black ; zrzs, red ; feet, dusky. Common everywhere, except during the height of the rains. “Niandolansewe” of the Asenga, “ Kalangombe” of the Achawa and Nyasa tribes. I once watched one of these birds hawking Buetenties for more than half an hour. He always returned to the same perch. The majority of his captures consisted of Hamanumida daedalus, with one or two Catopsilia florella. 79. Melittophagus albifrons. Spheconax albifrons, Cab. and Heine., “ Mus. Hein.,” vol. 2, 133 (1860: South Africa). Melittophagus albifrons, Sharpe, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, Dp: 53: Merops bullockoides, Smith ; Bocage, ‘“‘Orn. Angola,” p. 93. Melittophagus bullockoides, Shelley, Zbts, 1898, p. 555 (Lake Shirwa), J@., /dis, 1901, p. 592 (Chickala); Reichen., “WVog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p: 311; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna se Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 70. gi. 2? ad. Bank of Loangwa. July 2, 1905. 292. ¢ ad. Bank of Loangwa. July 2, 1905. 535. 6 ad. Bank of Loangwa. December 20, 1905. Bill, black ; zr¢s, brown ; feet, blackish. In colonies on the sandy banks of the Loangwa. 80. Merops apiaster. Merops apiaster, Linn., ‘Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 182 (1766) ; Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 86; Sharpe, “‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 77, p. 63; Shelley, /dzs, 1898, p. 380 (Zomba Plains and Zomba), /d., 7625, 1901, p. 592 (Angoniland) ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 320; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol 3, p. 57. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 10. 39 413. 6 ad. Road to Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Sep- tember 28, 1905. 488. ¢ ad. Msofu River, Alala Plateau. November 7, 1905. 518. g ad. Mountains W. of Loangwa. November 25, 1905. Lill, black ; zvzs, blood-red ; fee¢, dusky. Only observed on the higher plateau to the West. These specimens were probably on migration. 81. Merops natalensis. Merops natalensis, Reichenb., “‘ Handb., Merop.,” p. 78, pl. 451 ; Sharpe, ‘‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, p. 84 ; Shelley, Zdzs, 1898, p 555 (Zomba), Z¢., /bzs, 1901, p. 592 (Angoniland). Merops nubicus, Bocage (zec Gm.), “ Ora. Angola,” p. go. Merops nubtcoides, Des Murs et Pucher.; Keichen., ‘‘ Vog- Afrikas,” vol. 2,p. 328; W. L. Sclater, ‘“ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 62, 24. 6d ad. W. bank of Loangwa, Feira district. August 3, 1904. 29. 6 ad. W. bank of Loangwa, Feira district. August II, 1904. Bill, black ; zrzs, dark red ; feez, slate-colour. Not uncommon, but local. Comes readily to grass fires. ‘“Makorikori” of all the neighbouring tribes. Family CAPRIMULGID. 82. Cosmetornis vexillarius. Semiophorus ( Macrodypteryx 2) vexillarius, Gould, “Icon. Av.,” vol. 2, pl. 3 (1838). Cosmetornis vextllartus, Bocage, ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 155 ; Har- tert, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 16, p. 595; Shelley, Zdzs, 1898, p. 555 (Songwe, Nkata and Karonga) ; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,’ vol. 3, Pp. 42. 40 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. Macrodypteryx vexillarius, Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, [Ds Spe 441. g ad. Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. October 13, 1905. Bill, brownish, black at the tip; z7zs, brown; (feet, chocolate brown. | Common all over the country. “ Lumbilumbi” of most local tribes. 83. Caprimulgus fraenatus. Caprimulgus fraenatus, Salvad., Ann. Mus. Genov., (2), vol. 1, p- 118 (1884: Daimbi, Shoa); Hartert, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,7 vol. 16, p. 533; Jackson, /izs,” to02sspanoom (Eldoma Ravine, Uganda); Reichen., ‘ Vég. Afrikas,” WOb By db BS: 183. —ad. Mbala Country. May 16, 1905. 345. 6 ad. Mterize River, Loangwa Valley. July 24, 1905. | 511. 9 ad. Near Chiwali’s, Alala Plateau. Novem- ber 16, 1905. Bill, dark brown ; zvzs, dark brown ; feet, pale brownish. Some eggs of this bird were picked up on the bare ground in open places. They are of the usual Night-jar type. “ Malwelwe” of the Asenga. This is an East African species not previously recorded so far to the south. Family COLIID#. 84. Colius affinis. Colius leucotis affinis, Shelley, Zbis, 1885, p. 312 (White Nile to Dar-es-Salaam) ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 205. Colius affinis, Sharpe, “Cat. B, Brit. Mus.,” vol. 17, p. 342, pl. 12, fig. 2; Shelley, /4zs, 1901, p. 592 (Angoniland). Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 10. 4I 433. 6 ad. Ndola. October 11, 1905. 442. 6 ad. Ndola. October 13, 1905. Bill, black and whitish-horn-colour; 777s, anterior two-thirds brown, posterior third yellowish-green ; /ee?, crimson. Common in flocks near the Kafue River ; also seen occasionally on the banks of the Loangwa. — “ Ziazi” of the Atonga and Nyasa tribes. ORDER COCCYGES. Family MUSOPHAGID. 85. Turacus livingstonei. Turacus livingstonit, Gray, P.Z.S., 1864, p. 44 (Manganja High- lands of East Africa, 3000 or 4000 ft.) ; Shelley, ‘‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 19, p. 439; Zd., Zbis, 1898, p. 380 (Mount Mlosa and Zomba Plains), p. 555 (Songwe); Reichen., ~ Wow, INNES.” Ob 2, jos fu g We ke Scales, “leanne S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 216. Corythatx livingstonit, Bocage, ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 132. 48. gd ad. Mterize River. Nov. 2, 1904. 46, & eel leeks, -INGy., 16, UCOZ 232. 2 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 23, 1904. Lill, dark red; orbzt, orange; eyvelzd, whitish ; 277s, brown ; feed, black. “ Nduwaluwa” of the Asenga, “ Nkulukulu” of the Achawa and Nyasaland natives. This bird in former days was considered to be Royal game, and its feathers could only be worn by chiefs. It is snared by hanging the ripe orange fruit of a Cucurbitaceous plant up in the large trees mainly frequented by the birds. The fruit is hollowed out through an aperture of about an inch in diameter, in which a snare is placed. 42 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. 86. Gallirex chlorochlamys. Gallirex chlorochlamys, Shelley, /bis, 1881, p. 118 (Ugogo and Dar-es-Salaam) ; /@, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 19, p. 447 ; fd., Ibis, 1898, p. 555 (Mtondwe) ; Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 40. 12. 9 ad. Mseize River. July 8, 1904. 215. ? ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 6, 1905. 259. 6 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 22, 1905. 261. 9 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 23, 1905. Bill, black; orbzt, dull red; eyvelzd, whitish; 7s, brown ; feed, black, No. 12 seems slightly intermediate, and approaches G. porphyrocephalus. Common in the denser bush in the Zambesi and Loangwa Valleys. Its cry is remarkably like that of a cock pheasant. “Nduwa luwa” of the Asenga. This bird is good eating. 87. Musophaga rosse. Musophaga rosse, Gould, P.Z.S., 1858, p. 93 (Western Coast of Africa); “‘Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p: 133) eshelley: “Cat. B, Brits Musi7 vol, ao, p. 448; Reichens avon Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 29. 421. 6 ad. Near Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 3, 1905. 424. 9 ad. Near Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 4, 1905. | 429. 6 ad. Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 10, 1905. Maxilla, brilliant yellow, shading to orange-red above the base in middle line. A dull reddish patch beneath each nostril; mazdzble, dull reddish, yellowish-horn at tip ; orbit, bright yellow ; zrzs, brown ; feet, black. Only found west of the Mchinga Escarpment, where Manchester Memotrs, Vol. tt. (1907), No. 19. 43 it was fairly common. Natives report it from the Luapula River. Crops of these birds invariably full of fruits and seeds. “Nduwa’” of the Alala and Awisa. 88. Schizorhis concolor. Corythaix concolor, Smith, S. Afr. Quart. Journ., 1833, p. 48 (Gia oeelate): Schizorhis concolor, Bocage, “‘Orn. Angola,” p. 134; Shelley, eatebean brit NMiuss VO eng wpa Ahan 2. /OUS, | EOgo, p. 380 (Zomba Plains), p. 555 (Mwanza); W. L. Sclater, ““Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 219. Chizaerhis concolor, Reichen., “ Vig. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 34. 181. ¢ ad. Mbala Country. May 14, 1905. Bill, black ; zrzs, brown ; feet, black. Not uncommon, but rather local, as it avoids hilly country. A somewhat wary bird. “Kuwe” of the Asenga in imitation of its cry. Family CUCULID&. 89. Coccystes glandarius. Cuculus glandarius, Linn., ‘Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 167 (1766). Coccystes glandarius, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 145; Shelley, O(Crti, 18, Leni, MRL” Wok mG, jos Buae JEL JOG, Wises p. 380 (Zomba and Zomba Plains); Reichen, “ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 81; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 193. 533. dad. E. bank of Loangwa. Dec. 18, 1905. Maxiltla, black ; mandzble, dusky ; zrzs, olive brown ; Jeet, dusky. This specimen was probably on migration, and it is- not a little remarkable that this species, in common with C. gacobtnus and C. cafer, should all have been obtained within a day or two of each other, and at the same place. 44 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. go. Coccystes jacobinus. Cuculus jacobinus, Bodd., ‘‘'Tabl. PJ. Enl.,” p. 53 (1783). Coccystes jacobinus, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 1463; Shelley, “Cat. B. Bruit. Mus.,” vol- 10, p; 217 ;) Reichengaemog, Afrikas,” vol. 2; p.78; W. I. Sclater, “ HaunaSsamess Birds; volo 3; ps 195: 532. gad. E. bank of Loangwa. Dec. 18, 1905. Bill, black ; zvzs, dark brown ; /eez, dusky. “Kalembo” of the Asenga. These Cuckoos were apparently on migration. g1. Coccystes cafer. Cuculus cafer, Licht., “Cat. rer. nat. Hamb.,” p. 14 (1793). Cociystes cajfer, shelley, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.” vol. 19;9pse22e Id., [bis, 1898, p. 380 (Lakangula River, on the Zomba Plains), p. 555 (Mtondwe); Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 198; W. LL. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa; Birds,” vol. 3, p. 198. Coccystes afer, Bocage, ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 542. 534. 2 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. Dec. 20, 1905. Bill, black ; zvzs, dark brown ; /eez, leaden. Two or three pairs seen on this occasion for the first time. 92. Cuculus clamosus. Cuculus clamosus, Lath., ‘‘ Ind. Orn.,” Suppl., p. 30 (1801: Cape of Good Hope) ; Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 141 ; Shelley, “Cat. BY But. Mus... vol 10, p: 200), Jkeichent aaioce Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 86; W. L. Sclater, “‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 182. 7s. © juva Molilois, near Petauke:) Web. ay 1905: Hill, blackish-brown ; zvzs, light brown ; /eez, greyish- brown. Manchester Memotrs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 10. 45 93. Cuculus canorus. Cuculus canorus, Linn., “Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 168 (1766) ; Bocage, ‘‘ Orn. Angola,” pees sp snelleys Cat, By but: Mus.,” vol. 19, p. 245; Reichen., “ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, paso We I Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. au Pp. 177- 460. @ ad. Bank of Kafue. Oct. 21, 1905. R20, gach Welle, IDE O), TOO, Maxilla, dusky ; mandible, yellowish-brown, tipped with dusky ; z7zs, yellow ; ordzt, yellow ; feed, yellow. 94. Cuculus solitarius. Cuculus solitarius, Stephens, ‘Gen. Zool.,” vol. 9, p. 84, pl. 18 (1815: Caffraria and Madagascar); Shelley, “Cat. B. Brite Wise?» voly no, pys25ou | 2a: /b2s4 1803.55 350 (Zomba) ; Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 87; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 178. Cuculus capensis, Bocage (xec Miill.), ‘‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 140. Asien ade banka ot Kafuey near Ndolay : Oct. 10, 1905. Maxilla, blackish ; mandible, yellowish-horn, black at tip ; orbzt, yellow ; zvzs, brown ; fee?, yellow. “Mafutantowa” of the Asenga. 95. Metallococcyx smaragdineus. Chalcites smaragdineus, Swains., “B. West Africa,” vol, 2, p. 191 (1837 : Gambia). Chrysococtyx smaragdineus, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 142 ; Shelley. Cate ba brite Vise vole roy pai26O4) Welle Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 185. Metallococcyx smaragdineus, Sharpe, “‘ Handl. B.,” vol. 2, p. 161 ; Reichen., “‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 101. 1040) 2 ad) Retauke), March 13) roo5, 46 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. Maxilla, black ; mandzble, pale blue ; orbzt pale blue ; vis, brown ; feet, greyish-blue. Rather scarce in this country. 96. Chrysococcyx cupreus. Cuculus cupreus, Bodd., ‘‘'Tabl. Pl. Enl.,” p. 40 (1783). Chrysococcyx cupreus, Bocage, “‘Orn. Angola,” p. 143 ; Shelley, “Cat. B: Brit. Mus.” vol. 10; p. 285); Ja) [oisrsge: p. 381 (Zomba Plains); Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p- 94; W. L. Sclater, ‘Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 189. 455. Juv. Bank ‘of Kafue, near Ndola-Octaza 1905. Aso, ¢ ad. Bank of Katve: {@et.21.1e05: 509. g ad. Near Chiwali’s. Nov. 15, 1905. Bill, dusky, paler beneath; zvzs, red; orbzt, scarlet ; feet, dusky. 97. Centropus burchelli. Centropus burchell, Swains., “An. in Menag.,” p. 321 (1838, South Africa); Shelley, /é¢s, 1898, p. 555 (Karonga) ; Reichen., ‘‘Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 60; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 203. Centropus senegalensis, Shelley, ‘‘ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 19, p. 360. 32. @ ad. Near Pakolwe Mountain, Portuguese East Africa. Aug. 25, 1904. Bill, brownish-black. 223. 2 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 7, 1905. Bill, black ; zrvzs, red ; feet, dark grey. Common in long grass, in which it creeps about very rapidly, and seldom flies, making it hard to get a shot at. Said by natives to kill snakes, also cane-rats, by settling on their heads and picking out their eyes. “Mkuta” of all the local tribes. e Manchester Memoirs, Vol. le. (1907), No. 1. 47 98. Centropus superciliosus. Centropus superciliosus, Hempr. and Ehrenb., “Sym. Phys.,” fol. r. (1828); Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 150; Shelley, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 19, p. 363 ; Reichen., ‘* Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 65; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 208. 225. 9 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 7, 1905. Bill, black, shading to whitish at base of mandible ; ivis, red ; feet, dark grey. Its habits appear to be the same as those of C. burchelli. ORDER SCANSORES. Family INDICATORIDZ. 99. Indicator indicator. Cuculus indicator, Gm., “Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 418 (1788: Interior of Atrica). Indicator indicator, Shelley, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 19, p. 5 ; Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 104. Indicator sparrmanni, Stephens; Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 135; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S$. Africa, Birds,” vol, 3, p. 146. 34. g juv. East of Loangwa, Portuguese East Africa. Septe7,, 1904. Bill, dark brown ; zrzs, light brown ; /eez, black. 39. 6 ad. East of Loangwa, Portuguese East Africa. SEs WA, UGOA, Bill, greyish-purple ; zvzs, brown ; feez, brown. 174. 6 ad. Mbala Country. May 8, 1905. Bill, pale pink ; zrzs, brown ; /eeZ, grey. 384. @ ad. West of Loangwa. Sept. I, 1905. Bill, dark brown ; zrzs, brown ; feeZ, dusky. A common species in the country. Native name, “Msoro.” Undoubtedly leads natives to honey. 48 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. too. Indicator variegatus. Indicator variegatus, Less., “Traité d’Orn,” p. 155 (1831: Africa) ; Shelley, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 19, p. 7; Z@., Lbis, 1898, p. 555 (Nyasaland) ; Reichen., “‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p.. 108; W. Ib) Selater, “Fauna S. Atrmes, Birdsa) VOL; Pals T. 482. 6 ad. Near Msofu River, Alala Plateau. Nov. 5, 1905. Lill, brownish-horn, rather paler below ; zr7zs, brown ; Jeet, blueish-grey. | Family CAPITONID. tor. Lybius torquatus. Bucco torquatus, Dumont., “ Dict. Sci. Nat.,” vol. 4, p. 65, pl. 28 (1806). Pogonorhynchus torquatus, Bocage, “‘Orn. Angola,” p. 24. Melanobucco torguatus, Shelley, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 19, Ds Dale Lylius torquatus, Reichen., “Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 125 ; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 157. 244. gad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 17, 1905. Bill, black ; zrzs, dull red ; fee¢, blackish. Fairly common, but it is not easy to obtain specimens., “Chimamkoto” of the Asenga. 102. Lybius macclouni. Melanobucco macclounit, Shelley, Bull. Brit. Orn. Club, 1899, p- 35; ad. Lbis, 1899, p. 377, pl. 6 (Luchinde, Ikawa, Fife). Lybius macclouni, Sharpe, ‘‘Hand: B.,” vol. 2, p. 178; Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. I: 0. - 396. 2? ad. Road from Mkushi to Ndola. Alala Plateau. Sept. 16, 1905. (/rzs, reddish-brown.) Manchester Memoirs, Vol. l. (1907), No. 10. 49 408. ? ad, Road from Mkushi to Ndola, Alala Plateau. Sept. 25, 1905. 409. gad. Road from Mkushi to Ndola, Alala Plateau. Sept. 25, 1905. Lill, white ; zvzs, orange red ; feet, pinkish-brown. Only met with on the high plateau. “Kamchonchola” of the Alala. This bird has. only been recorded from Nyasaland and the Tanganyika Plateau. 103. ITrachyphonus cafer. eusecayce a icilLan- New Dict. deetist. Nat. vols 2G). 1o2 (1818). Pane Trachyphonus cafer, Bocage, ‘‘Orn. Angola,” p. 109; Shelley, (Cai, 185 Ieee, WIGS.” Holl, ie, fo, meres INeteover, OF ory. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 154; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Binds; + voly 24 pa 170: 134. ¢ ad. Lichunio, near Petauke. April 6, 1905. Bill, yellow, blackish at the tip; zvzs, dark brown ; Jeet, grey, Native name, “ Pupu.” I found this a scarce bird in the Loangwa Valley. OrDER PICIFORMES. Family PICID#. 104. Dendromus fulleborni. Dendromus malherbei fiilleborni, Neum., Journ. f. Ornith., 1900, p. 204 (Lake Nyassa), Dendromus filleborni, Sharpe, Lois, 1902, p. 639. 467. g ad. Near Kapopo, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 25, 1905. Bill, dusky, paler below ; z7zs, reddish-brown ; /ee¢, ereenish-grey. 50 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. 105. Dendromus bennetti. Chrysoptilus bennetti, Smith, “Rep. S. Afr. Exped.,” App., p. 53 (1836). Campothera bennett, Hargitt, “ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 18, p. 102; Shelley, Zéis, 1898, p. 555 (Mwanza); W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 133. Dendromus bennetti, Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 177. 403. 9 ad. Road to Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Sept. 20, 1905. Lill, greyish-horn ; 272s, blood red ; feet, pale greenish. 106, Dendropicus hartlaubi. Dendropicos hartlaubw, Malh., Rev. et Mag. Zool., 1849, p. 532 (Zanzibar) ; Reichen., ‘“‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 193. Dendrobates hartlauli, Bocage, ‘Orn. Angola,” App., p. 535: Dendropicus zanzibari, Malh.; Hargitt., “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 18, p. 297; Shelley, 71s, 1898, p. 555 (Songwe). 242. g ad. Ulungu Mountain, West Loangwa. June 15,1905. /7zs, reddish-brown. 303. 9 ad. Bank of Loangwa. July 6, 1905. 304. 9 ad. Bank of Loangwa. July 6, 1905. Lill, blackish ; zrzs, dull red ; feet, greenish-grey. “Konkomola” of the Asenga. “ Nangogoda” of the Manganja and Lake people. Fairly common everywhere. 107. Thripias namaquus. Picus namaquus, Licht., ‘Cat. rer. Nat. Hamb.,” p. 17 (1793). Dendrobates namaquus, Bocage, ‘‘ Orn. Angola,” p. 75. Thripias namaquus, Hargitt, “‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 18, p. 306; Shelley, /dis, 1898, p. 555 (Mtondwe); W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 138. Mesopicos namaguus, Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 189. 299. gd ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 5, 1905. Lill, blackish ; zvzs, blood-red ; fez, grey. Native name “ Konkomoro.” Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 10. 51 ORDER PASSERIFORMES. Family HIRUNDINIDA, 108. Chelidonaria urbica. flirundo urbica, Linn., ‘Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 344 (1766). ‘Chelidon urbica, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 10, p. 87; W. L. Sclater, “‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 278. ‘Chelidonaria urbica, Sharpe, “ Handl. B.,” vol. 3, p. 187. Delichon urbica, Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 431. 495,497. 6. South end of the Irumi Mountains, Alala Plateau. Nov. 11, 1905. 496, 498, 499. 2. South end of the Irumi Mountains, Alala Plateau. Nov. I1, 1905. Bill, black ; ivis, brown ; feet, flesh-coloured, covered ‘with white feathers. A few out of many thousands, all assembled on a single tree, evidently on migration. This is an interesting locality for this species, which has formerly only been recorded on two occasions from South Africa. 10g. Hirundo griseopyga. fhirundo griseopyga, Sundev., Oefv. k. Vetensk.-Akad. Forh. Stockh., 1850, p. 197 (Port Natal); Sharpe, ‘‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. ro, p. 152; Reichen., “‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 403; W. L.Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 207. 461, 462. 6. Bank of Kafue. Oct. 22, 1905. 479. 2. Near Kapopo, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 30, 1905 Lill, dusky ; zvzs, brown ; feet, dusky. “Kaminte” of the Asenga, “ Kawaliwali” of the Manganja and Lake tribes. Nests in the bank of the river. No. 479 was snared on its nest. 52 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. cro. Hirundo puella. ftirundo puella, Vemm. and Schl., “Faun. Japon.,” p. 34 (1842; Coast of Guinea); Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” Pp. 1845 Sharpe, “Cav Bb. But. Mus.) vol) tomas Shelley, /d7s, 1898, p. 380 (Zomba Plains and Mount Mlosa); Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 413; W. L. Sclater, “‘ Fauna. S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 300. 19, ¢ ad: ~ Miseize River, ‘Meinay district” 7 ily aness 1904. Bill, black ; zrzs, brown ; feed, black. 111. Hirundo monteiri. Hirundo monteirt, Hartlaub., Lbzs, 1862, p. 340, pl. 11 (Angola) ; Bocage, Orn: Angola p: 131; Sharpe, «Catalans Mus2 vol. 10, 0p. 1695 Shelley, Whis, 1808; moumnes (Mwanza); Rerchen., << Vos. “Afmkas,~ vols 2) os) “er iW, Ee sclater, «Kaunas: Airica, Binds,” vol. 2, psec 422. cad. ~Ndola, NW. Rhodesia, Oct. 17 moes: Bill, black ; zvzs, brown ; feez, black. ASI. 6 ad. Near Kapopo, N.W. Khodesiay (Novem 1905. Bill, black ; zrzs, brown ; feet, black. Family MUSCICAPIDA. 112. Alseonax subadusta. Alseonax subadusta, Shelley, 761s, 1897, p. 542 (Nyika Plateau and Fort Hill on Tanganyika Flat, 4,000 feet) ; Reichen., ““Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 458. 236. @ ad. Ulungu Mountain, West Loangwa. June 13, 1905. Bill, blackish, paler at base ; zvzs, brown ; /ee¢, black. Had some small beetles, ants, &c., in its crop, Manchester Memotrs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 10. 53 _ 113. Melaenornis ater. Bradyornis ater, Sundev., Oefv. k. Vetensk:-Akad. Forh. Stockh., 1850, p. 105 (Caffraria) ; Sharpe, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 3, p. 314; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” VOl2s p. 224." Melaenornis ater, Bocage, ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 208; Reichen., ““Vo6g. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 443. Gog ad. | Petauke Bieb: 2, 100s, Zam cad.) shetauke: )eb:,2: 190s, Heomceadawebetaukes April 21, 1905, 153. ? Molilo’s, near Petauke. April 14, 1905. Bill, black ; zrzs, brown ; feez, black. 114. Bradyornis murinus. Lradyornis murinus, Finsch and Hartl., “ Vog. Ostafr.,” p. 866 (Caconda, Benguella); Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” VOL 209). 210 notes Bocage, “Orn. Angola,’ p, 210; Shelley, Zdis, 1898, p. 380 (Zomba Plateau and Zomba) ; W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 230. Bradyornis pallidus murinus, Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p- 436. 398. $ ad. Road to Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Sept. 17, 1905. Bill, brownish-black ; zvzs, dark brown ; feez, black. 115. Muscicapa grisola. > Muscicapa grisola, Linn., “Syst. Nat.,” voli 1, p. 328 (1766); Sharpe; - Cat. bar but. Musi vol. 4) .. 15ns slelleys Jbis, 1898, p. 380 (Zomba); Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 449; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 240. Butalis grisola, Bocage, “ Orn. Angola,” p. 547. ° 506. ¢ ad. Road to Chiwali’s, Alala Plateau. Nov. 14, 1905. . 54 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. Lill, dusky, pale at base of lower mandible; zrzs, brown ; /eez, black. BOA hetallke sD eeRomnOOse 116. Muscicapa czrulescens. Butalis cerulescens, Hartl., Zozs, 1865, p. 267 (Natal). Muscicapa cerulescens, Sharpe, ‘‘ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 4, p- 154 ; Shelley, /dzs, 1898, p. 554 (Mtondwe) ; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 241. Muscicapa cinereola, Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 202. Alseonax cerulescens, Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 454. 93. @ ad. Petauke. Feb. 22, 1905. ill, dark grey ; z7zs, dark brown ; fée¢, dark grey. 192. 6 ad. Mterize River. May 24, 1905. Lill, black (greyish below); z7vzs, brown; feet, dark erey. B60: io adsy MiterizerRiver july, 22 aloore ill, black (greyish below) ; 272s, reddish-brown ; feet, dark grey. 474. ? ad. Near Kapopo, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 27, 1905. lrzs, brown. “Niamjeza” of the Asenga. ? 117. Batis molitor. Muscicapa molitor, Hahn and Kiister, “V6g. Asien, Africa, America, und Neuholland,” part 20, pl. 3 (1836). Batis molto, Sharpe, “Cat. By Brit. Mus 2 volta, sp mmueges Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 198 ; Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 482. 180. ¢ ? ad. Mbala Country. May 13, 1905. 182. 9 ad. Mbala Country. May 14, 1905. 278, 279. g ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 27, 1905. Sol. 29 ad. Road to Chiwali’s, Alala Plateau. Nov. 13, 1905. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1906), No. 10. 55 562, 563. d ? ad. Near Petauke. Jan. 3, 1906. Lill, black ; zrzs, sulphur yellow, (278, 279) outwardly greenish, (501) whitish, (563) outwardly brown, inwardly whitish ; feet, black. Not uncommon in pairs and small parties throughout the country. 118. Platystira jacksoni. Platysiira jacksont, Sharpe, lozs, 1891, p. 445 (Sotik), 1892, p. 301, pl. 7, fig. 2; Reichen., ‘“* Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 488. 405. 2 ad. Roadto Ndola. Sept. 23, 1905. Bill, black (wattle over eye, orange scarlet); 272s, brown ; /ee¢, dusky. The occurrence of this species so far south is not a little remarkable, the original specimens all. coming from Equatorial Africa. The female of this species seems to be hitherto un- described. It differs from the male in having the throat and fore-neck black, with a little patch of white on the chin. 119. Smithornis capensis. Platyrhynchus capensis, Smith, “Ill. Zool. S. Africa,” pl. 27 (1839 : South-east Coast towards Delagoa Bay). Smithornis capensis, Sharpe, “ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 4, p. 388 ; Shelley, Zézs, 1898, p. 555 (Mtondwe and Fort Hill) ; Reichen., “ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 471; W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 248. 103. @ ad. Petauke. March 9, 1905. I90. g ad. Mterize River. May 23; 1905. 314. gad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 9, 1905. ‘Bill, black above, white below; zvzs, brown; feet, greenish-yellow. 56 N¥KAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. Not uncommon in the dense bush on the banks of streams. “Tondowani” of the Asenga. The nest and eggs (2) of this species were taken in the dense bush on the banks of a stream. They both closely agree with the description of S. African specimens given by Stark. 120. Erythrocercus livingstonei. Erythrocercus livingstonit, Finsch and Hartl., “ Vog. Ostafr.,” p. 303 (1870: Zambesi) ; Sharpe, ‘‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. -4, p: 298; pl: 9, fig. 2; Reichen., “Vog. Afmkases vol. 2, p. 495; W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” WO 2 > BRS. 358. 6 ad. Mterize River, East Loangwa district. July 25, 1905. Lill, pale brownish, whitish below ; z7zs, dark brown ; Jeet, pale brownish. 332. dg ad. Mterize River. July 109, 1905. Lill, pinkish-brown ; zrzs, light brown ; fez, very pale brown. : Not met with elsewhere. “ Katiti” of the Asenga. 121. Tchitrea plumbeiceps. Lerpsiphone plumbeiceps, WReichen. tz Werth., “ Mittl. Hochl. Deutsch-Ost-Afr.,” p. 275 (1898). Tchitrea plumbeiceps, Reichen., “‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 510. Lerpsiphone perspicillata, Shelley (zec Swains.), dis, 18098, p- 380 (Zomba). Sis & acl IPerulke, [Diee, ©) 1@OA. Of, @ ack Inside, IWee, Bi, uCO-A. 422. g ad. Near Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 4, 1905. 494. 6 ad. Near Lusenfwa River. Nov. 10, 1905. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 10. ist Bois Caden Retake sDecr20; 1905. Lill, bright blue, tipped dusky; ordzt, blue; zrzs, brown ; /eez, grey. No. 494, one of two males which were fighting most viciously. This bird is curiously confused in the native mind with Cossypha heuglinz, and is also called “ Niam- tambwe.” 122. Elminia albicauda. Lilminia albicauda, Bocage, “Jorn. Acad. Lisb.,” vol. 6, no. 22, Penson (US7iias Gaconda) ry /7.,...- Oxn, wangolan spy 54. Sale, MGs, WO, Js FAB) LOCO), Os By 5 INGO neal, Wow, Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 497. . 390. 6 ad. Mchinga Escarpment, East edge of the Alala Plateau. Sept. 11, 1905. 391. @ ad. Mchinga Escarpment, East edge of the Alala Plateau. Sept. 11, 1905. 504. 6 ad. Road to Chiwali’s, Alala Plateau. Nov. Ly) TOO. Bill, black ; zrzs, brown ; feez, black. Only met with on the high plateau, where it is by no means uncommon. It is a very tame but extraordinarily restless little bird. Family CAMPOPHAGID. 123. Coracina pectoralis. Graucalus pectorals, Jard. & Selb., “Ill. Orn.,” vol. 2, pl. 57 (1828: Sierra Leone) ; Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 4, Pp: 29; Shelley, /d25, 1898, p. 554 (Songwe) ; W. L. Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 274. Ceblepyris pectoralis, Bocage, ‘* Orn. Angola,” p. 205. Coracina pectoralis, Reichen., “‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 515. 106. @? juv. Petauke. March 15, 1905. 425. gad. Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 9, 1905. Lill, black ; zvzs, dark brown ; feet, black. 58 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. 124. Campophaga nigra. Campophaga nigra, Vieill., “N. Dict. d’Hist.,” vol. ro, p. 50 (1817), ex Levaill, pl. 165 ; Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 4, p. 62; Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 206; Reichen., ‘““Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 518; W. L. Sclater, “ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 260. 458. g. Bank of Kafue, near Kapopo. Oct. 21, 1905. Bill, black, orange at gape; zrzs, brown ; feed, black. Family PYCNONOTID&. 125. Andropadus oleaginus. Andropadus oleaginus, Peters, Journ. f. Ornith., 1868, p. 133 (Lourenzo Marques); Sharpe, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 6, p. 111 (Zambesi). Chlorocichla oleagina, W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” WOl, 2, Ds 7O- Andropadus tnsularis, Hartl.; Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p- 408. 44. 9 ad. Bank of Mterize, Portuguese East Africa. Sept. 18, 1904. 212. 9 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 6, 1905. Lill, brownish-grey ; zrzs, dark red ; feed, grey. 277. 6 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 26, 1905. Bill, brownish-black ; zvzs, dull red; fees, grey. 315. @ ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 9, 1905. Lill, greyish ; zrzs, brownish-red ; feed, grey. 448. 2 ad. Kafulafuta River, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 17, 1OO5- Lill, blackish ; zrzs, red ; feet, grey. Common in the dense bush of the Loangwa Valley. Generally seen feeding among dry leaves on the ground. “Chipalamaswaswa” of the Asenga. Manchester Memortrs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 10. 59 126. Phyllostrophus strepitans. Criniger strepitans, Reichen., Ornith. Centralbl., 1879, p. 139 (Malindi, E. Africa). Phyllostrophus strepitans, Sharpe, “‘Cat. B: Brit. Mus.,” vol. 6, Dain We Ie Sclater, “shauna os Atmea, Birds.) vol. 2, pe 72: Phyllastrephus strepitans, Reichen., ‘“Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p- 405. I9gl. Q ad. Mterize River. May 23, 1905. Bill, black above, whitish below ; zrzs, reddish-brown, Jeet, pinkish-grey. 281. ¢ ad. E. bank of Loangwa. June 28, 1905. Lill, brownish, paler below; z7zs, pale brown; feed, grey. 316. @ ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 9, 1905. Bill, blackish-horn, paler below; z7zs, brown; /ee?, greyish flesh-colour. “Chipalamaswaswa” of the Asenga. Fairly common in the thick bush on the banks of streams. 127. Pycnonotus layardi. Pycnonotus layardi, Gurney, bis, 1879, p. 392 (Rustenburg) ; Singngoe, (Cele 18. Jeet, Whe.” Volo Oy jO, gee We Ile Sclater, “‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 63; Reichen., “Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p. 423. Pycnonotus nigricans, Bocage (nec Vieill.), ‘Orn. Angola,” po 242. » Onc S. loeiale Or Bavonsesn, ice Iere J/uiae 10, 1904. Bill, black ; zrzs, dark red; eet, black. menace whetalkess ces Toy, 1OO4. 80. g ad. Near Molilo’s. Feb. 6, 1905. Iris, brown. 60 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. I1g, ad. Petauke. March 25, 1905. [rvis, red brown. 355. g ad. Mterize River. July 25, 1905. fvis, dark reddish. 486. 6 ad. Msofu River, Alala Plateau. Nov. 6. 1905. lrvts, dark brown. 491. 9 ad. Lusenfwa River, Alala Plateau. Nov. 10, 1905. Iris, dark brown. Native name “ Niapwiri.” The commonest and most widely distributed bird in the cour.try. Family TIMELIID. 128. Crateropus kirki. Crateropus kirkt, Sharpe, ed. Layard’s ‘“‘B. S. Africa,” p. 213, (1875: Zambesi Country); Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 250; Shelley, /ézs, 1898, p. 379 (Zomba), p. 554 (Lik- wenu, Palombe, and Songwe) ; Sharpe, ‘‘ Handl. B.,” vol. A; p. 22; W. 1s Sclater, ““Fauna’S, Africa, Birds vole: P- 57- €rateropus jardinet kirkt, Reichen., ‘‘Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p. 659. iy OQ eel INeale Petals, Us youil 1, COG. " Bill, black; zrzs, orange, outwardly scarlet; feed, blackish. 293. 6. Bank of Loangwa. July 2, 1905. Bill, black; z7zs, orange, outwardly scarlet; /ee?, blackish. Native name ‘“ Chikaiikaii.’ Not uncommon in small parties. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 10. oy 129. Crateropus hartlaubi. Crateropus hartlaubi, Bocage, Jorn. Acad. Lisb., vol. 2, p. 48. (1868: Huilla, Benguella) ; /d., ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 252, Ol ity Wes Tis Sharpe, ci Cate Deeb iit NVUtSscvOles 7, Dara jor Werke clatter. . Hauna, om Adricas binds. VvOle25) Ps 5o:. Reichen., “ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p. 663. 449. 9 ad. Kafulafuta River, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 17, 1905. Bill, black ; zvzs, blood red ; feet, greenish-horn-colour.. All the Babbling Thrushes are called “ Chikatikaii” by the natives. Family TURDID&. 130. Merula tropicalis. Turdus tropicalis, Peters, Journ. f. Ornith., 1881, p. 50 (Inhambane). Turdus libonianus, Shelley (nec Smith), Jé2s, 1898, p. 555 (Mtondwe, Chiradzula, and Fort Hill). Merula tropicalis, Sharpe, ‘‘ Handl, B.,” vol. 4, p. 127. Turdus libonyanus tropicalis, Reichen., ‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol 3, p- 693. 148. 9 ad. Lichunio, near Petauke. April 12, 1905. Bill and orbit, orange; zrzs, brown?; feez, yellowish- brown. Ee. 2 june Ieee Ins Jlain, 2 COs: Lill, horn-brown, orange yellow at gape; zrzs, dark brown ; /eeé, pinkish flesh-colour. “Ndiondio” of the Asenga. A bird seldom seen. 131. Petrophila angolensis. _Monticola angolensis, Sousa, Jorn. Acad. Lisb., vol. 12, no. 48, pp. 225, 233 (1888: Quindumbo, Angola); W. L. Sclater, ‘Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 185 ; Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p. 698. 62 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. Petrophila angolensis, Sharpe, “ Handl. B.,” vol. 4, p. 145. Monticola brevipes, Bocage (mec Strickl.), “ Orn. Angola,” p. 267. 231. g ad. Ulungu Mountain, West Loangwa. June 12, 1905. Bill, black ; zrzs, brown? ; feet, black. Not met with elsewhere. On comparing this speci- men with the series in the British Museum, I -fail to see the slightest specific difference between J. angolensis niassae and the true 7. angolensis of Sousa. 132. Cossypha bocagei. Cossypha bocagit, Finsch and Hartl., “ Vog. Ostafr.,” p. 284, note (1870: Mossamedes); Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 259, ple 2e Sharpe, Cat. Ba ibnit. ius! ovioly 7p ease Cossypha bocaget, Sharpe, “ Handl. B.,” vol. 4, p. 163 ; Reichen., Vog) Afnikas, vol. 3, p. 755: 428. 9 ad. Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 10, 1905. Bill, black ; zrzs, brown ; /eez, olive. Habits similar to those of C. heuglenz. 133. Cossypha heuglini. Cossypha heuglini, Hartl., Journ f. Ornith., 1866, p. 37 (Keren, Bogos Land) ; Sharpe, “ Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 7, p. 41; Shelley, /dzs, 1898, p. 380 (Mount Mlosa and Zomba Plains), p. 554 (Mtondwe, Tanganyika Plateau and Lake Shirwa); W. L. Sclater, “‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 3, p. 211; Reichen., “ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p. 758. 300. 9 ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 5, 1905. 360. 6 ad. Mterize River. July 26, 1905. MGS, @ acl INezie IKajonooo, Oee 20) 1OOS. Bill, black; zvzs, brown; /eet (300), greyish-horn- colour ; (360) dark brownish ; (478) greyish-brown. Common, but hard to find in the “ Marusaka” or dense dry jungle on the flats near the bigger rivers. Manchester Memotrs, Vol. le. (1907), No. 10. 63 Native name, “Niamtambwe.” Has a singularly sweet song. 134. Cossypha barbata. Cossypha barbata, Finsch and Hartl., “‘Vég. Ostafr.,” p. 864 (1870: Benguella); Bocage, “Orn. Angola,” p. 260, pl. 2; Sharpe, ‘‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 7, p. 43. Erythropygia barbata, Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p. 769. 411. 9 ad. On the road to Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Sept. 26, 1905. Bill, blackish, paler below ; zvzs, brown ; /eez¢, flesh. This bird was captured on its nest, which was made ina hole inatree. The eggs, three in number, were very hard set, and were broken in catching the bird. Eggs pale greenish, marked with chocolate, especially towards the broader end. 135. Erythropygia zambesiana. LE rythropygia zambestana, Sharpe, P.Z.S., 1882, p. 588, pl. 14, fig. 2 (Tete, Zambesi); Z@., ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 7, Deon Pe ns. tes w= Wee Wes Sclater, . Panna Sa Atricas Emel.” VOL B, jo, Bass INGEN ae, S Woe, Biles” oll, 33, P. 775: A.=14. 6 ad. Mseizi River, Feira district. July 13, 1904. Lill, black, base, yellow; zvzs, black; feet, pinkish- horn-colour. 136. Thamnolza shelleyi. Saxicola shelleyz, Sharpe, ed. Layard’s “B. S. Atrica,” p. 246 (1877: Victoria Falls). Thamnolea shelleyt, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 7, p. 52; Mis, @ slayer, 1B Ae OG ly, 10s 17K Thamnolea arnott (Tristr.); W. L. Sclater, “Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vole 25 p. 208. 64. NEAVE, Collection of Birds from. N.E. Rhodesia. Myrmecocichla nigra (Vieill.) ; Reichen, ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 3., p. 706. 237. 6 ad. Ulungu Mountain, West Loangwa. June 13, 1905. 238. 2 ad. Ulungu Mountain, West Loangwa. June 12, IGOR. 457. @ ad. Bank of Kafue. Oct. 21, 1905. AoA juve, bank, of Matues) Oct za 1605 Prefers a somewhat open type of country at 3,000 feet or over, with scattered but large timber. Has curious creeping habits on tree trunks, now and then behaving like a fly-catcher. 137. Pratincola torquata. Muscicapa torquata, Linn., “Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 328; (1766: Cape of Good Hope). Pratincola torqguata, Sharpe, ‘‘Cat. B, Brit. Mus.,” vol. 4, p. 190 ;. Bocage) “Orn, Angola,” p. 274; shelley, 7zs,.1soa5 p. 554 (Kasungu and Zomba); W. L. Sclater, “‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 190; Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” Volts sip. 732) 170. ¢. Mbala Country. May 7, 1905. 510. . On the road to Chiwali’s, Alala Plateau. Nov. 16, 1905. Bill, black (170) or horn-brown (510) ; z7zs, brown ; feet, black. Seen occasionally in long grass in the more open country. Native name, “ Niamchenchi.” 138. Saxicola falkensteini. Saxitola falkensteint, Cab., Journ. f. Ornith., 1875, p. 235 (Loango) ; Sharpe; “andl. B.,” “vol. 4, po m7sign Ween Sclater, ‘‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 202. Saxicola galtont, Bocage (mec Strickl.), ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 271. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lr. (1907), No. 10. 65 Phenicurus familiaris falkensteint, Reichen., “‘ Vég. Afrikas,” Vole sO Os: 230. ¢? Ulungu Mountain, West Loangwa. June Ll, LOOK. 414. ¢ ad. Ndola, N.W. Rhodesia. Sept. 30, 1905. Ang. @ acl INGO, NN. INN@Clesia, Sejoit, 4O, GOs. Bill, blackish ; zrvzs, brown ; /eeé, blackish. 139. Campicola pileata. Motaclla pileata, Gm., “Syst. Nat.,” vol. 1, p. 965 (1788: Cape of Good Hope). Saxicola pileata, Seebohm, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 5, p. 397 ; Bocas, “Oia, wiasolk” jo, aye 3 V5 Ibs Seles. “lettre S. Africa, Birds,” vol. 2, p. 196; Reichen., ‘‘ Vég. Afrikas,” WOlle 3 [O. GPUs, -Campicola pileata, Sharpe, “‘ Handl. B.,” vol. 4, p. 180. Saxicola livingstonit (Tristr.); Shelley, /dés, 1898, p. 554 (Palombe and Songwe). 309. 6 ad. Bank of Loangwa. July 7, 1905. ag. g Ach lilterave Innes why 15, WOOK, 468. 2 ad. Near Kapopo, N.W. Rhodesia. Oct. 26, 1905. 489. 6 ad. Msofu River, Alala Plateau. Nov. 7, 1905. Bill, black ; zvzs, brown ; feet, black. Somewhat local. Resembles a Wagtail in its habits. Family SYLVIIDA. 140. Cisticola stoehri, n. sp. Similis C. angustzcaud@, sed rostro longiore, notzo brunneo haud cinerascente distinguenda, pileo ferrugineo dorso haud concolori. C. stoehr¢ culmen, 10 mm. C. angusticauda culmen, 8 mm. 66 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesta. These specimens might have been expected to be C. melanure, Cab., but the tail is brown, not black, and is much shorter. The tail-feathers also have pale tips, and a dusky-blackish subterminal spot, but the light ends are not very pronounced. A further difference is the rufous- brown back. These differences are constant in all the four specimens obtained. I have much pleasure in dedicating anes species to Dr. F. O. Stoehr, medical officer to the expedition. 20, 21. 6 ad. Mseize River, Feira district. “July 19; 1904. Bill, brownish-pink ; zrzs, red ; feet, pink. 245. 9 ad. TYype. E. bank of Loangwa. {june no: 1905. Bill, pinkish, base blackish above; z7zs, light brown ; feet, pale pink. 250. clad. | 42. Mternze, Niver, | july 24esieese Bill, pinkish-brown, paler below ; z7zs, yellowish-brown ; feet, pale pinkish. 141. Cisticola rufopileata. Cisticola rufopileata, Reichen., Journ, f. Ornith., 1891, p. 69; Ta) Vog. Ainikasy vol: 35 py Som: 492. 6 ad. Near the Lusenfwa River, Alala Plateau. Nov. 10, 1905. . Bul, dusky-horn, paler below; zvzs, yellowish-brown ; Jeet, pale brownish colour. 142. Cisticola sylvia. Cisticola sylvia, Reichen., Orn. Monatsb., vol. 12, p. 28 (1904: Ulegga, Central Ain) Td., “Noo. (Atnicas,volee. p. 563. 213. 6 ad., bank of Voangwas (juneio; mes Bill, dark brown, paler below ; z7zs, ight brown; /ee/, pinkish-brown. Manchester Memotrs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 10. 67 It was very interesting to find this species in the Loangwa Valley, as it has hitherto only been recorded from the Equatorial Lake District. 143. Sylvia simplex. Sylota simplex, Lath., “Gen. Syn.,” Suppl., vol. 1, p. 287 (1787) ; Shelley, Zdis, 1898, p. 554 (Nkata); W. L. Sclater, HAtNa See AnCA Inds) VOM 2) Diro203 SManpe,n. kdlanele Be, vole 45 ps 2005 Reicheni,, <“Vog, Atrikas,” -vol p. 649. Sylvia hortensis, Bechst. ; Seebohm, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 5, p. 19; Bocage, ““Orn. Angola,” p. 284. Sylvia hortensts (simplex) Shelley, bis, 1898, p. 380 (Mount Mlosa and Zomba Plateau). 425, 2 acl, INGolle, IN WWe INImoclesia, Oce 12, 1OO)s. Lill, brownish-horn-colour, paler below ; z7zs, brown ; feet, silvery-grey. 484. 2 ad. Near the Msofu River, Alala Plateau. Nov. 5, 1905. 51639 Bill, dusky-horn-colour, paler below; z7zs, brown ; Jeet, pale greyish. 144. Apalis florisuga. Luprinodes florisuga, Reichen., Journ. f. Ornith., 1898, p. 314 ex Licht. Mus. Berol. Apatlis florisuga, Reichen., “‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p. 610. Chlorodyta flavida (part), W. L. Sclater, ‘Fauna S. Africa, Binds; svole 2, 7p) 1252 Z5eu ch ade 2 bank of Woanswa. ) me ro. 1905 Bill, blackish; zrvzs and ordzt, chestnut brown ; /eez, pinkish-yellow colour. 310. @ ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 7, 1905. Bill, greyish, tip blackish ; z7zs, yellowish-brown ; /ee7, pinkish-brown ; ¢arsz, darker. 68 NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. Native name, “ Niatiantia.” According to Dr. Rei- chenow (key) these birds are A. florzsuga Reich. If so, it is an entirely new locality for that species. Further, I am rather inclined to think that Dr. Reichenow is right in suggesting that dA. neglecta is also the same species. 145. Eremomela polioxantha. Eremomela polioxantha, Sharpe, ‘Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 7, p. 160 (1883 : Swazi Land) ; W. L. Sclater, “‘ Fauna S. Africa, Birds,” vol; 2, p: ros; Reichen., * Voor Atiikas/volese: 0s O20, Lremomela politoxanthis, Shelley, /dzs, 1899, p. 373 (Tanganyika Plateau). 161. ¢ juv. Matambadzi River, Mbala Country. May 3, 1905. Bill, pinkish-grey ; zvzs, red brown; feed, dark grey. 146. Eremomela pulchra. Tricholais pulchra, Bocage, Jorn. Acad, Lisb., vol. 6, no. 24, PD. 257, 275 (rS78e.Caconda) > 77, (Orne Angola Pp. 555. Evemomela pulchra, Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” vol. 7, p. 162 ; Reichen., “ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p. 640. 160. ¢ ad. Matambadzi River, Mbala Country. May BOOS: Bill, black ; zrzs, pale yellow; orbit, chocolate; /eez?, yellowish-brown. AB5. gad. Ndola, NiWe Rhodesia, “Oct a1 ioes Bill, black ; zvzs, outwardly brown, inwardly yellow ; feet, pale brownish. 302. 9 ad. Near Chiwali’s, Alala Plateau. Nov. 13, 1905. Bill, brownish-horn-colour; 277s, brown ; /eez, yellowish- horn-colour ; ¢arsz, dusky. Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 10. 69 There is a young bird of this species in the National Collection, from Caconda, Angola. It appears to be a very doubtfully distinct species from EL. cztrznzceps. 147. Camaroptera sundevalli. Camaroptera sundevalli, Sharpe, Journ. f. Ornith., 1882, p. 347, (Souths Avinica) 77" CatuBs brits Musici vole 7) p4L00): Wola sclaterns.: Haunal Sa Atrica binds, vole 2.) ps1 3) Camaroptera griseoviridts sundevalit, Reichen , “ Vég. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p 678 Camaroptera brevicaudata, Bocage (nec Rupp.), ‘Orn. Angola,” p. 280. 301. g ad. E. bank of Loangwa. July 5, 1905. Lill, blackish, grey at base of lower mandzble ; iris, orange brown ; fee, pinkish-brown. This appears to be the first recorded occurrence of this species from north of the Zambesi. 148. Camaroptera griseoviridis. Orthotomus griseo-viridis, Mull., “ Naum.,” vol. 1, part 4, p. 27. (1851: Cordofan). Camaroptera brevicaudata, Bocage (ec Cretzschm.), ‘Orn. AmcOla. pa Zoo. shanpey< CataeB.) brit. Mussa vol 7, tose weWerlemoclaters Mauna) saeAiricasbindsy. volun. p- 114. Camaroptera griseoviridis, Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p- 616. 81. 6 ad. Mbolilo’s, near Petauke. Feb. 7, 1905. Bill, black ; iris, reddish-brown ; feet, pink. 12s, @ ack WWewmuilke Mle a7, TOO, Bill, black ; iris, reddish-brown ; feet, pinkish-brown. E22, & ack leemouke. IDec, 5, 1005, Bill, black; ivis and orbit, reddish-brown ; feet, pinkish-brown. 70 ©6—NEAVE, Collection of Birds from N.E. Rhodesia. B25-ud vad. Petaukev § Deco. s1eo5: Bill, black; «ris and orbit, yellowish-brown ; feet, pinkish-brown. In common with all the Reed Warblers, this species is known to the natives as “ Niatiye.” 149. Prinia mystacea. Prinia mistacea, Rupp., “‘ Neue Wirbelth., Vog.,” p. ‘110 (1835- 1840: Gondar). Drymoica affinis, Bocage, “Om, Angola,” p. 552. Printa mystacea, Sharpe, “Cat. By Brit. Mus.” vol 7 pune: We +I; Sclater, “Fauna S.Africa, Birds,; vol. 2) Daeg Reichen., ‘‘ Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 3, p. 590. S78 Stadi Retauke:) hel: 10105: 171. @ ad. Mbala Country. May 7, 1905. FOlm nade Nean hetanice) samen 1OOo: Bill, black (in the @ pinkish at base); ivis and orbit, golden brown ; feet, pinkish-brown. «All the small Warblers are known to the natives as “ Niatiye.” Family PRIONOPID. 150. Prionops talacoma. Prionops talacoma, Smith, “Rep. Expl. Exped.,” app. 45 (1836: South Africa, 25° S. Lat.) ; Sharpe, “Cat. B. Brit. Mus.,” VOl.v/2, (Ds 9320) Bocage,) Orn Ansola,” p: 22 ue iomelley. LOS 1898, ps 379 (Zomba), p. 554) (viwanza) Veale. Sclater,)“Baunal S.Africa, Birds; vel) 2, pis tes Relchemm ““Vog. Afrikas,” vol. 2, p. 528. 60, @ acl lec, Dac, 20, lOO, Bill, black ; iris, olive-brown ; feet, orange. OF @ acl Peeks, aim, 2) Ces. Bill, black ; wis, bright yellow ; feet, orange-red. 66. 2 ad. 122) Ovad i Petauke Vianch27e moos: Manchester Memotrs, Vol. lz. (1907), No.1. 71 Bill, black ; iris, brownish-yellow ; feet, orange ; orbit, brighter yellow in female than male, but yellow «ris of male markedly brighter than that of female. [ee erase wetam to + leneth of head) “Anal III—=1lV 1112, with produced anterior lobe, originating below middle of dorsal ; longest ray ? to $ length of head. Pectoral to i? length of head, reaching or nearly reaching root of ventral. Caudal fin deeply forked, lower lobe longer than upper. Caudal peduncle 2 to 2} times as long as deep. i Sq. 42—45 es 3 between lateral line and ventral. Silvery, 7) brownish on the back; 8 or g blackish bars, or pairs of bars on each side; the membrane between some or all of the dorsal and anal rays black. Total length 60 to 110 millimetres. Distinguished from the closely allied B. zambesenszs, Peters, by the longer eye, the presence of 3 series of scales between the lateral line and the ventral, the larger size, and the coloration. “Eleven specimens from a mountain stream near Petauke, December 27, 1905. Native name, ‘ Mlenga.’ ” 4 BOULENGER, Collection of Fishes, Batrachians & Reptiles. SILURID. 11. Schilbe mystus, L. o1. Loangwa River. August, 1904. 12, Amphilius platychir, Gthr. Petauke. December 27, 1905. “In the Petauke stream amongst the mountains.’ b] CICHLIDZ. 13. Tilapia natalensis, M. Web. o6. Loangwa River. August, 1904. BATRACHIA. BUFONID&. 1. Bufo regularis, Reuss. 1072. Lukashashi River, N.E. Rhodesia. September Q, 19035. 1043. Petauke. February 21, 1905. 1050. Petauke. March 19, 1905. 1042. Petauke. February 20, 1905. 1045. Petauke. February 22, 1905. 1022. Mterize River, East Loangwa District. November I, 1904. 1067. Mterize River, East Loangwa District. July 27, 1905. 1018. Mterize River, East Loangwa District. October 28, 1904. 2. Bufo carens, A. Smith. 1039. Petauke, East Loangwa District, N-E. Rhodesia. January 26, 1905. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 12. 5 ENGYSTOMATIDA:. 3. Phrynomantis bifasciata, A Smith. 1083. Lukashashi River. November 22, 1905. 29) “ Native name, ‘ Kambwali. 4. Breviceps mossambicus, Peters. 1019. Mterize River.. October 30, 1904. 1084. Lukashashi River, N.E. Rhodesia, November RANID-. 5. Rana angolensis, Bocage. 1ogi. Petauke. December 27, 1905. 1097. Petauke. January 2, 1906. 6. Rana adspersa, Bibr. 1007. Loangwa River. August 4, 1904. 1085. Lukashashi River. November 23, 1905. “This large species seldom seen, owing to its bur- rowing habits. Chiefly confined to the large river valleys. Native name ‘Chisi.’ Eaten and considered a delicacy by some natives.” 7. Rappia cinctiventris, Cope. 1066. Mterize River. July 23, 1905. | “Native name, ‘Kalamatira.’ Apparently rather a scarce species in the country. “The general name for all frogs and toads amongst the natives is ‘Chuli” Vhey are much afraid of them.” 6 BouULENGER, Collection of Fishes, Batrachians & Reptiles. REPTILIA. CHELONIA. TESTUDINIDA. 1. Testudo pardalis, Bell. 1012. Loangwa River. August 12, 1904. 1040. Petauke, N.E. Rhodesia. February 1, 1905. 2. Cinixys belliana, Gray. 1089. Petauke. December 8, 1905 PELOMEDUSID&. 3. Sternothzrus sinuatus, A. Smith. 1088. Petauke, N.E. Rhodesia. December 7, 1905. 4. Sternotherus nigricans, Donnd. 1078. Msofu River. November 6, 1905. 1081. Near Chiwali’s, Alala Plateau, N.W. Rhodesia. November 18, 1905. The latter specimen may be referred to the typical form, the former to the var. castanea, Schw., as defined by Siebenrock (in Voeltzkow, “ Reis. Ostafr.” vol. 2, p. 34, 1906). a. (1081) Length of shell, 90 millim.; width, 74; depth, 39. “ Tympano-frontal” suture very short ; suture between the humeral shields shorter than the intergular. 6. (1078) Length of shell, 100 millim.; width, 70; depth, 42. “Tympano-frontal” suture longer; suture between the humeral shields as long as the intergular. According to Siebenrock, the true S. xzgricans would be confined to the East Coast of Madagascar. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 12. Wi “Tortoises. of various species are common in the country, especially during the rains. Native name, ‘Furo. Judging by the number of skeletons seen, large numbers must be eaten by the ground Hornbill (Gucorvus caffer).” ILA IR IDI IVAN. GECKONID&. 5. Lygodactylus capensis. A. Smith. G. Petauke. December, 1904—January, 1905. 6. Pachydactylus bibronii, A. Smith. F. Petauke, East Loangwa District, N.E. Rhodesia. December, 1904—January, 1905. 1051. Petauke, East Loanewa District, N.E. Rhodesia. March 28, 1905. AGAMID&. 7. Agama aculeata, L. 1014. Mezi River, Portuguese East Africa. Septem- ber 24, 1904. 8. Agama mossambica, Peters. 1017. Mterize River. October 26, 1904. 1027. Petauke. November 16, 1904. 1038. Petauke. January 20, 1905. 1070. Petauke. August 26, 1905. g. Agama atricollis, A. Smith. 1028. Petauke. November 17, 1904. 8 BOULENGER, Collection of Fishes, Batrachians & Reptiles. VARANIDZ. to. Varanus albigularis, Donnd. 1087. Bank of Loangwa. November 27, 1905. “Native name, ‘ Mfumba. ” 11. Varanus niloticus, L. HOZ5) wetauke, December 22,.1G04" 1058. Bank of Loangwa. June 8, 1905. “Native name, ‘ Mbulu.’” “The flesh of the Varanus is considered a great delicacy by the natives. Many small species of lizards are called ‘ Mtololiko’ by the natives.” LACERTID. 12. Ichnotropis squamulosa, Peters. C. Petauke. February and March, 1905. 1057. Bank of Loangwa. June 6, 1905. GERRHOSAURID. 13. Gerrhosaurus major, A. Dum. 1003. Near the Zambesi, Feira District. July 12, 1904. 14. Gerrhosaurus nigrolineatus, Hallow. 1032. Petauke. December 9, 1904. 1060. ? UNE Wil, ICOS. 1o61. Ulungu Mountain. June 15, 1965. 15. Gerrhosaurus flavigularis, Wiegm. 1064. Bank of Loangwa. July 11, 1905. SCINCIDA. 16. Mabuia quinqueteniata, L. 106@!, Petauke, December 27. 1905: A. Loangwa Valley. May and June, 1905. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. li. (1907), No. 12. 9 17. Mabuia varia, Peters. D. Petauke. 1905. D,. Petauke. December, 1904—January, 1905. 18. Mabuia striata, Peters. 1OOS sv netaukes December 20, 1005), KF. Feira District. June—August, 1904. 19. Ablepharus wahlbergii, A. Smith. B., B.i, Bit. Loangwa Valley. May and June, 1905. prin etaniey slO@s: IRJBUOP WOGILOS SA. CHAMALEONTIDZ. 20. Chamzleon dilepis, Leach. 1006. Zambesi River, near Feira. July 23, 1904. 1025. Petauke. November 11, 1904. OR UEDICA TYPHLOPID. 21. Typhlops mucruso, Peters. ey blet) Mezmikiver, lortustcse: Mast siricas Sept. 1904. 1030. Petauke. November 30, 1904. “Native name ‘ Chulisi.’” GLAUCONIID. 22. Glauconia longicauda, Peters. J. Ulungu Mountain. June 15, 1905. “ Native generic name for snakes ‘ Njoka.’” 23. Glauconia nigricans, Schleg. I. (5 individuals). Petauke. December, 1904—Jan- uary, 1905. Ii. Loangwa Valley. May 8—June 7, 1905. 10 BOULENGER, Collection of Fishes, Batrachians & Reptiles. BOID. 24. Python sebz, Gm. 1082. Lukashashi River. November 21, 1905. 1068. Petauke. August 7, 1905. “Common in many places, though large individuals scarce. No. 1082 bought from a native, and said to have been killed by a leopard. Native name ‘Nsarto.. Eaten by many natives.” COLUBRID&. 25. Tropidonotus olivaceus, Peters 1049. Petauke. March 16, 1905. 26. Helicops bicolor, Gthr. 1080. Alala Plateau, N.W. Rhodesia. November 16, 1905. This snake was known from Angola only. 27. Lycophidium capense, A. Smith. 1ol1. Loangwa Valley. Portuguese East Africa. August 22, 1904. 1079. Alala Plateau, N.W. Rhodesia. November 15, 1905. 28. Chlorophis neglectus, Peters. 1063. Bank of Loangwa. July 3, 1905. 1021. Mterize River. October 31, 1004. 1016. Mterize River. October 26, 1904. 1065. Mterize River. July 21, 1905. “No. 1063 was dug out of a termites’ nest in the height of the dry season, the ground being so hard that it could hardly have entered except during the previous rains.” 29. Philothamnus semivariegatus, A. Smith. 1031. Petauke. December 7, 1904. 1041. Petauke. February 3, 1905. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 12. Ul 30. Coronella semiornata, Peters. 1015. Bank of Loangwa, Feira District. October 14, 1904. 31. Prosymna ambigua, Bocage. 1054. Mbala Country, East Loangwa District. May 6, 1905. 32. Dasypeltis scabra, L. 1023. Mterize River. November 4, 1904. 33. Larbophis semiannulatus, A. Smith. 1033. Petauke. December 10, 1904. 1036. Petauke. December 22, 1904. 34. Leptodira hotamboeia, Laur. 1020. Mterize River. October 30, 1904. 1024. Mterize River. November 4, 1904. 1008. Bank of Loangwa, Feira District. August 8, IO Ov ig 35. Rhamphiophis oxyrhynchus, Reinh. 1037. Petauke. January 15, 1905. 36. Psammophis sibilans, L. 1004. Near the Zambesi, Feira District. July 13, NGOAL 1010. Loangwa Valley, Portuguese East Africa. August 22, 1904. 37- Thelotornis kirtlandii, Hallow. 1009. Loangwa Valley, Portuguese East Africa. August 20, 1904. 1005. Near the Zambesi, Feira District. July 15, 1904. 1069. Petauke. August 26, 1905. “A very common species. Native name ‘ Kalaku- kwiti, ” I2 BOULENGER, Collection of Fishes, Batrachians & Reptiles. 38. Dispholidus typus, A. Smith. 1047. Petauke. March 3, 1905. 1048. Petauke. March 5, 1905. 1096. Petauke. January I, 1906. 39. Aparallactus lunulatus, Peters. 1059. Ulungu Mountain, W. Loangwa. June 11, 1905. 40. Elapechis niger, Gthr. 1053. Mbala Country, East Loangwa District. May OF MGOs: 41. Naia nigricollis, Reinh. 1002. Near the Zambesi, Feira District. July 11, 1904. 1100. Petauke. January 6, 1900. VIPERIDA. 42. Causus resimus, Peters. 1044. Petauke. February 21, 1905. 1046? Petauke. February 25, 1905. 43. Bitis arietans, Merz. 1034. Petauke. December 16, 1904. 1055. Mbala Country. May 17, 1905. “Common, especially in the lower country. Native name ‘ Kapiri.’” 44. Bitis gabonica, D. & B. 1074 and one other. Ndola, near Kafue River, N.W. Rhodesia. October 11, 1905. >? Manchester Memoirs, Vol. tt. (1907), No. 13 XIII. On a confusion of two species (Lepidodendron Har- courtit, \Witham, and Z. /ickiz, sp. nov.) under Lepidodendron Harcourti, Witham, in Williamson’s XIX. Memoir; with a description of Z. Hickii, Sp. nOv. By D. M. S. WATSON. Recetved and read January 29th, 1907. INTRODUCTORY. In the XIXth and last of his fine series of Memoirs “On the Organisation of the Fossil Plants of the Coal Measures” (Williamson, ’93), Williamson described several specimens as Lepidodendron Harcourtzt, Witham, which were interesting as showing leaf bases and _halonial branching. My attention was drawn to this description by the examination of sections from Hough Hill in the Manchester Museum, and in my own collections. I was soon convinced of the identity of my sections with those figured by Williamson, and at the same time my suspicion that they were not L. Harcourizz, Witham, was strengthened by the receipt of a section of a true L. Harcourta (Witham) still retaining its leaf bases. Subsequent examination of the sections leads me to regard the species as distinct from all yet described, and I dedicate it to the memory of the late Thomas Hick, of Manchester and Halifax, as Lepidodendron Hicki2. ANALYSIS OF WILLIAMSON’S XIX. MEMOIR. Williamson starts his paper with an account of previous work on L. Harcourtiz, Witham. June 15th, 1907. 2 WATSON, 7wo Species of Lepidodendron Harcourtiz. He reviews the work of Witham (32), Lindley and Hutton (33), Brongniart (37), and Bertrand (91). Williamson states that he has only recently (93) obtained a section of the true L. Harcourtit, and that the specimens so far figured as L. Harcourt¢z belong to a new species, L. fuligznosum, Will. (Williamson, ’87). William- son states that he has now (’93) obtained specimens of Lepidodendron Harcourtiz, Witham, from Dulesgate still — retaining their leaves, which were lacking in Bertrand’s specimens. These specimens from Dulesgate are not L. Harcourizz, Witham, but ZL. Azckz2, sp. nov. In one section only ?in. in diameter the cells of the “medulla” are actively dividing. Williamson suggests that this involves an increase in diameter of the primary wood. This suggestion will be considered later. Williamson then states that he is unable to accept all Bertrand’s conclusions with regard to the corona of L. Hlarcourtiz, Witham, but acknowledges the value of his work. He then states that in “young specimens” the pro- jections from the margin of the wood are “scarcely visible,” but that the leaf traces are much more prominent objects. From this idea he draws the conclusion that the state of the corona is of inconsiderable taxonomic value. The importance of the conclusion as to the corona which Williamson drew from these specimens necessitates an investigation of the evidence of the identity of these branches with the true large stems of L. Harcourtiz ; this is undertaken below; for the present, it will suffice to say that Williamson’s chief evidence seems to have been the “double” leaf traces, which are now known to occur in Manchester Memoirs, Vol. li. (1907), No. 18. é, L. fuliginosum, Will.,and L. Wunschianum, Will. (Seward, 99), in addition to L. Harcourtzz. Williamson then describes the structure of the ‘Dysles. gate branches in some detail. He criticises Brongniart’s conclusion, derived from a study of the type of ZL. Harcourtzz, that the outer cortex was sharply separated from the middle cortex, and brings forward his smail branches to shew that the passage was gradual. The uniform character of the outer cortex of L. Flarcourtzz, Witham, thus implicitly denied by William- . son, seems to be one of the characteristics of the species. In fg. 3, Williamson represents the largest branch of L. Harcourtiz with which he was acquainted. It was derived from an unknown horizon at Airdrie, and so far as I can judge from an examination of a polished surface of the block, is really ZL. Harcourtzz. Williamson notes that its outer cortex differs from that of his small stems in being more uniform. Williamson then goes on to consider the leaves of L. Harcourtiz (2.e., the leaf bases of L. H7ckiz). : His description of these, though incomplete, is quite accurate, except that the leaf base is described upside down. This error was corrected by Williamson in a note to the Royal Society in 1894. Williamson then describes what he considers is a halonial branch of L. Harcourtiz. This branch is ZL. Hzckiz, and the correctness of the application of the term halonial in this case will be con- sidered below. In the above account of Williamson’s memoir, I have referred to the different tissues under the terms I shall use in the description of Z. Hzckzz. They compare with Williamson’s as follows :— 4 WATSON, Two Species of Lepidodendron Harcourti:. WILLIAMSON’S TERMS. TERMS USED IN THIS PAPER.* Inner cortex. Inner cortex ¥ y = Middle cortex. rea Widdleicortescanmeee oe =) Outer cortess Prosenchymatous zone ... =) Perderms INGenoic ee i ee = Ligule. DESCRIPTION OF L. Hickiz: The material investigated consists of many sections in the Cash and Wild collections of the Manchester Museum, the Williamson collection, and my own. I am indebted to Dr. W. E. Hoyle, the Director, for permission to have sections cut from two of the Wild blocks now in the Manchester Museum. (1) Pith, In a small branch,.135 mm. in diameter,t the primary wood of which is ‘6 mm. in diameter, the pith is composed of an irregular group of some 20 cells, which is cut into by projecting tracheids. These cells are thin-walled and present no trace of a meristematic condition. In a larger branch (A 171, fig. 2), which is 23°5 mm. in diameter, with a wood 2.9 mm. in diameter, the pith is a more regular mass of thin-walled parenchyma 1-3 mm. across. In this case nearly every cell towards the periphery of the pith is divided up by one or more walls. The shape and dimensions of the original cells do not, however, seem to have materially altered, although we know (Seward, :00) that in large stems, where the pith was probably hollow, these cells may grow out like hypae and form a felted complex. * These agree with those employed by Professors Bower and Weiss. + Stems are throughout measured over the leaf bases. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 18. 5 Williamson’s view that this division of the pith cells involved an increase in dimensions of the primary wood (Will., 83, ’95) seems to be physically impossible (Solms- Laubach, ’91, p. 229), and not to be in accord with the fact that the shape of the dividing cells is not materially altered. In longitudinal section the pith is seen to consist of elongated parenchymatous cells, arranged in vertical rows. These cells are separated by horizontal walls, but secondary oblique walls also occur. The average dimensions of a pith cell are "17 x08 x ‘08 mm. . An interesting character of the pith is the occasional occurrence in it of apparently isolated tracheids. This character suggests comparison with ZL. vasculare, Binney (=ZL. selaginoides, Sternb. ? Carr., Will.). (2) Wood. In a branch (A 144), with a “ Halonial” tubercle, the greatest diameter of which is 17 mm., the diameter of the wood is 2'25mm., so that the wood is small in amount (772g. 1, Plate /). In this specimen the average thickness of the ring of wood is just over I mm. The wood presents an unusually even contour, con- trasting strongly with that of ZL. Harcourt:i (Witham). It consists of a ring (3 or 4 tracheids broad) of tracheids, of fairly uniform diameter, about ‘13 mm., which, when followed outwards, rapidly gives place to a very narrow but continuous belt of much smaller tracheids, about 04 mm. in diameter. This belt is only 1 or 2 tracheids wide. The protoxylem points consist of small groups of tracheids, about 6 to a group, which seldom project more than 2 tracheids, 6 WATSON, Two Species of Lepidodendren Harcourtiz. These tracheids are of almost uniform diameter, about ‘O16 mm. Longitudinal sections shew that the great mass of the primary wood consists of scalariform tracheids. In these tracheids the vertical threads between the bars, once regarded as diagnostic of Z. Mundum, Will., are well seen. - . These threads have been seen in Aothrodendron = Lepidodendron Mundum (Will.), L. Wunschianum, Will, L. vasculare, Binney, L. brevzfolium, Will.,* L. squamosum, Gopp., and Stzgmaria ficoides (Seward, :00, p. 910).. Their occurrence in L. Azckzz is noted by Williamson, who states that they are not seen in older branches of ZL. Harcourt ; they do, however, occur in a section (A 193 of my own collection) of L. Harcourtz from Shore roof. The occurrence of these threads thus seems to bea constant character in the Lepidodendracez, and the explanation given by Solms-Laubach (92, p. 76) and Seward (99) that they are the remnants of the pit-closing membrane seems to be the true one. (3) Phloém. The soft tissues of the stele external to the wood are in no case well preserved (best in the series A 169, 170, 171 in my own collection).t (Fzg. 2, Plate /.) Immediately surrounding the wood is a belt of small celled parenchyma about 5 cells or ‘08 mm. broad (ze. 7, Plate II.) *T use the name Z. drevzfolum of Williamson for the Lepzdodendron of Burntisland, because the occurrence of typical Lefzdoph/ozos leaf bases in the material suggests that the identification with Z. ve/thecmaeanum may not be always true. + This illustrates an interesting point in connection with preservation. The preservation of histological details is bad in this series, which shows more of the phloém and middle cortex than any other, whereas the section A 144 with fine histological detail, has lost all its soft tissues. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 18. a This zone of tissue is that in which the cambium would arise, and always occurs in the Lepidodendracez. Succeeding this tissue comes an interrupted belt ‘16mm. wide, composed of cells of wide lumen (‘05 mm.), each of which is, in well preserved parts, surrounded by a group of smaller cells. (/zg. 10, Plate [/1.) This is the tissue called by Professor Seward the “secretory zone” (Seward, :00, :or, :02, :06), and by Professor Weiss “ phloém” (Weiss, :o1, :02', :02’, etc.) The best preserved parts correspond with the condi- tion described by Professor Weiss (Weiss, :or) in ZL. fuliginosum, Will., and L. vasculare, Binney, and not with that described by Professor Seward. This tissue (which I shall call Phloém, following Professor Weiss), is surrounded by an ill-preserved belt, which is presumably pericycle. In certain places a single layer of cells, strongly reminiscent of an endodermis, pursues a sinuous course in this ill-preserved layer. Inner cortex. The ill-preserved layer referred to above as being in part pericycle also probably represents the inner cortex. The more external portions of it consist of thin- walled cells which tend to be tangentially elongated. This zone is succeeded by the middle cortex. (4) Lhe middle cortex. This is composed of large parenchymatous cells which appear to have formed a spongy mass with large air spaces. These cells often shew a tendency (Fig. 2, Plate /) towards that elongation and division which leads to the extraordinary middle cortex of L. fuliginosum, Will., (Seward, :o1', etc.), and Xenophyton radiculosum, Hick 8 WATSON, Two Species of Lepidodendron Harcourtit. (Hick, ’92), (Weiss, :02). This meristemic condition is most marked at the inner edge of the middle cortex, and has given rise to a radially arranged tissue of an irregular description (/zg. 2, Plate J). This zone also occurs in L. vasculare, Binney, where it is described by Hovelacque as “La zone rayonneée de l’écorce interne” (Hovelacque,’92). This meristemic middle cortex is very characteristic of the Lepidodendracez, and has been described in many species. In L. Aizckiz this belt is 4 mm. wide in a stem 23 mm. in diameter. The condition of preservation does not warrant further remarks. (5) Outer cortex In the series A 169, 170, and 171 (the only sections in which the middle cortex is preserved), there is a sudden change from the large-celled loose tissue of the middle cortex to a firmer tissue, composed of smaller, thicker- walled, and somewhat tangentially elongate cells. The cells of the inner part of the outer cortex are slightly elongated vertically, as seen in radial sections, and in some sections seem to have extremely thin walls. Creme ate 1) This fact is noted by Williamson, and must have some significance. I was at first inclined to regard it as due to an accident of preservation, but as it occurs only in those sections in which histological details are good, I now think that it may be natural. These cells are seen in transverse section to pass imperceptibly into others of similar shape and dimensions, which have thick walls. These cells are really slightly longer than the thin- walled cells, but otherwise do not differ from them. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 18. 9 In stems with no secondary cortex, this tissue is suc- ceeded by the leaf bases, which are not markedly separated from it. (6) Secondary cortex. The phellogen arises in the thick walled zone by the divisicn of a belt of cells into 3 by tangential walls. (Fig. 7, Plate [II.) The central cell becomes the meristem, and cuts off new cells on both sides. The phellogen is very erratic in its development, having begun on certain areas of the stem before others ; thus in the stem A 144, there is at one place a periderm more than 20 cells thick, and in other places the phellogen is not yet formed. Occasionally two cells in the same radius will divide, as if to produce a phellogen. In these cases it is possible that the inner really represents the beginning of one of the secretory passages known in L. Wunschianum (Seward, 00), L. Juliginosum (Seward, :o1), ZL. Harcourt (Bertrand, 91), L. vasculare (Weiss, :01), Xenophyton radiculosum Hick (Weiss, :02), and Lothrodendron mundum. (Sections A 68, A128. D. Watson collection.) I have been unable to find any definite secretory passages in L. Hfzckiz, but some places where the outer cortex has slightly broken down may represent them. Where the periderm reaches any fair thickness it is usually very badly preserved, and it is impossible to determine the position of the phellogen, as the tissue appears thick-walled throughout. In radial section the cells of the periderm are arranged vertically above one another and are separated by horizontal walls. (7) Leaf trace. The connection of the leaf traces with the protoxylem 10 WATSON, Two Species of Lepidodendron Harcourtzz. strands and the course of the latter have not been fully made out, owing partly to the small projection of the protoxylem, and partly to the small number of really good transverse sections. It seems, however, that the whole protoxylem mass. bent out and became the leaf trace, which is here com- posed of short spiral tracheids. (/7zg. 3, Plate 1.) Certain places in the transverse sections suggest that the protoxylem strands anastonosed occasionally. The leaf trace immediately after leaving the wood of the axis is a small bundle of about a dozen tracheids, the smallest being central in position. The leaf trace is thus apparently mesarch at this point. (fzg. 6, Plate I//.) Further out beyond the phloém zone the xylem of the trace has altered in form, being now tangentially elongated, and consisting of tracheids of almost uniform Giametern(7e2 Ou are ue) No well preserved leaf trace in mid cortex has been met with. In the outer cortex the wood of the leaf trace consists of a small circular, and apparently mesarch group of tracheids, which is surrounded by a uniform soft-celled tissue, part of which is probably phloém. To the outer side of the phloém is the group of dark cells which misled Williamson. (/7¢. 8, Plate [/1.) This group of dark cells is not well enough preserved in the longitudinal sections to be worth describing. Outside this group of dark elements and separated from it by a layer of small cells is the parichnos. (/7zg. 8, Plate IIL.) The xylem of the leaf trace begins to be augmented by transfusion tracheids even before it passes into the periderm, and this group of accessory tracheids is of far greater dimensions than the whole bundle. (/zg. 4, Plate 17.) Manchester Memotrs, Vol. le. (1907), No. 1s. II (8) The leaf base. The leaf scar is situated at the apex of a cushion. This cushion has the form of a truncated rhombic pyramid about 2 mm.—3 mm. vertically, 3 mm. horizon- tally, and projecting about I mm. above the surface of the stem. The leaf scar is only slightly less wide than the base of the cushion, but is considerably shorter. The vascular bundle enters the leaf base almost horizontally, and in the lowest + of its height, it passes straight to the leaf scar. The bundle is a collateral one, the xylem being very small in amount, but reinforced by the transfusion tissue. This transfusion tissue, composed of short tracheids, either scalariform or reticulate, forms a sheath round the bundle, only interrupted where the dark secretory elements below the phloém occur. The ligular pit is very long and narrow, the ligule being inserted considerably before the leaf bases become separated from one another. (/7zg. 4, Plate IT.) The ligular pit opens just above the leaf scar on the upper surface of the cushion. The ligule is not well preserved, but seems to have been of the ordinary lepidodendroid type, consisting of uniform small-celled parenchyma. The base of the ligule received an abundant supply of transfusion tracheids, which bridge over the short distance between theligule andthevascular bundle. (/2g.5, Plate //.) The parichnos enters the tissue external to the secondary cortex as a single strand of parenchyma, immediately below the vascular bundle. (/zgs. 8, Plate Ts, andsa, Plate [Lf At about the level at which the leaf bases become free this strand divides into two, which rise until they cut the leaf scar on each side of the vascular print, but at a lower level. 12 WATSON, 7wo Species of Lepidodendron Harcourtiz. The parichnos communicates with the surface before reaching the leaf scar by the two lateral scars. There are two shallow depressions, on the lower surface of the cushion, which pass in laterally until they are underneath the parichnos strands. The parichnos broadens out to reach these pits, and this broadening is of rather finer parenchyma than the normal parichnos, and also seems to have fewer air Spaces, MChiZeus, -lare i) The normal structure of the parichnos is that it isa strand of parenchyma, the cells of which are rather small, iso-diametric, and more or less spherical, so as to leave considerable intercellular spaces. This description applies to the majority of the sections, but in the series in the Williamson collection, No. 380 B—L, in several places this pit is seen to be filled up with a typically aérenchymatous tissue. (See /7zg. 11, Plate [/T.) This tissue is composed of star-shaped cells which leave very marked air spaces, and agree exactly with those described by Professor Weiss (:07) in some isolated sections of Lepzdodendron. In this last case, however, the pit is empty, and the aérenchymatous tissue opens into it, being separated from its cavity by an epidermis. This difference suggests that the lateral scars seen in impressions are really of two types, one in which they represent actual pits, during the life of the plants, and the other in which there are really no pits but a patch of spongy and easily decaying tissue. The pit in Z. vasculare, described by Hovelacque (92), seems to differ from those in Professor Weiss’s sections, in that it has no obvious connection with the parichnos, which is separated from it by many apparently rather thick-walled cells. Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 18. 13 A slight amount of periderm formation seems to have taken place under the epidermis in some sections of leaf cushions of ZL. Hzckzz. A definite absiccession layer does not seem to have been formed at the base of the leaves. One fact in connection with the leaf bases is interest- ing, and at first rather confusing to anyone working out their anatomy, which is that deep cracks developed, separating the leaf cushions from one another, and thereby giving an exaggerated idea of their projection. All references to the level at which the leaf bases separate refer to the real original level of separation, and not to the bottom of this crack. Branching of L. Aickitz. Two types of branching are represented in L. Hzckzz, normal equal dichotomy, and an unequal dichotomy, called by Williamson “ Halonial Branching.” The actual bifurcation in a case of equal dichotomy has only been seen in a block, but it was no doubt quite normal. An interesting point is that in one case the dichoto- mous branch is “ Halonial,’ the “ Halonial” branching being in a plane at right angles to that of the main branch. The “ Halonial” branches are arranged in two vertical rows, any two branches on the same side being separated by a considerable vertical interval, sometimes about 50mm. The branches of opposite sides are often nearly opposite one another. Branching of stele. The branching of the stele is quite of the usual Halonial type (Williamson, ’72, ’81, ’83, 93), (Weiss, :02), 14 WATSON, Two Species of Lepidodendron Harcourtzz. a small portion of the xylem ring separating off and passing out, carrying with it a corresponding piece of phloém. (/zgs. 1—2, Plate I.) In most cases the continuity of the xylem ring of the main stem is not broken, only some of the more external tracheids going to form the branch bundle. An interesting point is that the parenchyma occupy- ing the gap thus left in the main axis often contains short tracheids, the barred cells of Williamson. The branch bundle is from the first surrounded by its own series of leaf traces. When the branch bundle reaches the outer cortex it is radially symmetrical and does not contain a pith. After the branch has become free it gains a pith of very small dimensions and has all the structure of a larger branch. These Halonial branches usually retain a compara- tively well preserved middle cortex of the ordinary type. They are covered with leaf bases of large size, and present no special characters. Application of the term Halonzal to these branches. The generic term Halonza was founded by Lindley and Hutton in 1833. Their description of the generic characteristics is somewhat indefinite, but they state that the tubercles are “at intervals of 34 in. every way,” thus suggesting that the quincuncial arrangement of the tubercles is an essential character of Halonza. Since this time many authors have referred to Hatlonza, and established the fact that it is the fruit-bearing branch of a Lepidodendroid tree. Further, in all cases where the leaf scars are well preserved, they belong to Lepidophloios. (Kidston, ’93, very full account of litera- ture.) Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 138. 15 Williamson (93), Scott (:00), and Weiss (:02) regard the projection of the tubercles above the general level of the cortex as the essential point distinguishing /alonza from Ulodendron. Kidston, on the other hand, regards the quincuncial arrangement of the branch scars as of primary importance, and the amount of their projection or the reverse of no value. He states that Ulodendroid branches only occur in Lepidodendron, Bothrodendron, and Szgzllarza, not in Leprdophtoios (Kid., :05). Into the correctness of this conclusion I do not wish to enter here, but Wild’s UJlodendron, described in Williamson’s XIX. Memoir (Will. 93), certainly bears typical Lepidophloios leaf bases, and has its tubercles in two rows. Following Kidston’s nomenclature, the “ Halonial ” branches of ZL. Hzckzz should be called Ulodendroid, but as I do not believe that they were fructigerous, I prefer not to call them either. They agree with the specimen described by Carruthers (73) as “ Halonza gracilis, L. & H.” Kidston (93) states that this specimen is a branch of L. ophzurus, Brongt. It is noticeable that in Z. A/zckzz the “ Halonial” branches do not seem to have been deciduous, as quite long pieces are often found in connection with the stem. Is L. Hickit a Lepidodendron or a Lepidophloios ? Considerable confusion seems to exist at present as to the distinguishing features of Lepzdodendron and Lepido- phlowos. Some paleobotanists (Scott, :00) seem to regard the horizontal breadth of the leaf base being greater than its height as a distinguishing feature. Others (Weiss, :02) make the downward direction of the leaf bases a charac- teristic feature. .16 WATSON, Two Species of Lepidodendron Harcourtiz. Neither of these characters will suffice to distinguish all specimens of Lepzdophlozos. Thus L. Hickzt has transversely elongated leaf bases, but is, as will be shown, a Lepidodendron, and specimens of Lepzdophloios acerosus (L. & H.) in the Williamson collection have leaf bases twice as high as wide. Lepidophtlotos acerosus (L. & H.) has never been seen with downwardly directed leaf bases, and Lepzdophlotos Scoticus, Kidston, has its leaf bases at first directed upward, and subsequently downward. In the Generic characters of Lepzdophloios given by Mr. Kidston (93), there is one which will at once dis- tinguish it from Lepzdodendron, and which can be easily determined from sections. This character is that the leaf cushions imbricate. A simple rule applicable to sections and founded on this character is the following :— “Tf anormal radius of the stem can be drawn so as to cut more than one leaf cushion, the specimen is a Lepz- adophtozos.” This rule must be applied with care, and it must be remembered that transverse sections are often 20° out, and that longitudinal sections median for the axis are not necessarily radial in the leaf bases. Applying the rule just given to L. Hzckzz, we find that it is not a Lepzdophloios, and reconstruction of the leaf bases, by picking a series of sections from the transverse, tangential, and radial sections gives one a leaf base as in the diagram on the next page. This leaf base agrees with certain specimens of Lepidodendron obovatum. Comparison of other Lepidedendracee with L. Harcourtiz. Sections in my collection shew that the true Z. Har- Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 13. Ly courtzz, Witham, is from the form of its leaf base a Lepidophloios, so that in this character it is quite distinct from L. Hecke. The very slightly projecting protoxylem points of L. Hickiz separate it widely from ZL. Harcourtzz, and this separation is also supported by the distinct character of their outer cortices, as has been pointed out above. ea fs Tangential sections of leaf bases of Z. Wzckzz, and a restored view of the leaf base. fe=ligule. far=parichnos. vé=vascular bundle. /=lateral ‘‘pits.” The only characters they have in common seem to be the “double” leaf trace, the usual absence of the middle cortex, and the absence of secondary wood. It should be pointed out that the only evidence as to the leaf bases and Halonial branching of Z. Har- courtzz, Witham, rests on the mistaken identification with L. Hickiz, sp. nov. The most interesting comparison is that with L. vas- culare. The leaf bases of ZL. vasculare show it to be a 18 WATSON, Two Species of Lepidodendron Harcourtiz. Lepidodendron, and Carruthers (’69) identified it with L. selaginoides, Brong. The corona of L. HzckzZ is very similar to that of L. vasculare, both being characterised by extreme blunt- ness of the protoxylem points. The occasional occurrence of isolated tracheids in the pith of ZL. Azckzz is another point of similarity with Z. vasculare, Binney. The form of the leaf traces, starting as a cylindrical mesarch bundle and then broadening tangentially into a plate of tracheids, after passing through the phloém, ts the same in both species. It is thus seen that there are considerable resemblances between the two species, which are, however, quite dis- tinct, as shown by their outer cortices and the occurrence of the dark secretory elements in the phloém of L. Azckzz. The probable identification of ZL. Hzckiz with L. obo- vatum renders the comparison of L. AH/zckzz with the specimen of ZL. odovatum described by Dr. Scott (Scott, :06) of some interest. The two plants seem to differ in nearly all characters which can be compared, notably in those of the protoxy- lem points, which in L. oJovatum of Dr. Scott are almost as prominent as in L. Harcouriit. It is thus probable that the “species” JL. obovatum includes at least two widely different species. It should, however, be pointed out that this does not affect any value the Lepidodendrons may have as zonal fossils. From all other species the new species is separated by the form of the corona and the character of the outer cortex taken in conjunction. RESUME. Williamson’s XIX. Memoir is examined, and it is found that the specimens he described as shewing leaves Manchester Memoirs, Vol. tt. (1907), No. 18. 19 and Halonial tubercles in L. Harcourtz really belong to another species L. Hzckzz sp. nov. L. Hickit is described, and shewn to have the ordinary Lepidodendroid type of internal structure. It is shewn to be a Lepidodendron, and compared with the specimen of Lepzdodendron ophiurus described by Carruthers as Halonza gracilis. Its “Halonial” branches are not considered as fructigerous, and the accuracy of the application of the term Halonial is challenged. The new species is contrasted with L. Harcourtzz, Witham, and compared with ZL. vasculare, Binney. I have to express my thanks to Professors Seward and Weiss for encouragement and advice, to Mr. Kidston for information on several subjects, to Miss K. H. Coward for making drawings for some of the illustrations, and to Dr. A. S. Woodward for many kindnesses at the Natural History Museum. Lepidodendron Hickit is to be regarded as founded on the following sections. O35) and) ©7387, Cash collection; Ki210y Ik) 37.3" R 374, R 375, Wild collection, in the Manchester Museum. CW 1596, A—G and 380, B—L, in the Williamson collection. PUIAA A 1GO A170, AO l71, 2s 20l, Ab ink my own collection. 20 WATSON, Two Species of Lepidodendron Harcourizz. BIBLIOGRAPHY. BERTRAND, C. (91). ‘‘Remarkes sur le Lepidodendron Har- courtit de Witham.” TZravaux et Mémoires des Facultés de Lille, vol. 2, Mémoire no. 6, 1801. BRONGNIART, A. (737). “Histoire des Vegétaux Fossiles,” vol. 2. Paris, 1837. CarRuTHERS, W. (69). On the Structure of the Stems of the Arborescent Lycopodiaceze of the Coal Measures.” Month. Micr. Journ., vol. 2, pp. 177 and 225, 1860. Hick, T. (92). ‘‘On anew Fossil Plant from the Lower Coal Measures.” /ourn. Linn. Soc. London, (Bot.), vol. 29, no. 198, 1892. HoveEtacguE, M. (92). ‘Recherches sur le Lepidodendron selaginoides, Sterb.” Mém. Soc. Linn. Normandie, vol. 17, [Oh By wees Kinston, R. (’86). ‘‘ Catalogue of the Paleozoic Plants in the Department of Geology and Palzontology British Museum.” London, 1886. —-— (93). ‘On Lefizdophloios, and on the British Species of the Genus.” Zvans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. 37, part 3, ip. 529, 1893. —— (:05). ‘On the Internal Structure of Szgz//aria elegans 99) of Brongniart’s ‘ Histoire des végétaux fossiles.’” Z7ans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. 41, part 3, no. 23, p. 533, 1905. LINDLEY, J., and W. Hutton (’33). ‘The Fossil Flora of Great Britain,” vol. 2. London, 1833—1835. Sewarp, A. C., and A. W. Hitt [Sewarp (:00)|. ‘On the Structure and Affinities of a Lepidodendroid Stem from the Calciferous Sandstone of Dalmeny, Scotland, possibly identical with Lepzdophlotos Harcourtit (Witham).” Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. 39, part 4, no. 34, Pp. 907, 1900. Manchester Memotrs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 18. 2 SEWARD A. C. (:01). ‘‘ Notes on the Binney collection of Coal Measure plants, Lepzdophlotos.” Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc., vol. Io, part 3, py 137, 190. — (:02). ‘On the so-called phloem of Lepidodendron.” New Phytologist, vol. 1, p. 38, 1902. ——(:06). ‘The Anatomy of Lepzdodendron Aculeatum, Sternb.” Ann. Bot, vol. 20, p. 371, 1906. Scott, D. H.(:00). “Studies in Fossil Botany.” London, 1900. —— (06). “The Structure of Lepidodendron obovatum, Sternb.” Ann. Bot., vol. 20, p. 317, 1906. Sotms LauBaAcHu, GRaF ZU (91). ‘Fossil Botany.” Oxford, 1891. —— (’92). “Ueber die in den Kalksteinen des Kulm von Glatzisch-Falkenberg in Schlesien erhaltenen structur- bietenden Pflanzenreste.” of. Zez¢., vol. 50, p. 49, 1892. Witiiamson, W. C. “On the Organisation of the Fossil Plants of the Coal Measures.” — (72). Pest UL YA, MZtAS VOI, WOH, 1s UO, UDWH. —— (81). Part XI. Phil. Trans., vol. 172, part 2, p. 283, 1881. —— (83). Part XII. Pxzl. Trans., vol. 174, part 2, p. 459, 1883. —— (87). “Note on Lepidodendron Harcourtit and L. fult- ginosum, Will.” Proc. Roy. Soc., vol. 42, p. 6, 1887. —— (93). ‘‘On the Organisation of the Fossil Plants of the Coal Measures.” Part XIX., Pri. Trans., vol. 184 B, Je U5 WSORe —— (94). ‘Correction of an Error of Observation in Part XIX. of the Author’s Memoirs on the Organisation of the Fossil Plants of the Coal Measures.” Proc. Roy. Soc., vol. 55, p. 422, 1894. —— (95). “On the light thrown upon the question of the Growth and Development of the Carboniferous Arbores- cent Lepidodendra by a study of the details of their Organisation.” Manchester Memoirs (4), vol. 9, p. 31, 1895. 22 WATSON, Two Speczes of Lepidodendron Harcourtit. Weiss, F. E. (:o1). “On the Phloém of LZepidophioios and Lepidodendron.” Manchester Memoirs, vol. 45, no. 7, Igot. ' —— (:02'). “On Xenophyton radiculosum (Hick), and on a Stigmarian Rootlet probably related to Lepidophlotos fult- ginosus (Williamson).” Manchester Memoirs, vol. 46, no. 9g, 1902. —— (:02’). ‘fA Biseriate Halonial Branch of Lefzdophloios Suliginosus.” Trans. Linn. Soc. London (Bot.), (2), vol. 6, (Ds Alyy MOORS —— (:07). ‘‘On the Parichnos ot the Lepidodendracez.” Manchester Memoirs, vol. 51, no. 8, 1907. Wituam, H. (’32). “On Lepidodendron Harcourtii.” Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Newcastle-upon-Tyne, 1832. 24 WATSON, Two Species of Leprdodendron Harcourtzi. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES: Figs. 1—5. Microphotographs by the author. fFigs.6—g and 11. Camera lucida drawings by Miss. K. H. Coward, B.Sc. Fig. to. Camera lucida drawing by the author. = Plate Tf. Fig. 1. Transverse section of a small stem of Z. /ickit x (11). The pith with dividing walls in the cells is well shewn. It is surrounded by the ring of wood, the even contour of which is very characteristic of the species. Numerous leaf traces are seen in the ill-preserved belt of parenchyma surrounding the wood. In the south of the illustration is seen a stelar branch supplying a ‘“‘ Halonial” tubercle. A144. D. Watson collection. Fig. 2. Transverse section of a rather larger branch of Z. Wickit > (i). In the S. and S.E. the ‘‘ zone rayonnée” of the middle cortex is well seen. The piece of xylem ring on the E. is becoming detached to form a branch to a Halonial tubercle. A170. DD. Watson collection. Fig. 3. Longitudinal section of external portion of the wood of a branch of Z. A/ickiz, shewing origin of a leaf trace. x (190). The bottom of the figure is occupied by the large scalariform tracheids of the metaxylem. The leaf trace passes out to the N.E. corner of the figure. A201 F. DD. Watson collection. » Te ent, Manchester Memotrs, Vol. LI. (Wo. 13). aad MAN He 26 WATSON, Tio Species of Lepidodendron Harcourtés. Plate II. Fig. 4. Almost radial section of a leaf base of Z. Wickit x (30). The centre of the stem lies to the W. The leaf trace is seen in the outer cortex, with the parichnos below it. The parichnos is also seen emerging to the leaf scar on the East. The ligular pit is seen in longitudinal section and the dark tissue at its base and extending to W. over the leaf trace is transfusion tissue of short tracheids. A 201 C. D. Watson collection. fig. 5. Oblique tangential section of an isolated leaf base, almost certainly belonging to LZ. Aickit x (30). The patch of tissue around which transfusion tracheids are concentrated is the base of the ligule. The two large patches of tissue, composed of stellate cells, are the two “pits” filled with aerenchymatous tissue in connection with the parichnos. The parichnos itself is seen just within the west patch. A 201. D. Watson collection. Prate 1. (Wo. 13). lel Vo Memotrs, Manchester sie cea iat 28 WATSON, Two Species of Lepidodendron Harcourtzt. Plate ITT. = fig. 6. Portion of transverse section of Z. Wickit represented in fig. 1, shewing two leaf traces and the protoxylem points. x72): A144. D. Watson collection. fig. 7. Portion of the transverse section represented in Avg. 1, shewing the beginning of periderm formation in the outer COLLexs a 72): A144, D. Watson collection. fig. 8. Portion of transverse section represented in fig. 1, shewing a leaf trace, with xylem, phloém, and the dark patch of secretory tissue, and the parichnos (shaded) to the outside of it. x (61). A144. D. Watson collection, fig.9. Portion of a transverse section of a branch of LZ. Aickiz, shewing the exterior of the wood, the badly preserved soft tissue surrounding it, and a leaf trace in the inner Cortex (7/2)): A 171.~ D. Watson collection. fug. to. A pair of sieve tubes with their companion cells, from the phloém of Z. Hickit. x (324). A170. D. Watson collection. Fig. 11. Patch of Aérenchyma filling pit in a leaf base, still in connection with a stem of Z. H/ichiz. - CN. 360 Williamson collection. All the figured sections are from the ‘‘ Higher Early Banks Mine,” at Hough Hill, near Stalybridge, in Cheshire, and are from ‘coal balls,” not from roof nodules. Plate If. 3). e e Manchester Memoirs, Vol. LI. (No. 1 S66 SOG OUe FIO SSA TO SOBs. ry LA TY SO TY @ seseee o Ps LI oS Sansa ‘3 Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 14. XIV. On the Compression of Gases by means of Hydraulic Apparatus. By je ES PEeTAvVen. NUSC.vEER.S: Received May 3rd, 1907. Read May 8th, 1907. I. On the Compression of Small Quantities of Pure Gas. In the course of experimental work it is occasionally desirable to compress small quantities of very pure gases. For this purpose the ordinary gas compressor is unsatis- factory. Not only is it difficult to obtain a compressor which will deal with less than a thousand litres at a time, but there always is a serious risk of contamination by a slight inleak of air, by admixture with the previous contents of the pipes and cylinders, and by the vapours given off by the heated leathers and stuffing boxes. A brief description of an apparatus for compressing a few litres of a pure or rare gas to a high pressure may there- fore be of some interest. The general scheme will be easily understood by reference to /ze. I. “A” is a glass bell jar of one or two litres capacity which is connected to the generating apparatus through the stopcock a, and to the compressing plant through the valve 6. The liquid used in this gasometer is glycerine, which has a low absorbing power for most gases. The compression cylinder & is of steel of about half a litre capacity. Its upper end is connected, as men- tioned above, to the bell of the gasometer and also to the gauge G and storage cylinder D, the latter outlet being closed by the valve e. The lower extremity of this cylinder communicates on the one side with the hydraulic June 15th, 1907. 2 PETAVEL, Compression of Gases by Hydraulic Apparatus. pump /, on the other with the gasometer through the valve f As compared with the ordinary compression plant,* this apparatus has the advantage of simplicity, complete safety, and relatively low cost. For the gasometer an inverted glass bell jar will be found convenient. It is connected to the compression cylinder and pump by rubber tubes. No motive power is required, and almost any form of hand-worked hydraulic pump can be used. The compression cylinder and storage cylinders are of weldless mild steel + or 4 inch thick according to the working pressure required, and can be obtained from the manufacturers who supply the commercial gas cylinders. The high-pressure valves and cone couplings are of the type previously described.f For connecting the various parts of the apparatus, flexible copper tubing of about gin. external diameter and {,in. bore is employed. With regard to the method of operating, a few words will suffice. The gas coming slowly from the generating apparatus passes through such purifiers as may be neces- sary, and accumulates in the gasometer. From time to time it is compressed into the storage cylinder in the following way : The valves 6 and fare first opened, allowing the gas to displace the glycerine contained in the compressing cylinder, they are then closed again and the valve e opened. The pump is now worked, forcing in the glycerine and compressing the gas. When the gauge indicates a pressure equal to that of the storage cylinder, the valve g is opened and the gas allowed to enter. To * See R. S. Hutton and J. E. Petavel. /ourn. Soc. Chem. Ind., 1904, vol. 23, pp. 87—93. + J. E. Petavel, Phz/. Zrans., vol. 205, pp. 357—398. Munchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 14. 3 avoid forcing over any liquid, the level reached by the glycerine in the gasometer when the cylinder & is full has been previously noted. The quantity of gas remaining in the compression cylinder can also be estimated by temporarily closing the valve g and noting the difference of pressure produced by a single stroke of the pump. The system described above is convenient for dealing with gases which can only be generated at a slow rate— say, ten litres or less per hour—and pressures of 3,000 lbs. per square inch can easily be obtained with an ordinary hand pump. II. Compression of Gases to very High Pressures. The maximum pressure for which the ordinary type of two or three-stage gas-compressor can be successfully built is about three or four thousand lbs. per square inch. Above this limit, difficulties connected with the reduction of the clearance spaces, the efficient packing of the glands, pistons, etc., and the satisfactory cooling of the working parts become serious and are not easily overcome. These troubles can be obviated by the use of hydraulic compression which has been successfully used by the author to compress gases up to ten or twelve thousand pounds per square inch. In principle the system differs but little from the one referred to above, but the apparatus is, of course, of considerably greater strength. When working at these high pressures, it is con- venient to eliminate the generating plant and gas- ometer, and to fill the receiver B with gas previously compressed and stored. The quantity of gas dealt with at each operation may thus be increased a hundredfold or more, and the amount of labour involved correspondingly reduced. 4 PETAVEL, Compression of Gases by Hydraulic Apparatus Where exceptional purity is of no great importance, the compressed gas for this purpose may be obtained commercially. For all ordinary work a hand pump will be found sufficient, and, the contents of the receiver being com- pressed at a slow and uniform rate, no ae provision is necessary for cooling the gas. With regard to the question of safety, it is hardly necessary to point out the importance of securing the best materials and workmanship. Before use the apparatus should be carefully inspected and also tested hydraulically to double the working pressure. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. tt. (1907), No. 15. THE WILDE LECTURE. XV. The Structure of Metals. Bie Ifo ALS LENWING, WilAG, IEJCID), mks. Director of Naval Education to the Admzralty. Delivered February 18th, 1907. I ought to apologise for bringing forward matter which cannot possibly be new to an audience acquainted with recent developments in various branches of science ; but at least some part of the lecture may be unfamiliar, and in order properly to lead up to that I shall endeavour to state certain elementary facts about the crystalline structure of metals, although these are no doubt well known already by many of those now present. Without such a statement it would be difficult to show the relation between the facts as we have them and the comparatively novel theory which I am going to submit for your consideration. There is this further excuse, that what I have to say deals with matter in which I have had some little personal share in the way of original investigation, dating now from a good many years back. At the outset, then, it is important you should. realise that any metal, even the simplest and purest, is not by any means a single homogeneous thing, but is a great aggre- gate of distinct pieces which we call grains or granules. Those of you who are familiar with the Alps may know that if you examine the structure of a glacier, you find, taking any great block of ice such as may fall from a serac, that that block, when the sun plays upon it, gradually becomes resolved into pieces somewhere about June 20th, 1907. 2 EWING, The Structure of Metals. the size of a walnut or an egg. These pieces are separate crystals of water, and the whole thing is a grand aggregate of such separate granules, each granule a crystal in itself. Precisely the same thing is true of any piece of metal. It is true not only of cast metal, where one might readily expect it to be true, but it is true also of metal that has been forged or rolled, and what is more remarkable still, it is true even of a piece of iron which has been forged or rolled in the cold state. It is true also of so very different a type of metal as a sheet of lead such as is used for the covering of a roof. A sheet of lead is crushed enormously in the process of rolling ; nevertheless if you take a piece from a roof and examine it, you find that it has the same general character. It is built up of a great aggregate of crystalline granules. To make this point clear I shall show slides which will allow us to trace some of the evidence by which this general deduction has been arrived at. When we polish and etch the surface of a piece of metal, and then examine it under the microscope, we are able to detect the existence of the various grains or granules of which the whole is composed. We can distinguish in the surface a difference of texture between one grain and another, and we can also distinguish clearly the boundaries between neigh- bouring grains. We may sometimes detect the difference between the grains in a metal which has not been polished or etched at all, as, for instance, when a smooth surface is formed by casting metal against a sheet of glass, but it is generally more apparent after the surface has been etched by the action of a dilute acid or some other solvent. An example is shown in Fzg. 1, Plate J, which is a photograph of the surface of a piece of wrought iro., etched by dilute nitric acid, and viewed with a magnifica- Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 15. 3 tion of 100 diameters.* Notice the distinction in texture of the various grains, and the irregular boundaries between them. | In this example the microscope was looking directly at the specimen, of course, and the light by which the specimen was illuminated passed down through the tube of the microscope directly on to the specimen, perpen- dicular to the surface, and back again into the lens by reflection. But we can illuminate the specimen in a different way. We can throw upon it light from the side, and only a portion of the light dispersed by the different granules will be sent up into the microscope. When we do that we find a very striking difference in appearance. Here is an example (/7g. 2, Plate //). It happens that this is a photograph of cast lead, but the difference between it and /7g. 1 is mainly an effect due to the oblique illumination. You see again the separate grains or granules with their boundaries, but you now find that some of them are very dark, others very bright, and others of intermediate shades. You also find when you move the light about,so as to make it fall first from one direction and then from another, and watch the same grains under the microscope, that a grain which is bright at one moment will be dark at the next, when the light is moved into a different position, and on the contrary, a grain which was dark before will turn out of an inter- mediate shade, or perhaps flash out quite bright. This becomes intelligible as soon as we consider of what it is that these grains consist. We are accustomed to think of a crystal as a thing with well defined geometrically formed external boundaries. The grains that build up a piece of metal do not possess that characteristic, but for all that they are true crystals. * Ewing and Rosenhain, Phz/. 7vans., ser. A, vol. 193, p. 353, 1899. 4 EWING, The Structure of Metals. They do possess what is really the essential characteristic of a crystal, that it is composed of an enormous number of elementary pieces, which we may call brickbats, in perfectly regular tactical formation. ‘The essential thing about a crystal is, that in its own interior structure it should be composed of perfectly uniform pieces, which are placed together in uniform tactical. formation, a formation to which a well drilled body of troops, or the flowers of an early Victorian wall paper, form a somewhat rough approximation. When we come to etch the grain we can detect very clear traces of such a regular tactical formation on the part of the elementary brickbats of which it is composed. Here (fzg. 3, Plate 1) for instance, is a photograph showing what is observed in the microscope when the deeply etched surface of a particular metal is examined under a lens of high magnifying power. You can see quite plainly the traces of geometrical forma- tion in the regular tactical grouping of the elementary plates or brickbats. When a structure of this kind is under the microscope, and is illuminated by light coming obliquely from one side, any one grain will reflect more or less light up to the lens, according to particular way in which its brickbats lie. Hence we find wide differences of brightness between grain and grain, but over any one grain the general brightness is uniform (as in ig. 2, Plate II), because all the brickbats in any one grain face exactly the same way. An even more striking example of the same thing is shown in /zg. 4, Plate JJ. Here the whole visible field is a portion of one grain of a steel containing four per cent. of silicon, which was studied by Mr. J. E. Stead. It lends itself particularly well to the exhibition of this structure. Note that the brickbats when etched do not appear to be of the same size; but, of course, the microscope does Manchester Memozrs, Vol. tt. (1907), No. 15. 5 not enable us to see individual brickbats; we are looking, so to speak, at fragments of masonry which the brickbats build up. ) There are other lines of evidence which bring out clearly the crystalline character of the separate grains of metal. If you cast metal on to a smooth surface of glass, under some conditions of casting which are not very easy to reproduce, but which you sometimes have the luck to light upon, you find when you examine the surface that there are curious geometrical markings upon it which appear to be due to the presence of very minute bubbles of air or gas which are caught on the plate or perhaps have been occluded in the metal, and have come out in the process of solidification. These bubbles instead of taking a casual round formation, have a more or less distinct geometrical figure corresponding to the particular type of brickbat of which the crystal is built up. They are, as it were, hollow brickbats. They are holes representing the absence of certain brickbats in the surface of the metal. Examples of this action are shown in Figs.5 and 6, Plate /TT, which are photographs of a cadmium surface cast on smooth glass. fig. 6 is part of a single grain only, with a very high magnification (over 4,000 diameters). These show in an unmistakeable way the geometrical character of the holes formed by tiny air bubbles, caught between the metal and the glass at the moment of solidification. The crystalline markings which are a familiar sight on the free surface of a metal solidifying after being melted in an open dish, serve to show that in the growth of crystal grains the process goes on in a manner that is described as dendritic. That is to say the grain grows, as a tree grows, by spreading branches. These branches rush out in various directions, and then the intermediate spaces are filled up at leisure. Again, in the electrolytic deposit of 6 EWING, The Structure of Metals. metal or in the crystallization of a salt from a solution (fig. 7, Plate [V), you see these branches actually being formed. The process may be arrested before the inter- mediate portions are filled up, but if it is allowed to continue all the space would be filled up by the little brickbats, and then we should have a structure in all respects identical with that of the grains which are found in a solid block of cast or forged metal. It may help you to think of the process as it actually occurs in a metal if you picture to yourselves a number of fairy children in a nursery provided with an unlimited supply of little brickbats of the same shape and size. Place the children in different parts of the nursery, give each of them an ample supply of brickbats, and let them all start building, not necessarily simultaneously (it does not matter whether they do so or not), but let each start building quite independently. Each places its first brick- bat in some casual position without any reference at all to the position in which the other children are placing theirs, but once it has placed its first one it necessarily places all the rest strictly parallel to it. That is essential to the regular tactical formation of the crystal. Then imagine the process to go on until the whole space in the nursery is filled up. You will have each child’s pile determined in size and shape only by this consideration, how big does it become before it is stopped by coming against the piles of its neighbours. That is exactly the process of crystal building as we have it in metals. It is casual differences in the rate of building one pile or another that determines the irregular boundaries of the grains. There is one further point to be mentioned. The children of our analogue are as aggressive as European powers in planting their flag in previously unoccupied territory. The crystals do not simply progress as solids, Manchester Memoirs, Vol. li. (1907), No. 15. W, they shoot out arms, seizing territory that they are after- wards going fully to occupy. These arms come out and meet and interlock, and then the places between are filled by a slower growth. The ultimate effect is to produce a solid block in which the skeleton formed by the original shooting out of the arms is completely merged. You may see the same kind of thing happen when a salt crystallises out of a solution on a glass plate. The different crystals are liable to become interlocked at their junctions by means of the arms shot out from each. It appears (as Rosenhain has pointed out*) that this inter- locking is an important factor in determining the strength of a piece of metal. So far as the individual grain goes the strength depends upon considerations that we shall deal with presently when we come to consider the possible type of brickbat ; but so far as the cohesion of one grain with another goes | think that it is in all probability due to an interlocking of the advancing arms. It may make this matter more obvious to you if I show anexample of crystallisation in actual process. We will not attempt to crystallise a metal, because we could not satisfactorily show that by means of the lantern, but we shall crystallise a solution of a salt. I will take common ammonium chloride, and spread a film of saturated solution of that salt on a glass plate, and then put it into the lantern, and you will see the fairy children at work. You will see the little brickbats beginning to be apparent not only at one place but at many places on the surface of the glass. Crystallization starts not simply from one, but from many nuclei: arms are shot out: the crystals spread till they meet, and finally the whole surface of the plate becomes covered with a solid mass. * Rosenhain, Jour. Lron and Steel Inst., 1904, No. 1, p. 335- 8 EwIN G, The Structure of Metals. We pass on now to another point which is of primary interest. How is it that with this crystalline structure in the grains a metal is capable of being plastic? We know, for instance, that if we stretch a bar of good iron, or, to take an extreme case, if we draw a piece of iron into wire, it is capable of being changed in form enor- mously without actual rupture. We can bend a plate ora bar, we can stretch it, we can draw it into wire, we can forge it cold into all sorts of shapes in virtue of the property of plasticity which has somehow or other to be reconciled with the fact that it is an aggregate of crystals. How do the crystals behave when the form of the metal is altered? Examine in the microscope a piece of iron which has been stretched until it has broken in the testing machine. You find that the crystal grains are there just as before, but they now have a predom- inantly long direction one way as compared with the other. Taking a general view over them, although they are very irregular in shape and size, you can easily see that they tend to be longer in the direction in which the piece was stretched. The meaning of that is, each indi- vidual grain has actually been extended in the direction in which the iron has been stretched as a whole. How is it that the crystal grain is capable of being extended, and how is it that the grain remains a crystal after such exten- sion? Here (/7zg. 8, Plate JV) is a very striking example which shows that it does remain a crystal. This is a micro- photograph from the cross section of a bar which was drawn down in the cold state from one inch in diameter to half-an-inch in diameter. That means a very severe straining of the iron, nevertheless the grains remain crystal grains. The particular crystal, a part of which is shown in this field, has been bent round into a shape resembling that of a horse-shoe, but all over it there are Manchester Memoirs, Vol. tt. (1907), No. 15. 9 little geometrical pits produced in the process of etching, which upon close examination turn out to be true rectangular pits, with sides which have parallel directions all over the crystal. Examine it under a high power, and you find these geometrical markings parallel to one another, showing that there still is a true crystalline structure within the erain. How has that crystalline structure been preserved ? Mr. Rosenhain and I, in the course of an investigation carried out some years ago in Cambridge, found that the straining of the individual grain took place much as a pack of cards is strained when you make one card slip over another. This was observed by watching an individual grain under the microscope in a piece of iron. When it is strained a number of markings appear on it, in the form of lines, more or less straight and parallel, which appear dark under the microscope. A close examination shows on any severely strained crystal two, and in some cases three, systems of such lines. Mr. Rosenhain and I called these lines “ slip-lines,” because they are lines formed by a process of slipping. They run, in a general way, parallel, and then there is another system, or it may be two systems, crossing them, running in other directions. As you pass from one grain to another you find the grains distinguished by differences in the directions of the slip lines. zg. 9, Plate V, shows slip-lines as they manifest themselves in a piece of cast lead, after it has been subjected to a process of straining. Over each crystal of lead no fewer than three distinct and separate systems of lines can be plainly seen. To understand what these lines really are, consider an imaginary section (7er/-fig. 1) through a couple of grains of metal. The line on the top represents the surface at 10 EWING, The Structure of Metals. which we are supposed to be looking. AC, CB are the surfaces of the two grains and the boundary between them comes down from C into the interior of the metal. We suppose that the piece is stretched by applying a pull which acts in the direction AZ. This causes a slip in each grain, but it is not a homogeneous slip occurring throughout the whole grain. It is a disconnected slip which A 1% GT a WF iy! W111) 14 by 4S WENN AS Wie Mi by Dit My ly) tid a VAN Fig. 1. TT occurs at a series of places lying a little way apart and it has the effect of producing steps by lowering one part of the surface relatively to another, as the lower figure (7ez/- jig. 2) illustrates. Imagine what happens when you look down through the microscope on this surface. These little sloping steps at a, 0, c, d, and e are dark, because the light coming down upon them is not reflected back into the microscope, but is thrown away to the side ; consequently everyone of these steps forms a dark line. As soon as Mr. Rosenhain and I realised that these lines were little steps, we also realised that by choosing a suitable direction for the light to fall upon the specimen, namely, from the side instead of the top, it might be possible to show them up as bright lines when all the rest of the specimen was dark. Think of the light (in Zext-ig. 2) as coming in from the side, striking one of those sloping Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 15. II steps, and being thrown into the microscope. That step, and the other steps on the same grain parallel to it, would then seem bright instead of dark, while the rest of the sur- face would, of course, seem dark, because it throws none of the light up into the lens. By changing the direction of the incident light you can get one or other strained crystal to show its lines as bright lines ; and always when one line in a crystal becomes bright the other lines forming a parallel system with it flash into brightness at the same time, thereby giving a most satisfactory proof that the lines are in fact due to the presence of strictly parallel steps, which are explained by slips that have occurred in the process of straining. It is to these slips that plasticity isdue. In /7zg. 10, Plate V, you have under high magnification an example of the slips in a crystal of strained lead, which has altered its form by slips taking place in three independent sets of planes, and the photograph shews well the regularity and the independent character of the successive slips. Mr. Rosenhain* has continued this investigation, and has devised a very ingenious further proof, if any were needed, of the character of these lines. He took a piece of iron which was severely strained, and he deposited copper electrolitically upon its polished surface. According to the theory I have just given you the surface of a strained piece of iron is really not a plane surface any more, but is composed of a series of steps. He deposited copper in order to demonstrate the existence of these steps. Then he cut the piece across at right angles to the surface, and polished both the iron and the copper, and the polished section clearly shows the little steps as serrations in the line dividing iron from copper. Connected with this subject is a matter of very great * Jour. Lron and Steel Inst., 1906, No. II., p. 189. 12 EWING, The Structure of Metals. practical importance, namely, the fatigue which occurs in metal when we expose it to repeated variations of strain. To take an experimental laboratory example, suppose we have a rod fixed in a thing like the mandrel of a lathe, which is caused to revolve, and let the rod be loaded at its extremity by a weight or by the pull of a spring balance. This causes it to be bent, and the surface is being compressed and extended alternately at every half revolution of the rod. You may cause this to revolve thousands or millions of times, and what you find is that it will ultimately break under the action of a bending force which would be perfectly safe if the rod were standing still. In other words, if there is repeated alter- nation in the strain, then the metal suffers what is technically called fatigue, and this fatigue may lead to rupture under many repetitions cf the straining action, The nature of this fatigue manifests itself when the piece is examined under the microscope. Watch an individual crystal in the surface of the bar, and at first you may not detect any effect. After a few thousand reversals you may just begin to see the appearance of slip-lines ; with more reversals these increase in number and in visibility, and finally, after some hundreds of thousands of reversals, the piece breaks. The process of fatigue is associated with the gradual development of more and more prominent slip-lines in the piece which is ‘undergoing alternations. Mr. Humfrey and I showed that what actually happens is that some of these slip lines develop into cracks, and when a crack starts it rapidly spreads from crystal to crystal, and at last there is a sudden rupture.* I will now ask your attention for a short time to a molecular theory which I have endeavoured to formulate * Ewing and Humfrey, 2227. Z7azs., ser. A, vol. 200, p. 241, 1902. of 3) bd ; 2 P ’ Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), Vo. 15. 13 by way of explaining the process of crystal building, and the characteristics which the crystal exhibits under strain.* Just think of the various things that these brick- bats have to explain. In the first place, they have to explain the regular tactical formation in the crystals ; next they have to explain cohesion ; then they have to explain how the metal is elastic, that is to say, how it can undergo a certain small amount of strain without any permanent set, with complete recovery of its original form when the stress is removed; next they have to explain how, when it is further strained, it passes an elastic limit, and how it is capable of plastic strain, under- going permanent set and giving rise to dissipation of energy; finally, they have to explain those various phenomena of fatigue I have just briefly touched upon. The molecule or individual brickbat that I imagine the crystal! to be built up of is a piece which has three axes of polarity. Think of it as having six poles, with a pair of opposite poles at the ends of each of the three axes, and the axes at right angles to one another. The polarity is not magnetic, although we may con- veniently represent it in a model by means of magnetism. Whatever the polarity is due to, you must suppose that a Fig. 3. * Report Brit. Assoc., Vork, 1906. Address of President, Section G. 14 _ Ewine, The Siructure of Metals. pole in one brickbat attracts an opposite pole in another, and that two like poles will repel, and two unlike poles will attract. Suppose now the crystal to be built by a gradual assemblage of such polar molecules. Begin with one, and put down others, one by one, in the position tebe tp Ppt h tp etd eh ab oh Ppt pp pt pep bee tp Lig. 4. of greatest stability with respect to it. By the time you have put down four molecules, they have taken the positions shown in Jez¢-fig. 3. And similarly Textjfig. 4 shows the arrangement that is found in a much more numerous group, when the condition of maximum stability is satisfied in the process of crystal building. I want next to show you the establishment of what I shall call a little group of dissenters. I use that descrip- tion merely as a short term to express a group, the members of which keep each other in countenance, but are out of complete harmony with their environment. We can establish such a group by supposing two of these molecules turned round. They are still stable, but not so stable, and not so comfortable, as they were to begin with. TZext-fig. 5 shows such a dissenting group at a, 0, ¢. Their position may be strengthened by turning one or more other molecules, such as d, round, so as to join Manchester Memotrs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 15. I5\ forces with them. The dissenters give one another mutual support. We can suppose their little community enlarged bebe 4p tt tetitidet tp fepppb pte fag. 5. as much as we please, but it still remains different from the rest of the crystal. The matter will become clearer if we study experi- mentally a model in which polar molecules are pivotted on centres on a glass plate, so that their shadows may be thrown on the screen, and you can watch how they behave under the action of their mutual forces. Begin crystal building with two molecules, and notice how they accommodate themselves to one another first of all. This, if you like, is the settlement from the liquid state. You see there is a little hesitation at first. Four of them have now taken up the same position as the four shown in the drawing (7ex/-fig. 3.) That is the position of most stability, and if we were dealing with a small com- munity they would necessarily take up this position. If I displace them from it you will see that they return to it. Now we will take a group sufficiently large to have a dissenting community set up in it. You see that at first the whole group is in proper tactical formation corre- sponding to complete stability—the formation namely of 16 EWING, The Structure of Metals. Text-fig. 4. Now notice how I establish a community of two dissenters. They are just keeping one another in countenance and nomore. They have very little stability indeed. But now I increase the number of dissenters considerably, and the stability of the dissenting group is clearly strengthened. If you have a dissenting group set up in any way, they are likely to show that they are different from the rest when you come to etch the metal. They are less stable than the rest, and consequently one may anticipate that they will be more readily attacked by any etching re-agent. Probably that is the explanation of those geometrical pits which we see when we etch the polished surface of forged iron. It is an interesting point that when you come to etch an iron surface, even although the rest of the iron is scarcely attacked at all, here and there the iron is so strongly acted on that a hole is formed, which has a well-defined rectangular shape. I imagine that hole was originally a dissenting community which has yielded to the acid more readily than the rest. To that extent the crystal was imperfect: the condition of absolutely uniform tactical grouping was not rigorously fulfilled ; for a dissenting group introduces a want of homogeneity within the grain in which it occurs, the general nature of which will be apparent when one compares J7exi-fig. 5 with the perfectly regular tactics of the preceding figure. Passing from that, I want to show you how this theory allows us to explain the characteristics of straining. First of all, it is quite obvious that a crystal of this sort is capable of transmitting any elastic disturbance. Let us displace one particular molecule by turning it some way round, and letting it go suddenly. You see that in swinging back it starts a wave which is transmitted Manchester Memotrs, Vol. tz. (1907), No. 15. 17 gradually all over the group. To show next that this theory is in harmony with what we know about elastic straining and non-elastic straining, we will take a group of molecules in two portions, separately. mounted on two glass plates, which can be caused to slide past one another. Notice what happens when I make one portion of the “crystal” slip past another portion. Up to a certain point there is nothing in the nature of permanent strain. If you watch the molecules which are adjacent to the line ef slip, you will see that they are striving, as it were, to hold together. That corresponds to elastic straining. In any strain causing distortion, you can imagine slipping to take place to an infinitesimal extent on any number of planes on the crystal, and on any one of these planes you simply have a slight displacement of the neighbouring molecules, a slight turning of the neighbouring polar axes, but without breaking bond. Suppose we cause the strain to be more violent, the bonds will be broken, and the molecules will swing round into new positions. There will be dissipation of energy, and there will be no recovery ; in other words there will be permanent set. In the model you see this dissipation of energy, when one of the plates is caused to slide so far past the other as to break the molecular bonds. The molecules swing round into new positions, and the energy which they thereby dissipate is lost by its being spread throughout the substance of the piece, and probably spent in gene- rating internal electric currents. That is a non-elastic strain as I conceive it. Notice too the effect of periodic straining in opposite directions many times over, which we imitate in the model by making one of the glass plates slide a little way backwards and forwards repeatedly past the other. This 18 EWING, The Structure of Metals. see-saw sets up a large amount of movement in the adjacent molecules, and sets up dissenting communities which spread themselves on both sides of the plane of slip ; so that not only molecules immediately adjacent to the plane of slip are affected, but molecules extending for some distance inwards on both sides. An interesting confirmation of this is given by the fact (noticed by Rosenhain) that after you have fatigued a piece by repeated straining backwards and forwards, and then polish and etch it, you find a marking which recalls the presence of slip lines, although you have a perfectly fresh etched surface to examine. This means that the metal has really had a difference in structure set up in it by the repeated alternations, a difference in structure which is sufficient to manifest itself in the etching. That difference, I believe, is due to a corresponding per- manent disturbance of those molecules which are adjacent to the planes in which slip has occurred. The time is too short for me to attempt a complete account of all the points which are explainable by this theory. I will only mention one more. Overstraining causes a species of fatigue in a metal which shows itself conspicuously in a loss of elasticity. After this fatigue has been set up it is possible, by means of rest cure, to restore the elasticity which has been lost. It is a well- known fact, that if you take a piece which is beginning to be fatigued, and give it a rest, it recovers, and you can accelerate that recovery very much by raising the tem- perature, as, for example, by such treatment as dipping. it into hot water. There is a remarkable instance of this in a practice that is probably familiar to many now present, when you dip a razor into hot water after strop- ping it. The stropping of a razor means the alternate bending of the edge to one side and the other. That Manchester Memozrs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 15. 19 causes fatigue, which leaves the edge of the razor after stropping in a comparatively soft and non-elastic con- dition. In the language of the theory I am putting forward to-day, it leaves the edge of the razor composed very largely of dissenting communities. These dissenting communities tend to resolve themselves with mere lapse of time into conformity. I do not know why it should be so. Possibly the disturbance caused by heat, even at the ordinary temperature of the air, produces enough movement of the molecules to tend at least to break up those feebly stable groups and restore them to the original tactical formation. Anyhow the fact remains that fatigue is recovered from slowly in this way, and you can enormously accelerate the recovery by dipping the razor into hot water. Thus the theory explains a piece of domestic practice which for a long time was so unintelligible that I for one was not inclined to believe that the hot water had any value at all. Experiments made on bars of steel in the testing machine in my laboratory by Mr. James Muir demonstrate this recovery very clearly.* It occurs slowly at ordinary temperatures, but a quick restoration can be effected by the application of sufficient warmth. Just one other point before I close. A good many years ago I showed that the facts of magnetic quality could be explained by supposing that iron and other magnetic metals had molecules which were capable of being rotated, these molecules being possessed of per- manent magnetic polarity, and being free of all constraint except that which is due to their natural magnetic forces. The process of magnetisation consists in turning these molecules round so that they tend to face more or less one way, and the iron becomes saturated when they all * Muir, Phzl. Trazs., ser. A, vol. 193, p. I, 1899. 20 — Ewinc, The Structure of Metais. face exactly one way. How does that agree with the views I am placing before you now? In the first place the polarity we are now dealing with—the polarity that has to do with crystal-building—is not a uni-axial polarity as the other was. It is a polarity along three independent axes. In the second place this polarity is not a magnetic polarity at all, because the application of magnetising force does not cause the brickbats composing the crystals to: revolve. Consequently we must suppose that the mole- cule is really a much more complex thing than these models would seem to show. We must suppose that in addition to this polarity along three axes, which deter- mines the position of the brickbat among its neighbours in the crystal, there is in addition a uni-axial polarity which is capable of being rotated with respect to the other. In other words, we must think of the molecule as having its three axes capable of being held fixed in space by the neighbouring molecules, and at the same time possessing some sort of internal structure that is capable of being turned round so as to get the magnetic axes to point one way without interfering at all with the orientation of the molecule as a whole. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. LI. (No. 15.) Plate I. [Ree Manchester Memoirs, Vol. LI. (No. 15.) Plate IT. > $F, ieee aa ‘ape Manchester Memoirs, Vol. LI. (No. 15.) Plate 111 Manchester Memoirs, Vol. LI. (No. 15.) Plate LV. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. LI. (No. 15.) Plate V. <> 5 is if hes: Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), Vo. 16. XVI. Some Tables for illustrating Statistical Correlation. By A. D. DARBISHIRE, Royal College of Sctence, London. Received January gth, 1907. Read February rath, 1907. It was not my original intention to preface the description of my new Tables with an account of Weldon’s experiment.* But I was persuaded that without such an account the meaning of my Tables would not be evident to many. It must be understood, therefore, that except in the matter of presentment the first part of this paper makes no claim to originality. The second part contains an account of an interesting extension of the experiment described in the first. I. Let us begin at the beginning, so far as we can. In the case of a very great number of vital phenomena we are unable to predict exactly what the result of certain events will be. We know that they will fall within certain limits, but where within those limits we cannot tell. We believe that a duck will not produce a duckling with a beak as narrow as a snipe’s, but the exact breadth of the beak—measured, let us say, in terms of its length— in a given instance, we cannot foretell. If these words ever happen to lie before the eyes of a biologist, the chances are that he will be inclined to ask me, “What does it matter what the length-by-breadth index of a duck’s bill is?” My answer to this interruption is * :06. Weldon, W. F. R. “Inheritance in Animals and Plants,” pp. 81—109, in ‘‘ Lectures on the Method of Science.” Edited by T. B. Strong. . Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1906. June 28th, 1907. 2 DARBISHIRE, Tables tllustrating Statistical Correlation that so long as we are as much in the dark as we are at present about the circumstances which may affect an animal’s or plant’s chances of attaining maturity, any statement that such and such a feature matters or does not matter is unwarrantable. But let us return to cur argument. Some living things are variable. We may adopt two attitudes towards this variability ; we may either say that it does not matter and ignore it, or we may suspect that it may matter and measure it. In my opinion evidence does not justify us in adopting the former attitude. Statisticians have provided us with a method for measuring this variability. But we usually want to know more than this; we want, if possible, to measure the closeness of the relation between two such variable things. Statisticians have again provided us with a method which enables us to measure the closeness of that relation in which biologists are most interested, namely, that between parents and children. The first step in this method is to construct a Correlation Table. How this is done is best explained by giving an account of Weldon’s beautiful experiment. The variable phenomenon he dealt with was the number of dice, in a throw of 12, which fell so that faces with 4 or more pips on them were uppermost. When we throw a single die it is an even chance whether it falls so that a face with 3 or fewer pips on it lies uppermost, or whether a 4-or-more-bearing face lies uppermost. Therefore the most probable number of dice with faces bearing 4 or more uppermost in a throw of 12 is 6, but the number may be anything between o and 12 inclusive, though these extreme results occur very seldom. Here is a list shewing the frequency with which the 13 possibilities occurred in a thousand throws which I have made: Munchester Memozrs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 16. 3 Result of _ Throw. Frequency. Q fo) a 3 2 15 3 58 4 IIo 5 208 6 223 7 17g) 8 129 9 64 10 Ta aii 2 12 I Imagine that I am before you and that I have 12 dice in a dice-box. I shake it and throw them. The result happens to be 7 dice with 4-or-more-bearing faces upper- most. I pick up all the dice, put them back into the dice-box, shake it and throw them again; the result happens to be 5 such dice. What I want you to observe is that in this pair of throws the two throws which compose it are absolutely independent of one another ; the result of the second is not affected by the result of the first; a knowledge of the result of the first does not help us to predict the result of the second. Let us think of some way of making the two throws in such a pair dependent, of making the result of the second affected by the result of the first, and of bringing it about that a knowledge of the result of the first shall help us to predict the result of the second. I suggest to you that a good way of doing this is to leave half the dice, which formed the first throw, lying on 4 DARBISHIRE, Tables cllustrating Statistical Correlation. the table, and allow them to form half of the second throw. If I do this the second throw will consist of six dice lying exactly as they did in the first throw and of six dice thrown afresh. Six of the twelve results which determine the total result of each throw will be common to the two throws of a pair. But you will say, “ How will you know which six dice to leave on the table. You will not be able to help leaving the ones showing 4-or-more down and picking up the others, except by making it a rule not todo so. And that would introduce too much complication. It seems to me that it will be very difficult to make the decision as to which dice shall be picked up and which not, a matter of chance and not of choice.” This objection is quite reasonable, but the difficulty is not insurmountable. All that is necessary is to make six of the dice different from the other six. This is easily effected by leaving them for a few hours in red ink. It does not matter whether we make it our rule to leave the red or the white dice down on the table when we gather up the six dice to make the second throw. Let us decide on the red. We can now start to make a pair of connected throws, in which the decision as to which dice pass over undisturbed from the first to the second throw is a matter of chance and not of choice. I put all the dice— the 6 red and the 6 white—into the dice box, shake it about and throw the dice on to the table. The result happens to be 6.* Now I gather up the white dice, put them into the dice box and throw them. In describing the results of the second throw I count the red as well as the white, although only the latter have been thrown a second time. So that half of the results which determine the * The number describing the result of a throw means the number of dice exhibiting faces with four-or-more pips on them uppermost in that throw. Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), Vo. 16. 5 total result of the first throw are exactly the same as half of those which determine the total result of the second. The two throws are connected together. For instance, let us consider the maximum possible difference between the two connected throws and compare it with the maximum possible difference between two independent throws such as we started by making. The maximum possible differ- ence between two independent throws is twelve. A 12 may follow a0. Ora 0 may follow a 12. But in the case of two connected throws the maximum possible difference is 6. It may happen by all the red dice showing 4-or-more and all the white ones 3-or-less in the first throw and by all the white ones showing 4-or-more when thrown again (that is, by a 12 following a 6); or by all the dice showing 3-or-less in the first throw and the white ones all showing 4-or-more when thrown again (that is, by a 6 following a0). The number of ways in which the maximum difference between the two throws may be attained is given by the number of pairs of figures that follow. The first figure in each pair indicates the result of the first throw in that pair; the second that of the second. 0-6, 1-7, 2-8, 3-9, 4-10, 5-I1, O-129 7-1, 6-2, ©-3.) 10-4) 1i-5, and 12-6. Nhe essential point is that 6 is the maximum possible difference. But you see how seldom it is likely to occur. It depends on a// the white showing the opposite kind of face upper- most in the second throw to those which they exhibited inthe first. The fact that it does not occur often, however, does not concern us now. What concerns us at present is that the maximum possible difference between the result of a pair of throws connected in the way we described above is 6, whilst that between two unconnected throws is 12. The two results in the ‘connected’ pairs are, as it were, chained together. We may compare the two results in 6 DARBISHIRE, Zadbles tllustvating Statistical Correlazton. III. III. LI. LII. III. LI. ee tele 5235) O90 9-8) B.2) Bed 007 ee eee On7 4.6 2.4 8.5 Ong 5:4 3.4 GTI 15 POit 15-38 OT Oi. Wid. 2 eC aes 6.7 6.8 4.6 Feah 7.5 6.3 6.7 77 4.8 5:7 5-6 5:4 9-5 5-4 6:10) ozo, 4.7 4.6 6.4 7.6 4.8 6.7 (hy) 8.7 5-6 4.2 2.6 6.6 6.5 6.7 Tey 5.4 7.4 6.7 9.8 8.9 Tes 5-4. 5.6 6.9 is 6.7 7.8 6.7 255 8.4 78 5.6 TQ) ed =) 5-552) 035.) 5713-5 oe 5-7 9.10 5.4 9.5 4.4 6.4 7-6 4.5 6.8 6.3 9.9 cas 5-8 OLLI 7826 6.7 8.7 5-4 8.4 5-4 7.6 Be 4.6 OL BR 8.8 8.8 3.3 5.7, 9.8 Bath 78 PO Seo Ep Oa Be 7-10 :O) 5st jes 6.5 Sg) 1 Gals 2515 6.6 8.6 5.6 5:5 Ba 8.6 6.4 6.8 6.3 5-5 4.8 8.8 6.7 3-7 BAN VASO 0:4.) 1) 7-40) 2 OMe Gevhag a) OPA ees ON vinnie 45 5.5 9 2G:0 6.5 6.9 8.5 3.4 6.6 4.7 8.6 5-7 4.3 8.6 7.6 7.6 4.3 6.5 57 4.6 8.8 5:7 8.7 5.6 9.7 6.6 6.4 leas 5-7 Sai 5.8 5:4 6.7 6.6 44 9.10 6.8 6.6 a5 5:6 6.4 4.5 Wels 9.5 9.6 8.8 5-6 8.8 6.9 8.8 9.8 Gag 7.6 6.6 7.6 6.5 8.6 4.3 6.6 5:6 8.6 6.7 5.6 6.6 6.6 Ta 6.7 6.7 4.2 4.6 7.6 8.7 6.2 8.6 4.5 6.8 S05 8.7 5-5 8.6 77 a) Ey (Ey 6.6 7.6 8.6 6.8 2.5 Tos RAIS 4.2 5.8 1.4 8.6 5.6 6.5 9.6 5-7 2.4 4.9 Sa 8.8 9.7 5.5 7.6 6.5 5-7 Ti] 5.6 GLOn |. HOw, 4.5 5-4 5:6 6.4 Manchester Memozrs, Vol lz. (1907), No. 16. Tele 71 7.8 6.8 5) 7) 55) 5-4 4.6 6.3 4-7 7-9 4.4 4.6 9.8 8.6 6.8 5:4 7.8 UOC, 77 5:7 4-7 8.9 V7 Bos) 2.2 6.7 7-5 6.5 6.4 8.9 7:55 6.8 6.7 8.5 15) 6.5 6.6 ouL® 1.2 31 4.7 6.4 4.4 9-7 Leg 5:4 5:5 5-9 6.3 4.6 2.6 7 8 DARBISHIRE, Tables tllustrating Statistical Correlation. unconnected pairs to a couple of dogs, not chained together, in a show stall at a dog show. Let us imagine the stall to be twelve feet long and each foot to be marked on the base of its frontage so that, as you stand looking at it, the left boundary of the stall is over the ? and the right over the 12. The two dogs could, if they wanted, lie as far away from each other as the size of the stall permitted, namely one over the 0 and the other over the 12. We may compare the two results in ‘connected’ pairs to two dogs in such a stall leashed together by a six-foot chain. If one of them wishes to sleep over the 0 the other has to lie in the middle of the stall over 6 If after a time the latter insists on moving to 12 the former must put up with 6. And similarly with intermediate positions. This parallel illustrates only the maximum _ possible difference between first and second throws in ‘connected ’ and ‘unconnected’ pairs. To find a parallel for the most usual difference between first and second throws in con- nected pairs we should have to imagine the leash connecting the dogs to be made of a piece of elastic with a maximum stretch of six feet. We must return to the dice. Let us make a number of pairs of such connected throws, and see what the result is. On pages 6 and 7 are given the results of 500 such pairs. The Roman numerals at the top of each column mean that the left-hand figures give the results of the first throws ; the right-hand ones those of second throws. The list does not show very much in this form. If you look-through it you will find that a high number is as a rule followed by a fairly high one, and that a low one is usually followed by a fairly low one. But this ts not presented at all vividly to the eye. What we want ts “some means of finding out, without the labour of counting through the whole series, the number of times a given Manchester Memoirs, Vol. tz. (1907), No. 16. 9 result in a first throw is followed by a given result in a second. This want is. supplied by the so-called Correla- tion Table. Here is one on which are exhibited the results of the 500 pairs of throws detailed on pages 6 and 7. Second Throws. rere ele [5 | Be eee ea aa Me ee en eee a ee PRE eee Lele First Throws. eee | eee ene ees aes The Table proper is bounded at the left and top by single lines, and at the right and bottom by double ones. It is made up of 169 squares. A horizontal series of these squares is spoken of as a row; a vertical series of them as a column. So that we may say that the table consists at once of 13 horizontal rows, each of-which is made up of 13 squares; and of 13 vertical columns, each of which is likewise made up of 13 squares. The numbers at the top of (but outside) the columns stand for the various possible results of second throws, which, as we know, may be anything from 0 to 12. The 1o DARBISHIRE, 7adbles tllustrating Statistical Correlation. numbers at the left-hand end of (but beyond) the rows have the same signification, except that they refer to first throws. At the base of (but below) most of the columns are numbers, which signify the number of times the event, indicated by the figure at the top of the column, happened in the 500 second throws. For example, a 2 occurred 12 times; a3, 25) times: a 4,51 times; and Solomype ete ade right hand end of (but beyond) most of the rows are numbers which signify the number of times the event indicated by the figure at the left of the row happened in the 500 first throws. For example, a 1 occurred 3 times; a 2, 8 times ; a 3, 24 times; and so on. So far, we have only referred to the figures outside the table, and I hope I have made clear to you what they mean. Now, we must turn our attention to the table itself. It will be found that the numbers at the bases of the columns are the sums of the numbers in the columns above them ; and that the numbers at the right- hand ends of the rows are the sums of the numbers in the rows to the left of them. Each column intersects all the rows, and each row intersects all the columns of the table. Every square is part both of a column and of a row. What is the meaning of the numbers in the squares? The figure in any square gives the number of times the result indicated by the number at the left-hand end of the row of which it is a part happened in a first throw, and was followed by the result indicated by the number at the top of the column of which it is a part, in the second throw. For example, starting with the top row we see that there was not a single case of a 0 thrown at all in these 500 pairs of throws. Coming to the second row we see that there was one case of a I in a first throw followed by a 2 in the second; one of a1 in a first followed by a Manchester Memoirs, Vol. li. (1907), No. 16. II 3 in the second, and one of a 1 followed bya 4. Examina- tion of the third row tells us that there was one case of a 2 followed by a 2, two of a 2 followed by a 4, three of a 2 followed by a 5, and two of a 2 followed bya6. And so on throughout the table. The best way to familiarize yourself with the con- struction of such a table is to make one for yourself from the figures on pages 6 and 7. You draw a correlation table like the one we have been examining, but quite blank ; and write the numbers () to 12 along the tops of the columns, and at the left-hand ends of the rows just as in that table. The plan is to indicate the result of a pair of throws by putting a dot in one of the squares of the table. But which square? We shall see in a moment. The first pair of throws on the list is a 5 followed by a 3. The figure 5, derioting the result of the first throw, tells us in what row the dot must be. The figure 3, denoting the result of the second throw, tells us in what column the dot must be. The square, therefore, formed by the intersec- tion of this row by this column is that in which the dot must be placed. The next pair of throws is a 6 followed by a 7. We find the position of the square in which the dot representing this result is to be placed in the same way. We continue this process until all the pairs on the list are entered ; then we add up the dots, and write the totals thus obtained, in each square ; add up the figures in each square composing a column, and write the total at its base ; and add up the figures in each square composing a row, and write the total at its end. The result is the correlation table on p. 9. There is one feature of it which cannot fail to attract your attention immediately. It is that the figure- containing squares lie diagonally across the Table. It is not very difficult to see what this means. It is the 12 DARBISHIRE Tables ellustrating Statistical Correlation. expression of a fact we already know, namely, that low numbers are associated in a pair with low numbers, high ones with high ones, and intermediate ones with intermediate ones. We are now approaching the outskirts of a vast subject. The task I set myself was to shew you the way to it; but not the way into it. Having given you an account of Weldon’s device for illustrating correlation, I will go no further, but will leave you in the hands of the statistician, who, I may perhaps teil you, will provide you with a means of working out from such a Table a number called the correlation coefficient, which is a measure of the degree of connection between the two things you are dealing with. In the case of the dice throws connected in the way we have just been considering, this number will be approximately °5 In the case of Table 0 (p. 15) it will be approximately 0; in the case of Table XIL., (p. 21) approximately 1. In fact, quite generally, if 7 dice are left down in the 12 the coefficient is #/12ths. re Weldon’s experiment may be varied in the following way. Instead of staining 6 dice red and leaving the six red dice of the first throw on the table to form half of the second throw, we may stain some other number, say 9, and allow 9 dice to pass over from the first to the second throw. In fact we may stain and leave over from the first to the second throw any number of dice from 0 to 12 inclusive. Table 0 shows the result of 500 pairs of throws in which, to make the second throw in each pair, all the dice were gathered up from the table and thrown again. In this case there is no correlation between the two throws. Table I. shows the result of 500 pairs of Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 16. 13 throws, in which to make the second throw, all the dice except one were gathered up from the table and thrown again. In this case there is very slight correlation between the two throws. To make Table II., 2 dice were left down. To make Table III., 3 were left down. And so on.* To make Table XII., it did not matter whether the dice were stained red or not, for the second throw was merely the first throw counted over again. And the Table consequently shows any given number in the first throw always followed by the same number in the second. Each of the thirteen Tables which are seen on the Plate, was made by substituting for the Arabic numerals in each square of Tables, 0 to XII., a corresponding number of dots, and then in erasing all the lines inside the four boundary lines of the Table. The attempt to make the phenomenon of correlation clear to an audience, previously unfamiliar with it, is in my belief less likely to be successful if it is only possible to show one Table such as VI., instead of a series. of Tables exhibiting at a glance the gradual increase in correlation as shown by the transition from a circular blur to a diagonal line, as seen in the Plate. The reason for this is the same as that which would make it very difficult for any one to explain that the angle which the two arms of a ‘governor’ on an engine make to one another, becomes obtuse in proportion as the speed of rotation becomes great, if he lived in a world in which ‘governors’ always travelled at a constant rate such as would keep the two arms at a constant angle of 90 degrees to each other. Table VI. might convey nothing to the mind of anyone regarding it even after he had read the first part of this paper. But a cinemato- *I am indebted to Mr. Charles Biddolph for making all the throws except those which compose Tables 0, VI., and XII. 14 DARBISHIRE, 7 ables cllustrating Statistical Correlation. graph, the successive pictures composing the film of which were the successive dot-Tables on the Plate, would show movement resulting from known causes. Cause, ‘no dice left down’ has effect ‘circular blur.’ Cause, ‘12 dice left down’ has effect ‘diagonal line.’ Cause, ‘6 dice left down’ has effect intermediate between last two effects. Imagine that you have a small model of.a ‘ governor.’ If you do not touch it the arms hang down. If you spin the axis as fast as you can, the arms lie in the same straight Jine. Spin it at a moderate rate; the arms make an angle of go degrees to each other. Directly we can play with machinery we can see how it works. Movement and change enable us to perceive and to understand. The two squares intersected by diagonal lines in Table I. are squares in which from the conditions of the experiment athrow cannot fall. In the rest of the Tables, the same is true of all the intersected squares and of all the squares to that side of the intersected ones remote from the diagonal of the Table. Manchester Memorzrs, Vol. tt. (1907), No. 16. 15 TABLE 0. 3 [5] |26 ame OT a) ei ese ze 2 Se eee eo TABLE I. © 2 aaseueteeeens NI nM) SRUReaanaaaa 3 29 FT (2 [3 fol [6 [a [sf] | lhe) Ee a eee 5] 8 |40/25 [3 a9] SHOSOOORGREG 32, COS es) ee ee ea al ae Beas SS SS SS SS EE SS 2 16 DARBISHIRE, Tables tllustrating Statistical Correlation. TABLE II. BOS Ge ST NO” i) pelOa ie a ame eee See eae aN ee ee SO ; Ce | Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lz. (1907), No. 16. 17 TABLE IV. ESSE Er Sse, eae SES Se Pe ee ae —— 4) > “oO | Ow ~ —~ BEER Bei al © aS we) he eet eat) ite aa ae —i|—-| nw!~- eee iene oe eS Bee aac CoB q |2t | 14 ue Se) DA Tey eal el au ee eal Bie Hee 5 [14 24128 | 10 NEES ee eens a REET 18 DARBISHIRE, Tables ellustrating Statistical Correlation. Bees o BO EO 7, Aare TTT TTT ST MBSE Ee eyo ee ae Le ees eae [4 3 NEE Bae i HHS oO SSEETETETT WN ee ip ets tebe Nee ia Ne |i oe Manchester Memoirs, Vol. lt. (1907), No. 16. 19 TABLE VIII. PRS ENE Zo NS IN ee ea & a sy a8 py ee TABLE IX. RCE SD aA iol Ou e Le Be Geh. MO a eIze me Ne PBR DHE LAIN eee IN Sas | IN ee) a 20 DARBISHIRE, Zables tllustrating Statistical Correlation. ABLE X. ONO: gh 2S a e.: ae PB 9) 0 al es lA Ws SS RS jes ee aI a ae ee oN NE ee ae LUIS iI Ne EG 43/32 |/0/N\ | as 22 IN ae Ed am ie a io lo oC 6 | Hee ee 2 ee mt |e ee RRB SCCC Cee INGEN Manchester Memoirs, Vol tt. (1907), No. 16. 21 Plate. “peyonASuoo. a1oM sturIseIq ay} YyoryM wor (r7—S1 dd) sajquy oyy 0} rayor ajetg sty} sutsoduo9 suvisvig £1 94} Jo staur09 puvy-jysia doy ay} ye stoquinu oy, yi ae Nae The numbers at the top right-hand corners of the 13 Diagrams composing this Plate refer to the Tables (pp. 15—21) from which the Diagrams were constructed. Plate. Manchester Memotrs, Vol. LI. (Wo. 16.) ‘ * a F in shoe PROCEEDINGS OF ite VeEANCEE SE Rei BINARY) ANN ID PEWULOSOR ISU SOC Ie Ordinary Meeting, October 2nd, 1906. Dr. W. E. Hoy eg, F.R.S.E., in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. The following were among the recent accessions to the Society’s Library :—“‘ Zhe Leaufert Scale of Wind-force,’ by G. C. Simpson (4to., London, 1906), ‘“ Zhe Life History of Surface Air Currents,” by W. N. Shaw and R. G. K. Lempfert (4to., London, 1906), presented by the Meteorological Office ; ‘‘ De /ava-oorlog van 1825-30”...Vierde Deel, [by] E. S. De Klerck (8vo., Batavia, 1905), ‘“‘Rapporten van de Commissie in Ned.-Ind. v. Oudhetdkundig onderzoek op Java en Madoera, 1904” (4to., Batavia, 1906), presented by the Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen ; “ Bestimmung der Lingendifferenz sw. ad. grossh. Sternwarte bei Fleidelberg u.d. Katserl. Univ.-Sternwarte in Strassburg t. E.,” von E. Becker u. W. Valentiner (4to., Karlsruhe i. B., 1906) presented by the Astronomische Institut bei Heidelberg ; “ Report on the Geodetic Survey of part of Southern Rhodesia,” by A. Simms (fol., Cape Town, 1905), presented by the Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope; “Les Prix Nobel en 1903” (8vo., Stockholm, 1906), presented by the Académie Royale Suédoise des Sciences ; “‘ Catalogue of the Molicre Collection in Harvard College Library,” by T. F. Currier and E. L. Gay (8vo., Cambridge, Mass., 1906), presented by Harvard College Library ; ii | PROCEEDINGS. [October 2nd, 19006. “* Reports to the Evolution Committee,” iii. (8vc., London, 1906), presented by the Royal Society ; “ Zhe Bristol Museum and Art Gallery...t772-1900,” by W. R. Barker (8vo., Bristol, 1906), presented by the Committee of the Bristol Museum; “‘ Zzdia,” by P. Loti, transl. by Dr. G. A. F. Inman (8vo., London, [1906)]), presented by Mr. Ben Walmsley; “ Antiquities of the Jemez Plateau, New Mexico,” by EK. L. Hewett (8vo, Washington, 1906), presented by the Bureau of American Ethnology; “ Zhe Argu- ment, a priori, for the Being and the Attributes of the Lord God, the Absolute One, and First Cause,” by W. H. Gillespie, 6th ed. (8vo., Edinburgh, 1906), presented by the Trustees of Mrs. H. Gillespie. Professor F. EK. Weiss, D.Sc., F.L.S., read the following paper, entitled “Gutta percha from a Chinese Tree (Zucommia ulmoides Oliver).” With the increasing use of indiarubber and gutta-percha in various industries, it seems important to draw attention to plants capable of yielding these valuable vegetable products, which are not as yet being used as sources. To these belongs the Chinese Tree (Zucommia ulmoides Oliv.), -_ of which Dr. A. Henry sent some specimens to Kew about the year 1890. According to Dr. Henry’s account, the tree was highly valued on account of the medicinal qualities of its bark, and largely cultivated in China. It appears to be a native of the mountainous districts of Hupeh and Szechuan. This plant, which up to that time was unknown to botanists, was described by Prof. D. Oliver (90) as Zucommia ulmoides, and the material at his disposal being somewhat fragmentary the plant was _pro- visionally placed by him in the tribe Phyllantheae of the Natural Order Euphorbiaceae. An examination of flowering specimens which arrived some years later (1894) from China caused its transference to the Trochodendraceae,* a small family of plants, containing only four genera, all of Asiatic origin. * See Engler & Prantl, ‘‘ Natiirliche Pflanzenfamilien, Nachtrag,” p. 159. 1807. October 2nd, 1906.| PROCEEDINGS. iii In his original description of Eucommia, Prof. Oliver drew attention to the extraordinary abundance of “elastic gum in all the younger tissues, excepting perhaps the wood proper—in the bark, the leaves and petioles and pericarp ; any of these snapped FIG, 2.—Portion of leaf enlarged to show clusters of threads occurring at veins. Fic. 1.—Actual size. across, and the parts drawn asunder, exhibit the silvery sheen of innumerable threads of gum.” (See Figs. z and 2.) When two years later some spirit material of this interesting plant was sent home by Dr. Henry, I was able to make an iv : PROCEEDINGS. [October 2nd, 1906. examination of the cells containing these glistening threads (’92), and found them to be long unbranching cells, originating in pairs in the cortical tissues, and penetrating thence into the neighbouring parts, in the case of the stem, largely into the secondary bast. The fact that the threads are insoluble in alcohol, in acids, and in alkalies, while swelling up in ether and dissolving in chloroform, together with other reactions, led me to the conclusion that they were not of the naturé of gum, but probably some form of caoutchouc or rubber such as is found in the milk-containing cells (latex cells) so characteristic of the family of Euphorbiaceae in which the plant had been placed by Prof. Oliver. When some years later Messrs. Vilmorin, Andrieux & Co., of Paris, had imported some living plants of Eucommia, a re-in- vestigation by Messrs. Dybowski and Fron (’99) resulted in establishing the fact that the elastic threads did not consist of caoutchouc, but of the allied substance gutta percha, which agrees with rubber in many of its chemical and physical proper- ties. A striking difference, however, is the fact that when gutta percha is placed in hot water it can be moulded, and whatever shape is given to it is retained when it becomes cold. Gutta percha is derived mainly from a tree known as Dichopsis gutta (Benth. and Hooker), formerly placed in the genus Isonandra. This tree, known to the Malays as ‘“‘Taban Merah,” is a native of the East Indies, and possesses a milky juice or latex containing the gutta. To obtain it the tree is generally felled and stripped of its bark from which the latex flows out with some difficulty, often accelerated by beating. From the coagulated latex the gutta percha is obtained by a process of purification, consisting largely of boiling it in water. Of course the felling of trees for this purpose is a very destructive method, and seriously endangers the sources of supply. Besides this, only a portion of the gutta is obtained, and that contained in the leaves more particularly is lost. If the leaves of the gutta-percha tree are broken asunder, elastic October 2nd, 1906.| PROCEEDINGS. Vv filaments are seen. of the same kind as those shown in Eucommia, the gutta percha having become solidified. (See figs. I and 2.) Many attempts have been made to extract this solid gutta from the leaves, as they contain about 9 or 10/ (Obach, ’9Q) of this useful substance, and if the whole of it could be extracted the yield would be about 20 times as great as that of the tree trunk, which is sacrificed in the native process. For plantations of gutta-percha trees this would, of course, be of the greatest importance. But the various methods suggested and patented for extract- ing gutta percha from leaves* unfortunately produce a substance which is of less value than the natural product. The chemical processes seem in some way to alter some of its properties, and the gutta percha obtained by chemical means is less lasting, especially when exposed to air and light. This is possibly due to the fact that the gutta is deprived of some of the resinous substances with which it is mixed in nature. Any process which proves successful with the leaves of the gutta percha tree proper should be equally applicable to Eucommia. Indeed, Messrs. Dybowski and Fron have applied the procedure recommended by Jungfleish, which consists in extracting the gutta with toluene, but the yield seems to have been much smaller than in the case of the Dichopsis, only 2°25 7%. The bark, however, is richer than the leaves, and when I experimented with some dried bark in 1892 I obtained a yield of about 3 per cent. Gutta percha has been obtained from a few other trees, notably from the Balata tree (Mimusops ballata), another member of the Sapotaceae, but though more readily obtained, because the latex is more liquid and can be easily obtained by * Eng. Pat. Spec. 4252, March 1892, Dieudonné Rigole. as * », 11166, June 1892, Sérullas. ep en SAR MEMS unssoley Sp te 3 + 17936, July 1897, W. Ramsay. - Ne », 19406, Aug. 1896, Obach. vi PROCEEDINGS. [October 2nd, rgo6. tapping the tree, the gutta percha is less valuable as it is mixed with a larger amount of resinous material. The special interest in Eucommia lies in the fact that unlike the other gutta yielding plants it is capable of growing in a temperate climate. A native of the mountainous regions of China, its foliage is deciduous, and it can stand a fairly severe winter. Messrs. Vilmorin have grown it in the open for some years near Paris, and at Kew it has been successfully grown in the Botanic Gardens. Its appearance here is more of the nature of a large shrub than atree. I have now two plants in my garden at Withington, and they are in a very healthy condition. Should the methods of extraction of gutta percha become more perfected, and a means be found to counteract the defects of the product so obtained, there seems no reason why some of our waste land should not be made to produce this substance for which there is a growing demand, and the natural sources of which are becoming year by year reduced. LITERATURE. BarTHELAT, C. J. (:00). “Les lacticiferes de /?Lucommia ulmotdes.” Journ. de Botanique, vol. 14, p. 55, 1900. Dysowsk1 and G. Fron (99). ‘‘Sur une plante a gutta-percha, susceptible d’étre cultivée sous’ un climat tempeéré.” Compt. rend., vol. 129, p. 558, 1899. OxacH, EuGEeN. ‘“ Die Gutta Percha,” 1899. Ottver, D. (’90) in Hooker’s ‘‘Icones Plantarum,” series 3, vol. 10, t. 1950, 1890. (95). bid., series 4, vol. 4, t. 2361, 1895. SOLEREDER H. ‘‘ Zur Morphologie und Systematik der Gattung Cercidiphyllum.” Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vol. 17, P- 387, 1899. Weiss, F. E. (92). ‘On the Caoutchouc containing cells of Eucommia ulmotdes.” Trans. Linn. Soc. London, vol. 3, part 7, 1892. “Gutta Percha from a Chinese Tree.” Ludlletin of Miscellaneous Information, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, 190%. October 2nd, 1906.| .PROCEEDINGS. vii Mr. C. Gorpon Hewitt, B.Sc., read a paper entitled “A Preliminary Account of the Life-History of the Common House Fly (JZ@usca domestica L.).” General Meeting, October 16th, 1906. The President, Srr WiLL1am H. BAILeEy, in the Chair. Mr. HerBerr Tuomas Homes, M.A. (Cantab.), Zastnor, 77, Wellington Road, Heaton Chapel, was elected an ordinary member of the Society. The President gave notice that, as the result of the ballot taken on the suggested alteration of the hour of the Evening Meetings of the Society, which was 62 for 6 o’clock and 12 for 6-30, he would move, at the next General Meeting, the following resolution :— ‘That in future the time of commencement of the Evening Meetings of the Society be changed from Half-past Six to Six o'clock.” Ordinary Meeting, October 16th, 1906. The President, Str WiLL1AM H. BaILry, in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. The PreEsIDENT exhibited and presented to the Society a framed enlarged photograph of the Statues of Dr. Dalton and Dr. Joule in the entrance hall of the Manchester Town Hall. : viii PROCEEDINGS. [October 16th, 1900. The communication standing in the name of Mr. R. L. TayLor, F.C.S., F.I.C., having been withdrawn, an account was given of the following paper: “A Development of the Atomic Theory which correlates Chemical and Crystalline tructure and leads to a Demonstration of the Nature of Valency,” by Witt1am Bartow, F.G.S., F.C.S., and Prof. W. J. Pore, F.R.S. The primary object of the work now described was to derive an explanation of the numerous crystallographic relationships which exist between chemically related substances and which have not hitherto been embraced by any theoretical scheme. It was found, however, on formulating and developing the very simple fundamental conception stated below concerning the environment of the atoms composing a chemical molecule, that, not only is the relation between the chemical constitution and crystalline form of any compound quantitatively indicated, but chemical valency is clearly demonstrated to be a simple volume relationship. The fundamental conception is the following :-— Each chemical atom present in a compound occupies a distinct portion of space by virtue of an influence which it exerts uniformly in every direction. The domain of the chemical molecule is the space-unit, consisting of one or more of these distinct portions of space, obtained by homogeneously sub- dividing into units a homogeneous structure built up of the spheres of influence of a number of associated atoms. The form of aggregation of the spheres of influence of the atoms thus associated in a molecule constitutes the stereometric arrange- ment of these atoms, and thus the chemical molecule acquires a definite shape. A crystal is the homogeneous structure derived by the symmetrical arrangement in space of an indefinitely large number of spheres of atomic influence. In order to embody this conception and its developments in a concrete form, balls of definite sizes are employed to represent the spheres of influence of the different atoms, and close-packing of these balls in various symmetrical arrangements is resorted to. For the purpose of making models which accurately express the October 16th, 1906.| PROCEEDINGS. ix facts soft indiarubber balls are used, and the assemblages built up from them are compressed until the interstitial space is practically eliminated. This compression does not materially alter the relative dimensions of a close-packed assemblage of elastic spheres as measured between the sphere centres; the equilibrium of the mutual interactions of the elastic deformable spheres of the artificial system represents an equilibrium between attraction and repulsion such as has been usually postulated by molecular physicists. The definite magnitude of sphere used in the case of a given element does not represent the absolute atomic volume of the latter. It stands for the relative atomic volume as compared with the atomic volumes of other elements present in the same compound ; this relative volume is found to be almost constant throughout series of allied compounds. The development of the above conception of molecular con- stitution leads to the conclusion that in a crystalline structure the component spheres of atomic influence form a homogeneous and close-packed arrangement, that is, a homogeneous artange- ment in which, if hard undeformable spheres are employed, the maximum number of contacts and the minimum proportion of interstitial space occurs. Further, it is found that in homo- geneous close-packed assemblages of the elastic spheres of various sizes, one particular kind of component sphere may be homo- geneously replaced throughout the assemblage by other spheres, the total volume of which is equal to that of the displaced spheres in such a way that close-packing is re-established by the occurrence of a slight shear or distortion of the assemblage. It thus appears that the volumes of the spheres of influence of the atoms composing a molecule are approximately directly propor- tional to the chemical valencies of the component atoms. It therefore follows that if, in a series of chemically related crystalline substances, the axial ratios, a@:4:¢, and the inter- axial angles, a, and y, have been suitably selected, the relative molecular dimensions, «:y:z, or the “equivalent parameters,” are simple functions of the crystallographic dimensions and the sum of the valencies of the atoms composing the molecules. pd PROCEEDINGS. [October 16th, 1906. The latter quantity, W, is termed the “ valency volume,” and the equivalence parameters are :— 24 peas El aw aa Thana ORE EO. Z=CV. J ¢sina sin § sin y 5 As an indication of the value of the method of calculation here indicated may be shown the simple interpretation which it affords of the long known, but hitherto unexplained, crystallo- graphic relations existing between the so-called humite minerals, namely :— Chondrodite, Mg,(SiO,)., 2Mg(F)(OH)... Monosymmetric. elites Mic=(S1@,), 912 Mic (i) (OED) se eee Orthorhombic. Clinohumite, Mg,(SiO,),, 2Mg(F)(OH) ..Monosymmetric. Prolectite Mesi®,, 2iMia() (Oi) eee Monosymmetric. Horstenite,, MesSi@) ga.) ces: eesccee ee Weaeatice Orthorhombic. The crystallographic data for, and the equivalence para- meters of, these minerals are given in the following table :— W a REG Rs dialing agg = 2/W Chondrodite) 38 | 108630: 1 : 3°14472 | 2°4249: eee 70199 | 018473 Humiter 723 54 | 1°08021 : 1 : 4140334 | 2°4278: 2°2475 : 9°8965 | 0'18327 Clinohumite} 70 | 1°08028 : 1: 5°65883 | 2°4349 : 2°2540 :12°7547 | O°18221 Prolectite 2:22 Observed.. T0803) 2:1: 1:8002 12:2577.35 22102: Aaoog Calculated) 10822) Jia Os5Oo to 4202 2 2440) eG Forsterite ...; 16 | 7 Observed... (|0°9296 :I:11714 | 2°4492:2°2769: 2°8691 Calculated 0°9240 :1:1°1804 | 2742927272446: 2°8674 “at October 16th, 1906.| PROCEEDINGS. xi It is clear that. in passing from chondrodite to humite by addition of the increment Mg.SiO,, the latter is introduced into the assemblage as a layer parallel to the axial directions a and 4, and perpendicular to the axis ¢, and that this process is repeated in passing from humite to clinohumite. The dimensions of this increment layer agree closely with those of the mineral forsterite, and a similar close agreement is found between the calculated and observed dimensions of the layer which may be regarded as the foundation of the series and has the composition of prolectite. The method of treatment here adopted is applicable to doubie salts and to substances containing solvent of crystallisa- tion in general, and shows that such molecular complexes are to be regarded as close-packed assemblages of the two or more component molecular complexes. Lug. 2. The problem involved in determining the configuration ot the benzene molecule becomes practically determinate when the above methods are applied to the crystalline form and chemical properties of the hydrocarbon. The configuration of benzene which is thus arrived at is depicted in Migs. 1 and 2, which represent the plan and elevation respectively of the molecule. The dimensions of the close-packed homogeneous assemblage built up of units such as these are in harmony with the equiva- lence parameters deduced from the crystalline hydrocarbon and its per-halogen derivatives, namely :— Calelgn) Hag) 8 BES AIOle Reasie & oa (lone CoCle ; po) Ss OHIO) 8 BPESOA Sey S B= G7 So), CsBre, fo) = VOM BENCH AUIS & (ae aie xii PROCEEDINGS. [October 16th, 1900. In like manner configurations are assigned to the molecules of naphthalene, anthracene, triphenylamine, the di-hydroxyben- zenes, and a number of triphenylmethane derivatives (see Zrans. Chem. Soz., 1906, 1675). Just as the ordinary aspect of the valency law is exactly analogous to one geometrical property of close-packed assem- blages of elastic spheres, so also is multivalency precisely analogous to another geometrical property of such assemblages. It has thus not been found necessary to assign different volumes to the spheres of influence of ter- and quinque-valent nitrogen, the fundamental valency of three determining the volume of the sphere of influence of the element. The paper was illustrated by a number of models devised by the writers. General Meeting, October 30th, 1906. Mr. CHarRLes BAILEY, M.Sc., F.L.S., in the Chair. The PREsIDENT moved on behalf of the Council, and Mr. R. L. Taytor seconded the following resolution :— ‘That in future the time of commencement of the Evening Meetings of the Society be changed from Half-past Six to Six o’clock.” It was carried unanimously. Mr. CHarLes RENOLD, Engineer, Graduate of Cornell University, Ithaca, Prestnall Hey, Heaton Mersey; Miss IDA SMEDLEY, D.Sc., Assistant Lecturer in Chemistry in the Univer- sity of Manchester; Mr. H. F. Cowarp, M.Sc., Assistant Lecturer in Chemistry in the University of Manchester ; Mr. E. C. Epcar, D.Sc., Assistant Lecturer and Demonstrator in Chemistry in the University of Manchester ; and Miss GRACE WIGGLESWORTH, M.Sc., Sparth Mount, Heaton JVorris, were elected ordinary members of the Society. October 30th, 1906.| PROCEEDINGS. xiii Ordinary Meeting, October 30th, 1906. Mr. FRANCIS NICHOLSON, HeAS ine ther Chair, The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. Dr. W. E. Hovis, F.R.S.E., communicated the following papers by Mr. S. A. Neave, M.A., B.Sc., Naturalist to the North-east Rhodesia Geodetic Survey :— “A Journey to North-east Rhodesia during 1904 and 1905,” and “On a Collection of Birds from North- east Rhodesia.” A number of specimens of the skins of birds from the Manchester Museum were exhibited. General Meeting, November 13th, 1906. Mr. CHar.es BarLey, M.Sc., F.L.S., in the Chair. Mr. KenneTH FiIsHER, B.A. Oxon., Ph.D. Jena, Research Student in the University of Manchester, 7%e Lilacs, Timperley, and Mr. Davip M.S. Watson, of the University of Manchester, 400, Moss Lane East, Manchester, were elected ordinary members of the Society. Ordinary Meeting, November 13th, 1906. Mr. CHARLES BaiLey, M.Sc., F.L.S., in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. Mr. R. L. TayLor drew attention to the remarkable lumi- nosity produced by the rubbing or knocking together of various forms of silica. A correspondent in a local paper pointed this xiv PROCEEDINGS. [November 13th, 1906. out some little time ago, as a property peculiar to the white pebbles found on the coast at Whitby. All quartz pebbles show it remarkably well, and practically all the forms of silica which have been tried —including agate, chalcedony, rock crystal, opal, flint, &c. Smosth surfaces are not so effective as slightly roughened ones. When the substance used is translucent, it is quite lighted up at each stroke. Mr. Joseph Burton finds that quartz which has been fused is very effective. It is somewhat vesicular, and of lower specific gravity than ordinary rock crystal, and rubs away more easily. There is no doubt that the lumi- nosity is connected in some way with the breaking away of small particles, mostly in the form of dust. Mr. Burton also find- that whereas ordinary felspar only shows this property in a very small degree, the same substance previously heated almost to fusion shows it almost as well as quartz. Common glass does not show it, but a specimen of glass “frit,” rich in lead, and very hard does to a slight extent. This curious luminosity may be partly due to the hardness of the material, but that it is not entirely so is shown. by the fact that whereas a slight luminosity is shown when a piece of corundum or a piece of native emery is rubbed against a piece of silica, there is none whatever when two pieces of corundum or two pieces of native emery are knocked together. ; There is a curious smell produced by the impact of any of these bodies which become luminous, a smell which has been compared to that of ozone. Mr. T. L. Phipson, in a book on Phosphorescence, published in 1870, says that he has shown that, in the case of quartz, ozone is produced. But Mr. Taylor has not been able to verify that observation. Mr. F. Jones and Mr. Burton also made careful tests for ozone, and both failed to obtain any evidence of its presence. Miss M. McNicot, B.Sc., read a paper entitled ‘The Proembryo and Bulbils of Lamprothamnus alopecuroides (Braun).” This plant, which occurs in various countries of Europe and also in Africa, is characterised by the possession of November 13th, 1906.| PROCEEDINGS. XV unicellular bulbils or tubercles, formed by the transformation of rhizoids. Sometimes a sequence of two or even three tubercles may be seen. The tubercles, which are filled with starch, provide a food supply for the growth of new shoots: the nuclei of these tubercles are fragmented. Proembryos are formed in large numbers from the rhizoid nodes, but more especially from those nodes which bear tubercles. The cells forming the apex of the proembryo (Vorkeimspitze) become large and conspicuous; in them, fragmented nuclei of various shapes can be observed. Sometimes in addition to the rhizoid node of the proembryo, formed as in Chara by the cutting off of peripheral cells, there occurs below this node an interposed node from which spring rhizoids only. This interposed node differs from the rhizoid node proper in the manner of its formation, the lateral rhizoids being formed in a tuft on one side of the proembryo. Transitions from a true rhizoid formation to a proembryo also occur. In the discussion which followed, Mr. CHARLES BaiLry gave an account of his collecting, in 1881, a large number of luxuriant examples of this species, in one of three salterns filled with brackish water, and situate near the site of Newtown, an extinct town in the Isle of Wight, near Yarmouth, represented in Parliament by two members from the days of Elizabeth down to 1832. In the saltern in question some of the plants were found two feet or more in height, and dried examples were exhibited to the members present. ‘The same specimens are referred to in the Proceedings of the Society for the Session 1881-82, vol. 21, page 74. A living example of the plant was sent to Kew Gardens at the time, but it was promptly purloined. In later years the plant had been unsuccessfully sought for in the Newtown salterns, and when he visited the same spot in the year 1888 he found that it had completely disappeared through the conversion of the old salterns into an oyster park, its habitat being completely destroyed by the admission of sea-water. In more recent years it had been found growing at Poole, in Dorset, so that the species is not quite lost to the country. xvi PROCEEDINGS. [Movember 27th, 1906. General Meeting, November 27th, 1906. Professor A. SCHUSTER, Sc.D., Ph.D., F.R.S., in the Chair. Mr. NorMAn Smith, D.Sc., Assistant Lecturer in Chemistry in the Manchester University, and Mr. THomas ALFRED CowarD, F.Z.S., Brentwood, Bowdon, were elected ordinary members of the Society. Ordinary Meeting, November 27th, 1g06. Professor A. SCHUSTER, Sc.D., Ph.D., F.R.S., in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. The following were among the recent donations to the Society’s Library:—‘‘ De Uvtvinding der Verrekijkers,” door C. de Waard Jr. (8vo., ’s-Gravenhage, 1906), presented by the Zeeuwsch Genootschap der Wetenschappen ; “ Te Opere dt Galileo Galilet,” ed. naz., vols. 17, 18 (4to., Firenze, 1906), presented by the R. Ministero della Istruzione Pubblica ; “4 Catalogue of the Aburit Gardens,” by A. E. Evans (8vo, London, 1906), presented by the Liverpool University Institute of Commercial Research in the Tropics; ‘‘ Geschiedenis der systematische Mineralogie,” door E. H. M. Beekman (8vo., Den Haag, (1906]), presented by the Technische Hoogeschool te Delft; “ Reduction of Greenwich Meteorological Observations,” pt. 4 (4to., Edinburgh, 1906), “‘ Catalogue of Stars for the Equinox 1900°'0 from Observations made at the Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope, 1900-1904” (4to., Edinburgh, 1906), and “ Catalogue of 8.560 Astrographic Standard Stars... for the Equinox rgoo (4to., London, 1906), presented by the Royal Observatory, Greenwich. HENRY Wirpp, Disc, DCL, FIRSs: sreadimamspapes entitled “On some Points of Chemical Philosophy in- volved in the Discovery of Radium and the Properties of its Combinations.” Mr. J. Cosmo Me vit, M.A,, F.L.S., read a paper written in conjunction with Mr. R. Standen, entitled ‘‘On a Collection November 27th, 1906.| PROCEEDINGS. XVil of Land and Freshwater Mollusca collected by Mr. S. A. Neave in North-east Rhodesia.” Specimens of the shells of a number of the species described were exhibited. The communication standing in the name of Dr. F. W. GAMBLE was postponed to the next meeting on December 11th. Ordinary Meeting, December 11th, 1906. Mr. Francis NIcHoLson, F.Z.S., in the Char. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. Dr. F. W. GaMBLE presented a short communication on the discovery by Biitschli of strontium sulphate as the basis of the skeleton in certain Radiolaria (Acantharia). Up to the present time the nature of the Acantharian skeleton was a disputed subject. Jchannes Miiller, who first described it, regarded its basis as siliceous. Haeckel subsequently carried out a series of tests that seemed to establish an organic horny substance as the chief component of the skeleton, and to this he gave the name Acanthin. Since this analysis has been universally accepted, it seems desirable to record Biitschli’s results, which are both con- tradictory to Haeckel’s, and apparently conclusive from the convergent and confirmatory outcome of the different tests employed by him. Working with material brought back by the German Antarctic expedition, and also upon Mediterranean Acantharia, Btitschli has shewn that strontium sulphate is the material of which the complex rods and spicules of these Radiolaria are composed. This is the first time that strontium has been described in animal tissues, and coincides with the recent discovery of barium sulphate in certain other deep-sea Protozoa (Xenyophophoridz). Professor I’. E. Weiss, D.Sc., F.L.S., read a paper entitled “The Parichnos in the Lepidodendracez.” Miss KatHaRINE H. Cowarb, B.Sc., read a paper (com- municated by Professor F. E. Weiss, D.Sc., F.L.S.) entitled, XVill PROCEEDINGS. [December 11th, 1906. “On the Structure of Syringodendron, the Bark of Sieillaria.” General Meeting, January 15th, 1907. The President, Sir WiLLIAM H. BaILey, in the Cham. Mr H.-C.) Hy Carpenter, M.A., Ph.D: Brofessonmoan Metallurgy in the University of Manchester, was elected an ordinary member of the Society. Ordinary Meeting, January 15th, 1907. The President, Sir WiLt1amM H. BalLety, in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. The following were among the recent accessions to the Society’s Library :—‘ Special Reports (of the Department of Commerce and Labour, Washington). The Blind and the Deaf, 7900,” (4to., Washington, 1906) presented by the Bureau of the Census of Washington ; “‘ Report on the Boundary Survey between British Bechuanaland and German S.W., Africa,” executed by Lieut.-Col. Laffan...and others (fol., Berlin, 1906) presented by the Cape of Good Hope Observatory ; ‘‘ Astro- graphic Catalogue 19000. Oxford Section Dec.+ 24° to + 32°...” [prepared] under the direction of H. H. Turner...vol. 1, (4to., Edinburgh, 1906) presented by the Oxford University Observa- tory ; “ Bibliographia Geologica,” par M. Mecurlon ...Sér. A, tome ix. (8vo., Bruxelles, 1906) purchased ; “ Gutsherrlich-bauer- liche Verhalinisse in der Ober-Lausitz”...von F. Moeschler (8vo., Gorlitz, 1906), “‘ Codex Diplomaticus Lusatiae Supertorts tt....” von Dr. R. Jecht, Hft. 2 (8vo. Gorlitz, 1906) presented by the Oberlausitzische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Mr. C. E. STROMEYER, M.Inst.C.E., read a paper entitled, ““The Grouping of the Chemical Elements.” The reading of Mr. A. D. DarpisHIRE’s paper entitled, ““Some Tables for Explaining the Nature of Statistical Correlation ” was postponed until the next Meeting. . 4 SD ee January 29th, 1907.| PROCEEDINGS. XIX Ordinary Meeting, January 29th, 1907. Mr. Francis NicHo.son, F.Z.S., in the chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. Mr. C. L. Barnes, M.A., called attention to passages in Dante which seem in some degree to foreshadow the lately-dis- covered “speaking arc,” exhibited by Mr. W. Duddell in his concluding lecture to juveniles at the Royal Institution. In Canto xxvi of the “Inferno,” Dante and Virgil have reached the eighth circle of the abyss, and see before them a valley dotted with a multitude of flames, which the poet compares to the fireflies so familiar on warm evenings in Italy. One of these flames is double horned, and conceals the shades of Ulysses and Diemede. Virgil commands it to approach, whereupon Of the old flame forthwith the greater horn Began to roll, murmuring, as a fire | That labours with the wind ; thus to and fro Wagging the top, as a tongue uttering sounds, Threw out its voice and spake. From another flame, bidden in like manner to aan near, sounds issue forth which are compared to the groans of the inventor and first victim of the bull of Phalaris. These sounds, While no way they found, Nor avenue immediate through the flame, Into its language turned the dismal words. But soon as they had won their passage forth Up from the point, which vibrating obeyed Their motion at the tongue.... they become articulate, and in a speech of some length Count Guido da Montefeltro relates the story of his misdeeds. Mr. D. M. S. Watson read a paper entitled, “On a Con- fusion of two species of Lepidodendron (L. Harcourtit, Witham, and Z. Hickit, sp. nov.), under Z. Aarcourtit, Witham, in Williamson’s XIXth Memoir, with a description of Z. Aickii, sp. nov.” ey xX PROCEEDINGS. [ /auuary 29th, 1907. Dr. W. E. Hoyte, F.R.S.E., communicated a paper by Mr. R. C. Wroucuton, of the British Museum (Natural History), entitled “On a Collection of Mammals made by Mr.S. A. Neave in Rhodesia, North of the Zambesi, with Field Notes by the Collector.” Ordinary Meeting, February t2th, 1907. Mr. Francis NICHOLSON, F.Z.S., in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. The following were among the recent accessions to the Society’s Library :—“ Licensing and Temperance in Sweden, Vorway, and Denmark,” by E. A. Pratt (8vo., London, 1907), presented by the author; ‘“ France tm LVorth Africa, 1906,” by T. W. Balch (la. 8vo., Philadelphia, 1906), presented by the author; ‘‘ Zhe Record of the Celebration of the 200th Anniversary of the Birth of Benjamin Lranklin... April 17-21, 1906” (4to, Philadelphia, 1906), presented by the American Philosophical Society; ‘‘ Zhe British Tuntcata...” By J. Alder and A. Hancock...vol. 2 (8vo., London, 1907), purchased from the Ray Society. Mr. C. S. ALLottT, M.Inst.C.E., and Mr. D. L. CHAPMAN, M.A., were nominated auditors of the Society’s accounts for the Session 1906-07. Dr. W. E. Hoyts, F.R.S.E., exhibited a coloured sketch of a specimen of Lezyx splendens, recently presented to the Man- chester Museum by Mr. W. Vernon. It is of interest as having been taken just on the boundary of the British Marine Area, as defined by the Rev. A. M. Norman, F.R.S. It was taken by the trawler “‘ Evaline,” in lat. 49° 10’ N., long. 11° W., at a depth of from 170 to 200 fathoms. The species seems to have been first recorded from Madeira, and is known from the coasts of Spain and Portugal. Mr. Joun R. RacpaAte exhibited and described a number of — February rath, 1907.| PROCEEDINGS. XXi arrow heads and obsidian chippings found by him in an Indian encampment, June, 1906, on Gold Hill, Cascade Range, near Eugene, Oregon, U.S.A., also specimens from the obsidian cliff in the Yellowstone Park, Montana. Some modern and prehistoric pottery, a cinerary urn, and stone axe-head from the old Aztec ruins and the Indian pueblo of Acoma, New Mexico, and many beautiful specimens of petrified wood were also shewn, these latter from the petrified. forest of Adamana Apache, County Arizona, where there are thousands of acres in places thickly strewn with trunks and segments of trees, the ground being covered with chip-like fragments of agatized wood. Lantern views of the forests and the natural log bridge, 200 feet long, which spans a chasm 60 feet wide, and other interesting views of Indians and scenery in New Mexico, Arizona, and other parts of the States, taken during a visit made in April and May, 1906, were thrown on the screen. Mr. J. E. Petavet, M.Sc., gave a short description of various forms of apparatus which he has designed for experi- mental work at very high gaseous pressures, and mostly in use at the Physical Laboratories of the Manchester University. The details of construction were illustrated by numerous lantern slides. Special attention was paid to an improved hydraulic pump, capable of adaptation to many uses, and attaining a working pressure of 2,000 atmospheres. A method which has proved satisfactory for compressing pure gases by forcing glycerine into a cylinder containing the gas was also fully explained. The pressures dealt with ranged from 3,000 to 30,000 lbs. per square inch. Mr. ©. (G. Hewrirn, B:sc., read) a paper by Mr, A. 1, DarBIsHIRE, M.A., entitled “Some Tables for explaining the Nature of Statistical Correlation.” coal PROCEEDINGS. [February 13th, 1907. Special Meeting, February 18th, 1907. The President, Sir WiLL1AM H. BaiLry, in the Chair. The Wilde Lecture, on “The Structure of Metals,” was delivered by J. A. Ewinc, Esq., LL.D., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E., Director of Naval Education to the Admiralty. Ordinary Meeting, February 26th, 1907. Professor H. B. Dixon, M.A., F.R.S., in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. Professor H. B. Dixon, made reference to the recent death of an Honorary Member, Professor Henri Moissan, whose fame, he said, rested on his being the first to isolate fluorine and to prepare artificial diamonds. Dr. R. S. Hutton added that Moissan had more than once expressed his appreciation of the honour conferred upon him by the Society in electing him an honorary member at a time when his work had not obtained general recognition. Mr. Tuomas Kay, of Stockport, read the following com- munication :— I have to shew you a piece of new red sandstone of this district picked up above the clay in the camp site of Mancunium which is somewhat remarkable, for it was picked up out of the black soil and rubbish dug out of the place where the Roman Vase was found—and it arrested my attention by its distinct character from all the other stones which were of a gravelly nature in the heap. Only after washing and scrubbing it was its true nature discovered. At first I thought it was part of a whetstone, a sharpener for swords and polisher of metal, as I find that the fine particles form an excellent scouring medium. February 26th, 1907.| PROCEEDINGS. xxiii It looks as if it was only the half of a hone but if so I have not been able to find the other piece. It is remarkable as being a piece of new red sandstone with Encrinite stems on and in it. It seems to be from the very bottom of the sea with a layer of lime forming, and particles of Encrinites, washed into the sand from which they probably grew, but there are no traces of roots or lily heads of the crinoide. It is rather curious, too, that the line of stratification of the rock is at right angles to the lime base, but this may have been a sun-crack made up by a cementing material. There are evidences of the clay outside the Western rampart having been used for making bricks by the broken material lying where the old kilns were placed. There is also evidence of red sand having been brought into the camp, probably to dust the soft bricks when placing them to dry, and although this specimen of solidified sand containing the Encrinite stems was some distance away and amidst the débris excavated from beside the Roman Vase, it may be that this piece of stone was thrown out and found its place above or about the said vase at the time of brick making. In this case there can be nothing particular about its association with the Romans, except its peculiarity in being the only specimen of the kind I have seen or heard of, and the fact that there is no specimen in the Museum of the Victoria University of a like character, z.e., of Encrinites in the new red sandstone. I suppose fossils in the new red sandstone of this district are extremely rare except on the East side at Heaton Norris where some bivalve casts have been found, specimens of which are to be seen in the Museum. Only the tracks of Batrachians are common on the Western shores of the Red Sandstone about Lymm, but no fossils unless the pseudo-morphs of salt crystals can be so termed which have been found in the Ship Canal excavations at Warburton. From the white calcareous deposit on the stone it would seem that this was taken from the extreme edge of the lime basin in which it grew and that the drift of the new red sand XXIV PROCEEDINGS. [February 26th, 1907. was blown into the lime basin, probably at Ardwick. The particles of sand constituting the stone are extremely fine and are aggregated by lime infiltration and the shapes of Encrinites have been filled in with sparkling crystals. In ancient days Britain was celebrated for its tin and it is thought that when British tin was first alloyed with the copper of Cyprus it marked the commencement of the era of what is known in History as the Bronze Age. We also know that the Romans obtained pearls from the Conway Estuary, and there can be little doubt that in their following they had geologists to seek out the mineral wealth of the countries which they conquered. It is interesting, therefore, to imagine some ancient mineralogist picking up this curious stone, if only to see of what these glistening crystals were composed, and leaving it beside the vase in Roman Mancunium of which latter there can be little reasonable doubt that it appertains to the Roman times in Britain. Mr. CHARLES OLDHAM exhibited a melanic example of the Brown rat (dus decumanus, Pallas), from County Wexford. The black form of our common Brown Rat was, in 1837, referred to a distinct species—JZ. Azbernicus—by Thompson, the Irish naturalist, who believed it to be allied to the Black Rat, M. rattus, L. This opinion was not shared by Blasius and other mammalogists, but much uncertainty obtained as to the true affinities of the animal until the publication of a paper by Messrs. Eagle Clarke and Barrett Hamilton in the Zoo/ogist for 1891. The authors showed conclusively that the so-called Irish Rat was merely a melanic variety of JZ. decumanus. It is subject to considerable variation ; in many examples there is a white spot on the chest, and the fur of the belly is sometimes rusty brown in the median line. In the specimen exhibited there were many silvery white hairs in the coal black fur of the upper parts. The animal has a wide distribution in Ireland, is found locally in the outer Hebrides and in_Norfolk and other February 26th, 1907.| PROCEEDINGS. XXV East Anglian counties. It has also been recorded from Lundy Island and Devonshire. Mr. H. J. Woopatt, described a curious case of the freezing of water in a bottle during the recent cold weather. Mr. Henry SIDEBOTTOM read a paper entitled, ‘‘ Report on the Recent Foraminifera from the coast of the Island of Delos (Grecian Archipelago) Part IV.” Drawings of some of the more interesting species were exhibited, and mounted specimens were shown under the microscope. Miss MADELINE Carson, B.Sc., read a paper communicated by Professor F. E. Weiss, D.Sc, F.LS., entitled, “‘ The Leaves of Passerina.” The Passerinze belong to the natural order Thymelzacez. These plants inhabit the warm dry regions of Egypt, S. Africa, and the Mediterranean. They are common on the sand hills near the coast, and always live under conditions in which there is a difficulty of obtaining water. In order to combat against this, they are specially modified. The leaf surface is reduced, often the leaves are imbricating. They are provided with a very thick cuticle, have the edges inrolled, and the stomates are found only on the inner surface. They are further protected by a covering of hairs, The chief object of the study of these leaves was to discover whether the epidermal cells contained mucilage or not. Van Lieghem (’93) after an exhaustive study classified these plants according to their anatomical structure. He bases his classifi- cation partly upon the fact that some genera contain mucila- ginous Cells in the epidermis, while others do not. Among the latter he includes all species of Passervzna. Karl Supprian (94) in his ‘‘Beitrage zur Kenntniss den Thymeliaceze und Penciaceze” finds mucilage in the epidermal cells of Passerina ericoides, but in no other species. In Passerina filiformis and in Passerina hirsuta, I found that in many of the epidermal cells a portion was cut off from the rest by a cellulose wall. The upper portion contained tannin XXVI PROCEEDINGS. [February 26th, 1907. and probably mucilaginous sap, while the lower portion con- sisted of hard stratified mucilage. In the other species examined Passerina ericotdes and Passerina rigida, I found no trace of separation of the epidermal cells into a striated and non-striated ortion. The whole epidermal cell stained with mucilage stains and tannin stains. Since mucilage and tannin both act in the same way towards methylene blue, and since it is impossible to separate tannin and mucilage, the evidence for the presence of mucilage in these species is not perfectly conclusive. As, however, mucilage is without doubt found in some Passerine, its absence is not characteristic of the group, and therefore its presence or absence can no longer be used as a basis for classification of the Thymelzeaceze. Ordinary Meeting, March 12th, 1907. Professor W. BoyD Dawkins, D.Sc., F.R.S., in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. Mr. C. L. Barnes, M.A., was nominated auditor of the Society’s accounts for the Session 1906-07 to fill the vacancy caused by the death of Mr. C. S. ALLorrT. Mr. CHARLES BaILey, M.Sc., F.L.S., exhibited a small slab of dark-coloured oak timber, which had formed a portion of the lower end of a thick staff, employed in a metal works for stirring up molten tin to ensure the better admixture of the metal. The tin had infiltrated into the wood, but while it had filled up the pores, or vessels of the timber only to a limited extent, it had become concentrated in the medullary rays, so that in transverse section these rays were transformed into thick lines of solid white metal. Mr. Bailey was unable to account for the selective affinity of the metal for the densest portion of the timber; there was no visible trace of the wood cells of the rays, as they had been completely absorbed by the tin. ‘The dark colour of the wood March 12th, 1907.| PROCEEDINGS. XXVil would be due to carbonisation produced by the fluid metal, but still more to the oil employed in the melting and mixing process. Dr. F. W. GAMBLE read a paper written in conjunction with Dr. F. Kerepie, and entitled “The Occurrence and Significance of Symbiotic Corpuscles in the Lower Animals.” The paper described the occurrence of symbiotic coloured corpuscles in the bodies of lower animals. It dealt in detail with a single case, that of the simple Turbellarian worm Convo- duta roscoffensis, and discussed the evidence for describing the green cells of the animals as an “infection” by a flagellated vegetal organism. The nature and life-history of this organism were described, and the significance of the association of this organism and of the animal’ Conxvoluta was discussed. At this point the Chair was taken by Dr. W. E. HOYLE, E.R.S.E. . Mr. Francis NICHOLSON, F.Z.S., then exhibited some bones of the Great Auk from Funk Island, Newfoundland, and read the following account of them :— The bones exhibited on the table are those of the now probably extinct species of bird, the Great Auk, or Gare-fowl, Alca impennis of Linnaeus. They were presented to the late Sir Francis H. Evans, Bart., about twenty years ago, when he was on a visit to Newfoundland, by a man who had obtained them from Funk Island. This island is a flat granite rock, a little over a mile in length and a quarter of a mile in breadth, which lies about 32 miles from the most eastern headlands of Newfoundland. Its southern, south-eastern, and south-western sides are bounded by cliffs from 30 to 50 feet in height, whilst the remaining northern and north-eastern portions shelve gradually towards the sea. At no point is there anything like a beach to divide the solid rock from the water. There are seven bones in this collection consisting of—r base of skull ; 1 Clavicle ; 1 Sacral Vertebrze ; 2 right Humeri; 2 _ XXViil PROCEEDINGS. [March 12th, 1907. right Tibiz. From the foregoing it is evident we have the remains of more than one bird. Unfortunately I am not in a position to give any further particulars of these bones as Sir Francis Evans sent them to me only a few days before he died in January last, and they were unaccompanied by a letter, though he had actually started to write one, as it was on his desk after his death. I do not propose to give an extended description or detailed. account of the life-history of the Great Auk, on this occasion, as it is hardly necessary, seeing that it has been very ably and fully done elsewhere by numerous writers. A few remarks, however, about this most interesting bird may be welcome to: those amongst us who have not made a study of Ornithology. In size the Gare-fowl was hardly less than a tame goose, and in appearance it much resembled its smaller and surviving relative the Razor-bill, A/a ¢orda, but the glossy black of its head was varied by a large patch of white occupying nearly all the space between the eye and the bill, in place of the Razor-bill’s thin white line. The most striking characteristic of the Gare- fowl, however, was the comparatively abortive condition of its. wings, the distal portions of which, though the bird was just about twice the linear dimensions of the Razor-bill, were almost exactly of the same size as in that species—proving, if more direct evidence were wanting, its inability to fly. The most prevalent misconception concerning the Great Auk is the notion it was a bird possessing a very high northern range, and consequently was to be looked for by Arctic explorers. How this error arose would take long to tell, but the fact remains that there is little or no evidence that it has occurred within the Arctic Circie. Its. principal haunts were certain islands in the neighbourhood of Newfoundland, others near the east coast of Greenland, and some skerries off the south-west of Iceland, whence the last recorded specimens “in the flesh” were obtained in the year 1844. These bones I have had the pleasure of presenting to the Manchester Museum at the Victoria University. ~ March 26th, 1907.| PROCEEDINGS. XXiX Ordinary Meeting, March 26th, 1907. Mr. Francis NicHoxson, F.Z.S., in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. Mr. T. Tuorp, F.R.A.S., made a short communication on an apparent case of gaseous absorption caused by the action of a few milligrams of radium bromide on the sides of a glass tube containing the radium. At first there was an expansion but later on, as the glass turned purple, a contraction took place to less than the original volume. Further investigations are being made, the results of which will be communicated to the Society. Dr. W. E. Hovis, F.R.S.E., communicated a paper by Mr. G. A. BouLENGER, F.R.S., of the British Museum, entitled “Qn a Collection of Fishes, Batrachians, and Reptiles made by Mr. S. A. Neave in Rhodesia, North of the Zambesi, with Field Notes by the Collector.” An account was then given of the following paper : “A New Class of Organo-Metallic Compounds. Trimethylplatinimethyl Hydroxide and its Salts.” By WILLIAM Jackson Pops, F.R.S., and STANLEY JoHN PEACHEY. No alkyl compounds of metals belonging to groups 1 and 8 of the periodic table have hitherto been described. The authors find that the chlorides, or in some cases, the oxides, of iron, cobalt, nickel, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, osmium, iridium and platinum, belonging to group 8, and of gold, belonging to group I, react vigorously with magnesium methyl iodide. Trimethylplatinimethy! iodide, (CH,),Pt.I, is formed by the action of platinic chloride dissolved in ether upon magnesium methyl iodide in ethereal benzene solution; after treating with water and extracting with benzene the benzene solution yields XXX PROCEEDINGS. [March 26th, 7907. the new compound on evaporation. It crystallises in straw- yellow plates, is not volatile, and decomposes on heating with slight explosion ; it is very stable towards reagents, and is not attacked in the cold by strong caustic alkalies, alkali sulphides, or by nitric, hydrochloric or sulphuric acids. It is not further acted on by magnesium methyl iodide. On boiling for several hours with silver hydroxide in a moist mixture of benzene and acetone, it is converted into ¢vimethylplatinimethyl hydroxide, (CH,),Pt.OH. This substance is insoluble in water, gives no alkaline reaction with litmus, and crystallises in colourless rhombic dodecahedra belonging to the cubic system. Trimethylplatinimethyl nitrate, (CH,),Pt.NO,, obtained by dissolving the hydroxide in nitric acid, crystallises in colourless plates and is freely soluble in water. On adding an alkali chloride to its aqueous solution, ¢7tmethylplatinimethyl chloride, (CH,),Pt.Cl, is precipitated. This salt crystallises from chloro- form in colourless rhombic dodecahedra belonging to the cubic system. In a similar manner a number of other salts have been prepared, including the dvomzde and the cyanide; the latter is hydrolysed on heating with caustic potash with evolution of ammonia. Ordinary Meeting, April 9th, 1907. Mr. ArTHUR McDovuceatt, B.Sc., in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. The following were among the recent accessions to the Society’s Library :—‘‘ Reports of the Mediter- ranean Fever Commission, Part 5” (8vo., London, 1907), pre- sented by the Royal Society of London ; ‘‘.4 Chemical Conception of the Ether,” by D. Mendeleeff (8vo., London, 1904), presented by Dr. Henry Wilde, F.R.S. ; “ Prelzminary Report on the Rossland, B.C., Mining District,’ by R. W. Brock (8vo., Ottawa, 1906), Apri gth, 1907.| PROCEEDINGS. xa “ Report on the Chibougamau Mining Region tin the northern part of the Province of Quebec,” by A. P. Low (8vo., Ottawa, 1906), “ Section of Mines: Annual Report for roog” (8vo., Ottawa, 1906), presented by the Geological Survey of Canada ; “ Giwures completes,” de J. C. Galissard de Marignac, 2 Tomes. (4to., Geneve, etc., [1907]), presented by the Société de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle de Genéve ; ‘‘ Ballistic E’xperiments from 1864-1880,” by F. Bashforth (8vo., Cambridge, 1907), presented by the author; ‘ Astronomische Leobachtungen an der k. k. Sternwarte su Prag in den Jahren, 1g00-1904...,’ von Dr. L. Weinek (4to., Prag, 1907), presented by the K. k. Stern- warte zu Prag. ; “Ax Investigation of Evolution in Chrysomelid Beetles of the genus Leptinotarsa,” by W. L. Tower (la. 8vo., Washington, 1906), presented by the Carnegie Institution of Washington ; “ Dal Canzoniere di Béranger,” traduzione di D. Mancini (4to., Terni, 1907), presented by Prof. D. Mancini ; “ Maize, Cocoa and Rubber: Hints on their Production in W. Africa,” by Viscount Mountmorres (8vo., Liverpool, 1907), presented by the Liverpool University Institute of Commercial Research in the Tropics; and ‘Over de Exhaust-werking bij Locomotieven,” |by| F. C. Huygen (4to., Rotterdam, [1907]), presented by the Technische Hoogeschool te Delft. Mr. CHARLES BaiLEy, M.Sc., F.L.S., read a paper, entitled “Further Notes on the Adventitious Flora of the Sandhills of St. Anne’s-on-the-Sea.” Annual General Meeting, April 23rd, 1907. The President, Sir WiLL1Am H. BalILey, in the Chair. The Annual Report of the Council and the Statement of Accounts were presented, and it was resolved :—“ That the Annual Report, together with the Statement of Accounts, be adopted, and that they be printed in the Society’s Proceedings.” Xx PROCEEDINGS. [Aprzl 23rd, 1907. Mr. C. E. STRoMEYER and Mr. H. B. KNowLEs were appointed Scrutineers of the balloting papers. The following members were elected officers of the Society and members of the Council for the ensuing year :— JETS Vela 18, IDieony Wily, JERS. Vice-Presidents: Sir Wittiam H. Batrey, M.I.Mech.E. ; Horace Lamp, LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S.; Francis Jones, M.Sc., Gnas MG I. Ialopavm, IDsSe,. IE IRIS) Ie, Secretaries: F. W. GAMBLE, D.Sc.; R. L. Tayor, F.C.S., 135) 6: Treasurer: ARTHUR McDoucatt, B.Sc. Librarian: R.S. Hutton, D.Sc. Other Members of the Council: FRANCIS NicHOLSON, F.Z.S. ; CHARLES BaILEy, M.Sc., F.L.S.; THomas Tuorp, F.R.A.S. ; CHARLES OLDHAM; ERNeEsT F. Lance, F.C.S.; WIL.IAM J. POPE Mhoke ses ke Crs. Ordinary Meeting, April 23rd, 1907. The President, Sir WitL1AM H. BAILEy, in the Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. Miss M. C. Storrs, D.Sc., Ph.D., made a communication as to the coal mine now working in Sutherlandshire, which is of mesozoic age and thus unlike the vast majority of coal seams in Europe, which are of paleozoic age. She reported that a number of genera of plants found in the beds associated with the deposits afford evidence that the Flora of Sutherland at that time closely corresponded with the Inferior Oolite Flora of the Yorkshire coast. The coal itself appears to have been deposited in an estuary and rapidly accumulated deposits with marine shells from its roof. April 23rd, 1907.| PROCEEDINGS. Xxxill Mr. C. L. BARNES, M.A., read a paper, entitled “Science and Poetry,” of which the following is an abstract :— The paper was an attempt to enumerate the principal ancient and modern poems which have any claim to be called scientific. Paradoxical though it may seem, prose, considered in its literary aspect, is of later growth than poetry, the reason being that men learned to sing and to dance long before they learned to write. By the time the latter art had assumed a definite form the art of versification had already made consider- able progress, the /ez¢-moztif being usually the praises of heroes and warriors, or philosophical musings, or the operations of Nature, then ascribed to the immediate action of deities. The Homeric poems are a classic example of this tendency, and of earlier date are the hymns to Osiris, Thammuz, or Astarte, found on Egyptian and Babylonian tablets. It is well known also that several portions of the Bible are written in metrical form. The earliest extant poems of a scientific kind are the “Phenomena” and ‘‘ Prognostica” of Aratus, written in Greek, which date from the 3rd century B.C., and are doubtless the source of the weather-lore in the “ Bucolics” and ‘‘ Georgics ” of Virgil. To the following century belong the ‘Theriaca” and “ Alexipharmaca” of Nicander, also in Greek; the former contains a list of remedies against the bites of snakes and other venomous animals; the latter is a compendium of antidotes to poisons in foods and drinks. Roman literature, as might be expected, is more fertile in poems of the kind under consideration, and at the head of all stands the “ De Rerum Natura” of Lucretius (1st century B.C.). In addition to many shrewd obse:vations “on the nature of things,” and intelligent gropings afte: truth, it preaches an entire disbelief in a future life together with a high moral code, a combination rare at any period of the world’s history. The only works of Virgil which may be admitted into this category are the two already mentioned, but his contem- porary Manilius is the reputed author of a poem in five books, , XXIV PROCEEDINGS. [April 23rd, 1907. entitled ‘‘Astronomicon,” which treats of astronomy and astrology, and is of high merit. A poem on Aetna, by Lucilius Junior, dates from the 1st century A.D., but must have been composed before the great eruption of Vesuvius in the year 79, as it contains no mention of that disaster. Avienus (4th century A.D.) translated the ‘‘ Phenomena” of Aratus into Latin verse, and also a book of travel by Dionysius Periegetes, under the title of “Descriptio Orbis Terrarum.” To him we also owe ‘“‘Ora Maritima,” a description of the Mediterranean and Black Seas. Another metrical translation of Dionysius, by Priscianus, dates from the 6th century. After this a considerable interval follows, the next poem to claim mention being the “ Physiologus” or ‘ Bestiary” of Theobaldus, an Italian, written between ro22 and 1035. In accordance with the custom of the Middle Ages it deals far less with the real than the fancied habits of the creatures discussed, and is little, if at all, in advance of the works of Aristotle and Pliny. Myths and superstition are rampant throughout, almost every animal quality being identified with the good or the evil principle in nature, for the purpose of drawing a moral. The “De Gemmis” of Marbodus, an Englishman, who was Bishop of Rennes between 1096 and 1123, has attained some notoriety, the opening words “‘ Evax rex Arabum”’ referring to an entirely mythical King cf Arabia. Alexander Neckam (12th century) wrote ‘De Laudibus Divine Sapientize,” a metrical version of his own ‘‘De Naturis Rerum,” and to about the same period belong Philippe de Thaune’s ‘Le Livre des Créatures,” and the “‘ Bestiaire Divin ” of Guillaume, ‘le clerc de Normandie.” A rather surprising amount of alchemical lore is found in Chaucer’s “‘ Canon’s Yeoman’s Tale” (14th century), after which there is again a gap till we come to the age of Fletcher, Milton, and Cowley. Neither the former’s “‘ Purple Island,” nor yet the “Plantarum Libri Duo,” nor the ‘Ode to the Royal Society ” of Cowley, is worth more than a passing mention, while the grandeur of “ Paradise Lost” is extra-scientific, and therefore April 23rd, 1907.| PROCEEDINGS. ORY outside the scope of the paper. ‘The astronomy of the poem is founded on the Ptolemaic system, though the possible triumph of the latter is expressly admitted in Book VIII. The account of the Creation in Book VII. is taken direct from Biblical sources, an inevitable proceeding under the circumstances. In “‘Natura non pati senium” (Nature not subject to old age), Milton departs so far from the traditional custom of poets as to insist that the earth is not losing its vigour, and that the operations of Nature are conducted on the same scale as heretofore. Darwin’s “ Botanic Garden,” or “ The Loves of the Plants,” contains an oft-quoted allusion to the then undeveloped powers of steam, but the general style of the poem is heavy, and its weakness soon provoked Canning to parody it in ‘“ The Loves of the Triangles.” In more recent times (1844) the Rev. John Selby Watson, of Guernsey, published a poem on Geology in five books, which on the whole is a meritorious piece of work, and the list is completed by Mr. J. F. Rowbotham’s ‘‘ Human Epic” (1906), the most learned of modern efforts in this direction. Reference was also made to the ‘‘ Fugitive Poems” collected by Daubeny (1869), to Lord Neaves’s ‘‘Songs and Verses,” and lighter effusions by O. W. Holmes, Maxwell, Rankine, Bret Harte, and several anonymous writers. Ordinary Meeting, May 7th, 1907. whew President, Erofesson) ba, Bay Dixon EAS Han. S-. Inethe Chair. The thanks of the members were voted to the donors of the books upon the table. The following were among the recent accessions to the Society’s Library :—‘‘ Anatomie de la téte du Lasius niger.” Par Ch. Janet (8vo., Limoges, 1905), presented by the author; ‘Di alune importanti questioni filosofiche.” G. C. Paoli (8vo., Milano, 1907), presented by the author. . XXXVI PROCEEDINGS. [May 7th, 1907. Professor F. E. Werss, D.Sc., F.L.S., exhibited a series of photographs illustrating the vegetation of Corsica. Beginning with the plants found near the shore he showed how well protected they were against the drought to which they were exposed during the summer months. Dwarf shrubs of Heli- chrysum and tufts of leafiess sea-lavender (Statice articulata) were most characteristic of this zone. A little further from the sea the slopes showed rather more abundant vegetation consisting largely of various species of Rock-Rose (Cizs¢us) with handsome white flowers and fragrant foliage. interspersed with these were clumps of Asphodel, while on the roots of the Reck-rose the bright coloured Cytznus was found as a parasitic plant. Above this region the slopes are covered by the macchia or maquis, a typical Mediterranean brushwood, consisting largely of shrubby arbutus and evergreen oaks interspersed with the tree-heath (Erica arborea). ‘This plant-formation resembles very much the bush found on the slopes of Table Mountain and in other places in South Africa. Above the macchia which clothes the foothills, and more inland are found large forests of Corsican pine and groves of beeches and other deciduous trees. The highest mountain slopes are studded with small spring shrubs, largely Leguminosze while Alpine plants allied to those of the Swiss Alps are found on the rocky summits. Mr. C. L. Barnes, M.A., concluded his paper on ‘‘ Science and Poetry,” by reading a selection of the poems he has collected from various sources. Among these were verses by Professor J. C. Maxwell, Professor Rankine, and Archbishop Whateley. Mr. J. EB. Peravet, M.Sce., F.R.S., read a paper entitled “On the Compression of Gases by means of Hydraulic Apparatus.” Annual Report of the Counce, VIE Annual Report of the Council, April, 1907. The Society began the session with an ordinary membership of 151. During the present session 12 new members have joined the Society ; z2 resignations have been received, and there has been one death, w/z.: Mr. CHARLES SNEATH ALLOTT, M.Inst.C.E. This leaves on the roll 150 ordinary members. The Society has also lost, by death, 7 honorary members, wz. : Professor F. BEILSTEIN, Ph.D., of St. Petersburg; Professor M. P. E. BerrHetot, For.Mem.R.S., Secrétaire perpetuel de l’Académie des Sciences, Paris; Professor LUDwic BoLTZMANN, For.Mem.R.S., of Vienna; Sir MicHaEL FosTER, K.C.B., Sec. R.S., of Cambridge; Professor D. MENDELEEFF, Ph.D., For. Mem.R.S., of St. Petersburg; Professor Henri Motssan, of Paris ; and Professor H. MarsHaLL Warp, D.Sc., F.R.S., of Cambridge. Memorial notices of these gentlemen appear at the end of this report.* The Society commenced the session with a balance in hand of £426. ros. 5d., from all sources, this amount being made up of the following balances :— At the credit of General Fund ............... PAGO) 318) 1) 3 5 Wilde Endowment Fund... 248 16 1 . ‘4 Joule Memorial Fund...... fa wu) A a A Dalton Tomb Fund ...... Be VG. LONAG WO The total balance in hand at the close of the session amounted to £214. 16s. 7d., and the amounts standing at the * The memorial notice of Professor F. Beilstein, who died on October 18th, 1906, will appear in the next volume. XXXVili Annual Report of the Council. credit of the separate accounts, on the 31st March, 1907, are the following :— Aine creditor General sHundyeree etree. £26 16 0 As s Wilde Endowment Fund... 71 12 9 Bs “5 Joule Memorial Fund ...... 30). Onn a = Dalton Momo nad) tees. 26, ) Sagas Balance rsrstn ViaKiCh.aOOymente se eee reins Pou WS) 7 The Wilde Endowment Fund, which is kept as a separate banking account shows a balance of £71. 12. gd. in its favour, as against £248. 16s. 1d., at the beginning of the financial year, the receipts from the invested funds being the same as last year. During the summer several improvements and alterations to the Society’s house were carried out, including the provision of a ladies’ lavatory on the upper floor. Dr. H. Wilde as a member of the Committee appointed to carry out these improvements has received the thanks of the Council for the time and attention he bestowed in devising and superintending them. ‘The cost, amounting to £248. 1s. od., has been charged to the Wilde Endowment Fund. The Librarian reports that during the session 654 volumes have been stamped, catalogued and pressmarked, 615 of these being serials, and 39 separate works. There have been written 249 catalogue cards, 192 for serials, and 57 for separate works. The total number of volumes catalogued to date is 29,776 for which 10,444 cards have been written. Satisfactory use is made of the library for reference purposes, but the number of volumes consulted is not recorded. During the session, 176 volumes have been borrowed from the library, as compared with 160 in the previous session. Some attention has continued to be paid to the completion of sets, 31 volumes or parts having been obtained, which partly Annual Report of the Council. FORTE complete three sets. Of these, 8 parts were purchased, and the rest were presented by the society publishing them. A smaller amount of binding has been done this session, 182 volumes having been bound in 139. A record of the accessions to the library shows that, from April, 1906, to March, 1907, 688 serials and 61 separate works were received, a total of 749 volumes. ‘The donations during the session (exclusive of the usual exchanges) amount to 59 volumes and 127 dissertations ; 2 volumes have been purchased (in addition to the periodicals on the regular subscription list). During the past session the Society has arranged to exchange publications with the following :—The Natal Government Museum, Pietermaritzburg ; Sociedade Scientifica de Sao Paulo ; Société d’Agriculture, Sciences et Industrie de Lyon; Albany Museum, Grahamstown; and the Museo Nacional de San Salvador. The Annual Reports of the Progress of Chemistry, published by the Chemical Society, and Sctence Progress, have been added to the list of periodicals subscribed for. The publication of the JZemoirs and Proceedings has been continued under the supervision of the Editorial Committee. Your Council is sorry to report that, owing to the increasing pressure of other duties, the Senior Honorary Secretary, and the Honorary Librarian, have intimated their desire not to be re- nominated for their respective offices at the ensuing election of the new Council. Mr. Francis Jones has served the Society as one of its Secretaries since 1896, during which period his whole-hearted zeal, tact, and efficiency in furthering the interests of the Society are beyond adequate acknowledgment. The orderly way in which Mr. Jones has prepared the business for the Council, his judgment and skill in editing the JZemoirs and Proceedings of the Society, his careful attention to the exacting correspondence xl Annual Report of the Council. respecting its affairs, have evoked the admiration and the heartiest thanks of his colleagues. Not less distinguished have been the services of Dr. William E. Hoyle, as librarian, extending over the long term of twelve years. During this period the whole of the Society’s large library was completely rearranged on the Dewey system; the card-system of cataloguing the titles, authors,. &c., of the books has been completed; the shelving and binding have been advanced as far as funds have been available ; a constant look-out has been kept for des¢devata to fill up gaps in the library ; while the exchange of publications with other societies has been regularly maintained and extended. Little of the detailed desultory work of this nature comes directly under the eyes of the members; but the Council has expressed its high appreciation of the value of Dr. Hoyle’s services as its librarian, and for his devotion in all the affairs of the Society. Both these gentlemen have been constantly at their posts throughout the periods of their service, and your Council recommends their election as vice-presidents at the ensuing annual meeting. The Society is indebted to the following gentlemen for the undermentioned gifts :— Mr. Francis Nicholson, F.Z.S., for a volume of Scientific Memoirs which had been successively in the possession of Dr. Dalton, Eaton Hodgkinson, and Sir William Fairbairn, Bart. Sir W. H. Bailey, for a framed enlarged photograph of the Statues of Dr. Dalton and Dr. Joule in the entrance hall of the Manchester Town Hall. The late Sir Michael Foster, K.C.B., for a portrait of himself. Dr. H. Wilde, F.R.S., for a copy of Mendeleeffs ‘‘ Chemical Conception of the Ether.” Annual Report of the Council. xli The Council arranged for the Wilde Lecture to be delivered on Monday, February 18th, 1907, by Dr. J. A. Ewing, F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E., Director of Naval Education to the Admiralty. The subject of the Lecture was “ The Structure of Metals.” The Council resolved that the following congratulatory letter be sent to the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia on the occasion of the celebration of the 21st anniversary of its foundation :— ‘“The Council of the Manchester Literary and Philosophi- “cal Society desires to congratulate the Royal Geographical “*Society of Australasia on the occasion of the celebration of “the Twenty-first Anniversary of its Foundation, and wishes “to express the hope that the Society, which has done so ““much to advance the progress of natural science in the past, ‘“‘may long continue to carry on its useful work. _ ‘ (Signed) W. H. Baitry, President. FRANCIS JONES, ) & - Lon. Secretaries. F. W. Gamete, ) Ce “ May 30th, 1906.” xiii Annual Report of the Council. In MaRcELLIN BERTHELOT the world has lost perhaps cne of the most versatile, certainly one of the most strenuous of her men of genius. Born in Paris in 1827 Berthelot began his professional career as laboratory assistant to Professor Ballard at the College de France. His first paper, published in 1850, was on the liquefaction of carbonic acid gas, but he soon turned to organic chemistry and described the action of heat on alcohol and on acetic acid. A chair of organic chemistry being created for him at the College, he worked first on oil of turpentine and then on glycerine and its compounds. His first organic syntheses were those of animal fats (1854), ethyl alcohol from ethylene (1855), formic acid from carbonic oxide (1855), and of methyl alcohol (1857). Then followed the important synthesis of acetylene direct from carbon and hydrogen (1862), and by heating acetylene he prepared benzene (1866). In the same year he synthesised marsh gas. Berthelot was the first to show that at a high temperature several molecules of a hydrocarbon may unite to form a new molecule—sometimes with the elimination of hydrogen: in this way he prepared diphenyl from benzene and anthracene from toluene. In 1861 Berthelot published, with Peéan de Saint Gilles, the first of his researches on affinity. He showed that the rate of formation of an ester depended upon the molecular quantities of the alcohol and acid present, thus affording an experimental proof of the law of mass action enunciated by Berthollet. Asa ccrollary to this work, Berthelot naturally attacked the con- clusions of Bunsen concerning the step-like nature of explosions in gases and of the incomplete combustion of carbonic oxide and hydrogen. Berthelot’s own work on explosions culminated in 1881 in his discovery of the explosion-wave (l’onde explosive) in gases, and his theory of its propagation through explosive mixtures. This work was followed by a long investigation, in conjunction with Vieille, on the pressures produced in gaseous explosions from which the temperatures and specific heats of the products of combustion were deduced. ———— Annual Report of the Council. xiii Perhaps Berthelot’s most important researches have been his determinations of the heat changes accompanying chemical reactions, both those of formation and of decomposition. These researches led him to enunciate the principle that every chemical transformation, completed without the aid of external energy, tends to produce that substance or substances in the formation of which the maximum evolution of heat occurs. We can only mention a few of the immense number of problems attacked by Berthelot, eg., the effect of the electric ‘‘effluve ” on gases (in which he discovered persulphuric acid) ; the question of the fixation of nitrogen by plants which he carried out in his ‘ Laboratoire de chemie végétale’ at Meudon near Paris; the reactions of acetylene and of cyanogen. All chemists too are indebted to Berthelot for his fascinating volumes on the Greek Alchemists and the origins of Alchemy. Berthelot had many honours, but perhaps the award of the Joecker prize to him by the Academy of Sciences in 1861 most affected his life and work. In that year he made his romantic marriage with Mlle. Bréquet—a union of the happiest kind,— only to end in the greater romance of their united death. Berthelot was a rapid worker, and what he did he gave at once to the world. Hence the immense number of his published papers, and the occasional self-contradiction of the ‘Inyestigator. He seldom, if ever, left Paris except to go to his Vegetable Laboratory at Meudon, but he found time to serve on many Scientific Commissions and to give most valuable services to the Government and the Municipality. All work of an ‘expert’ kind for manufacturers and patentees he resolutely refused. How he acted as foreign minister forms part of the political history of our time. Berthelot was a wonderfully effective lecturer: for not only did he marshal his facts with precision, but his arguments were lucid, and his sentences fell with a slow musical cadence de- lightful to listen to. His old students are unanimous in their appreciation of the affectionate regard he ever held them in; xliv Annual Report of the Council. those who crossed swords with him in scientific controversy found him a strenuous but always courteous opponent. Berthelot was elected an honorary member of this Society in 1886, ISOs 10) Lupwic BoLTZMANN was born at Vienna in 1844. He studied at the University there under Stefan, and afterwards for short periods at Heidelberg and Berlin, under Helmholtz and Kirchhoff. He was called in succession to professorships of mathematics or of theoretical physics at Graz (twice), Vienna (twice), Munich, and Leipzig. He died on September 3srd, 1906. He had long been recognised as one of the leading mathematical physicists of his time; he was a foreign member of the Royal Society, and had been an Honorary Member of our own Society since 1892. Boltzmann’s work bore mainly on the dynamical theory of gases, and on electromagnetic theory. Although the inspiration, always generously acknowledged, was in both cases derived from Maxwell, the subsequent development was thoroughly inde- pendent, and highly original. One result to which he was led in the theory of gases, and which now goes by the name of ‘“Boltzmann’s Theorem,” excited the keenest interest and admiration in Maxwell himself. Owing to the subtlety of the reasoning on which it is based, and to its apparent inconsistency with known numerical properties of various gases, it has been the subject of a prolonged controversy, which is even yet, perhaps, hardly completely determined. His earliest achieve- ments in the field of electricity were the experimental deter- mination of the dielectric capacities of various gases, and of crystalline sulphur in various directions. Both investigations were interesting and important as verifying the theoretical views of Maxwell. Ata later period he was occupied with the law of radiation. ; Besides his scientific papers, Boltzmann published several treatises. One of these was a course of lectures on Maxwell’s theory of electricity, designed to render the leading ideas of that Annual Report of the Council. xlv theory more accessible to German students. Boltzmann had indeed a large share in bringing about that closer approximation between English and German schools of physics which has been so marked in the last thirty years. He also wrote an elaborate treatise on the mathematical theory of gases, in which he sets forth his mature views on the subject. This theory is largely dependent on theoretical dynamics, and he was accordingly led to write a separate treatise on the latter subject. He was always fond of describing himself as ‘‘atomistic,” and in this book he takes up a position of avowed antagonism to the wider, and consequently vaguer, conception of Mechanics which is formu- lated in the well-known treatise of Hertz. ' An appreciative notice by the hand of a personal friend (Prof. G. H. Bryan) appeared in JVature, October 4th, 1906. We may also refer to the memoir by des Coudres, in the Ber. k. Sachs. Gesell. d. Wissensch. zu Leipzig, vol. 58, p. 617, 1906. del db. Sir MicuarL Foster.—When the history of scientific thought and learning in this country is written, it will be found that the decade 1870-1880 was marked by changes in method and conception of Biology which, it is not an exaggeration to say, were revolutionary in character. The leadership of this revolution is by common consent assigned to Huxley, but the greatest and most successful of his generals was undoubtedly Michael Foster. His campaign in Cambridge which led to the establishment and development of the great schools of Physiology, Pathology, Zoology, and Botany, of which the University is so justly proud, was not the only part of his life’s work that exhibited his extra- ordinary powers of organisation, diplomacy, and appreciation of the true paths of scientific progress. But it was in Cambridge, rather than in any other sphere of his activities that his influence as a leader of a new movement was particularly powerful. He was born at Huntingdon in 1836, and was the eldest son of a surgeon practising in that city. The last three xlvi Annual Report of the Counczt. years of his school life were spent at University College School, London, where he was a contemporary of joseph and Richard Chamberlain, W. Clowes, the publisher, Lord Romilly, J. W. Mellor, and other distinguished sons of nonconformist parents. After a distinguished career at University College, London, first as a student of classics and afterwards of medicine, he joined his father in practice at Huntingdon, where he married his first wife. His wife died in 1869, leaving him a widower with one son and one daughter. In 1872 he married Miss Rust who survives him. After being in practice seven years, he returned to University College, London, and was appointed Teacher of Practical Physiology and subsequently Professor of Physiology. In 1870, Trinity College, Cambridge, founded a Praelectorship of Physiology, and, on the recommendation of Huxley, whom he had been assisting as a demonstrator in the first course of Elementary Biology, Foster was appointed to the new post. From the date of Foster’s appointment as Praelector in Physiology at Cambridge, the new schools of the Biological sciences in Cambridge began to grow and develop. In Newall Martin, Francis Balfour, Sidney Vines, and others who were among his first pupils, he found distinguished lieutenants to whom he could delegate the care of the several branches of Biology, while he himself remained the chief but unofficial director of their studies. In order that the study of these subjects, however, should be duly recognised, it was necessary that certain changes should be made in the somewhat antiquated arrangements of the Tripos examinations. The changes were made; but Foster himself could only look on and stimulate others in the good work of reform; for although he was made an honorary M.A. of the University, it was not until the lapse of thirteen years, when the Professorship of Physiology was founded, that he obtained the privileges of a voice and a vote in the councils of the University. . Annual Report of the Council. xlvii It is difficult to express in words the cause of his great influence in the University. The original investigations he had published, although important and stimulating, were not vast or monumental, and being on points of somewhat technical Physiological interest, did not attract the attention of the general world of learning. His lectures were delivered in a solemn monotone, and were devoid of the artificial stimulus to interest obtained by skilful table experiments or even coloured diagrams, and excepting during the first few years of his life in Cambridge, he seldom came to demonstrate himself in the laboratory. But the secret of his success seemed to be that he taught his pupils not only what we know, but also what we want to know, and every lecture seemed to give an impulse to all his pupils who possessed a grain of scientific feeling to go into the laboratory and try to find out something for themselves. In his private room, after lecture, when he sat in his chair and puffed volumes of smoke from his pipe, Foster was at his best. It was then that he granted private interviews to his pupils, and few indeed there were who came out from that room without feeling the better for his words of wisdom and kindly interest. Apart from his important work in Cambridge, Foster took an active interest in the proceedings of the Royal Society, of which he was Secretary for twenty-two years, and of the British Association, of which he became President at the Dover meeting in 1899. In 1900 Michael Foster was elected Member of Parliament for his old (London) University, and for a time sat on the Conservative side of the House as a Liberal Unionist, but being dissatisfied with some parts of the policy of the Government, particularly the Education Bill, he joined the opposition until the fall of the Balfour Ministry. In the General Election of 1906 he was defeated by Sir Philip Magnus by only 24 votes. Foster, elected an honorary member of this Society in 1889, seldom visited us in Manchester, but many will xlviit Annual Report of the Council. remember with interest the brilliant lecture he gave as Wilde lecturer of this Society in 1898, on “The Physical Basis of Psychical Events.” He died in London on January 28th of this year, a few hours after he had delivered a short but valuable speech at a meeting of the British Science Guild. Saale By the death of Dmitri IwanowiTtscH MENDELEEFF the Society has lost one of its most distinguished honorary members. The enunciator of the periodic classification of the elements, the author of the most original chemical text-book of modern times, a physical chemist of great experimental powers, an inspiring teacher and daring theorist, Mendeljeeff stood easily in the front rank of European chemists. He was a Siberian, born at Tobolsk in 1834, and spent the whole of his life, with the brief exception of two years at Heidel- berg, in Russia. His remarkable force of character, no less than his intellectual abilities, marked him out for rapid promo- tion, and in 1866 we find him professor of chemistry in the University of St. Petersburg. From that time until his death Mendeleéeff was almost the dictator of Russian natural science. To him two generations of Russian chemists owe their training, and the confidence reposed in him by the Government was shown by his appointment to the sole control of the Standards Bureau. His name is inseparably linked with the periodic law and classification of the elements. Though the previous work of Dobereiner, Dumas, Newlands and others had clearly hinted at the existence of a law correlating the properties of the elements with their atomic weights, it was left for Mendeléeff to make this clear—in his own words—‘ by raising the whole question to such a height that its reflection on all the facts could be clearly seen.” _ The year 1869 saw the enunciation of the periodic law by Mendeléeff, its illustration in his periodic system, and his bold challenge to the future by predicting in detail the properties of Annual Report of the Council. xlix elements then unknown. Within twenty years the discovery of gallium, germanium, and scandium gave the most striking con- firmation to his prophecies—a confirmation which assisted materially in winning for his periodic system that assured place in chemical theory it now holds. Later work has done little to alter it; much to confirm its essential principle. At times Mendeléeff’s genius in evolving theories was only equalled by his ingenuity in defending them against experimental attack. His persistent devotion to the Mendeléeff-Gerhardt Law—that gases combine only in equal volumes—is a striking example of this. His boldness and originality are still further shown in his “Principles of Chemistry ”—a chemical text-book in no ordinary sense of the words, but a detailed exposition of the facts on which the periodic system is based. It abounds, too, in ideas stimulative of research. His numerous papers on the properties of solutions give abundant evidence of Mendeleeffs experimental ability ; and it is interesting to note that it was his study of the densities of mixtures of alcohol and water-—work done for the Russian Government for excise purposes—which led him to regard solu- tions as ‘‘strictly definite, atomic, chemical combinations at temperatures higher than their dissociation temperatures.” Even this short account of Mendeléeff’s life would be incom- plete without some reference to his influence on the Russian petroleum industry. He made many journeys to the Caucasus “and investigated at length the distribution and capacity of the Baku oil wells. His theory of the origin of petroleum is characteristic of the man. Petroleum, he declares, is continually being formed by the interaction of steam and metallic carbides below the surface of the earth, and the supply would therefore seem to be endless. Whatever may be thought of so bold a theory, there can be no doubt that the Baku petroleum industry owes its present position to Mendeleeff. As a theorist he will be remembered, not only for his contri- l Annual Report of the Council. butions to chemical theory, but also for his daring attempts to show the oneness of things, to demonstrate that stellar and molecular mechanics are essentially the same. Perhaps the most noteworthy of these was a lecture delivered at the Royal Institution in 1889. Assuming the attractions between the atoms of a molecule to be gravitational, he showed that Newton’s Third Law is adequate to explain all the facts of chemical sub- stitution. His last speculation was the inclusion of the ether in his periodic system as an extremely light gas. Mendeléeft was elected an honorary member of this Society in 1889. Idan On Jax Henri Moissan was born in Paris on September 28th, 1852, and at an early age developed an interest in chemistry. In 1872 he entered the laboratory of Fremy at the MJuséwm d Histoire naturelle, attending also the courses of Henri Sainte-Claire- Deville, Debray and others. From 1873 to 1879 Moissan held the post of assistant in the Laboratory of MM. Decaisne and Deheérain at the AZustum @ Flistoire naturelle, and in 1874 published, in conjunction with M. Dehérain, his first contribution to science, a study of the absorption of oxygen and emission of carbonic acid by plants kept in a darkened room. In 1877 a series of papers on the oxides of the metals of the iron group was commenced, the whole work being collected and presented in 1880 as a thesis for the degree of Docteur cs sciences of the Faculty of Sciences of the Paris University. This research carried out with much experi- mental skill and precision, considerably extended our knowledge of the reduction products of the oxides of iron, manganese, nickel, and chromium. A long connection with the Ecole supérieure de Pharmacte commenced in 1879, by. his appointment as demonstrator in chemistry ; the chair of toxicology being given him in 1887, after his memorable isolation of fluorine, and finally the professorship of chzmze minérale in 1899, when his first opportunity occurred for holding a course of lectures on chemistry. Annual Report of the Council. li After his graduation, Moissan from 1879 to 1883, devoted . himself at first chiefly to the study of the compounds of chromium, investigating in particular the chromous salts and perchromic acid, Subsequently, in the laboratory of Debray, and with the active encouragement of Troost and Friedel, he commenced his researches upon fluorine which culminated in 1886 in the isolation of this element. The difficulties, which had baffled the experimental ability of Humphrey Davy, Faraday, Fremy, and many others, were overcome, and fluorine itself was presented to us. That this may justly be considered to be one of the greatest achievements of experimental chemistry in the nineteenth century can be judged not so much by the brilliant result attained as by the display of indomitable pluck and perseverance which assured the successful issue. After a number of fruitless but well-planned attempts to separate the element from its compounds with - silicon, phosphorus, and arsenic, Moissan, on June 28th, 1886, com- municated to the Academy of Sciences, the first details of his experiments on the electrolysis of anhydrous hydrofluoric acid containing. potassium bifluoride. The definite proofs of the identity and elementary nature of fluorine were presented in the following month, whilst, on November 8th, Debray reported to the academy the complete conviction of the section of chemistry of the validity of the experiments. From 1886 to 1891, Moissan published numerous papers on the chemical and physical properties of fluorine and on many of its compounds, the careful and detailed nature of the investigation being characteristic of all his work. Attention should also be directed to the fact that in 1897, in conjunction with Sir James Dewar, fluorine was liquefied at the Royal Institution. The construction of an apparatus of copper in 1899, to replace the expensive platinum vessels previously employed, simplified the preparation of the element, and the discovery that dry fluorine free from vapours of hydrofluoric lii Annual Report of the Council. acid does not attack glass, served in recent years to facilitate the investigation of its properties. In 1891 Moissan was elected a member of the Academy of Sciences to fill the chair left vacant by the death of Cahours. The main reason which impelled him to pass from the study of fluorine to the high-temperature researches, which from 1892 onwards absorbed so much of his attention, seems to be closely connected with a desire, which he had long entertained, to solve the mystery of the origin of the diamond. The hope that the great activity of fluorine for other elements would help in the quest not being realised, he was led to a methodical study of the behaviour and transformation of the three allotropic modifications of carbon. This study, which is an excellent example of the logical application of experiment, resulted in the artificial production of diamond, and at the same time added greatly to our knowledge of the peculiar metamorphoses which characterise this element. In electric furnace work Moissan’s pre-eminent position is due, not to the design or discovery of a specia] form of furnace, but rather to the skill with which he investigated in detail a number of individual chemical reactions. In each case he devoted great care to the purification and analysis of the raw materials required in the process, and submitted the products to minute examination and quantitatively determined their com- position. Thus his preparation of chromium, tungsten, moly- bdenum, uranium, titanium, and many other metals in a fused form and high degree of purity greatly enriched our knowledge of the chemical and physical properties of these elements. Of still greater importance was the methodical following up of the chance formation of calcium carbide which he observed around the carbon electrodes in his early furnace experiments. From this observation he was led to. discover and determine fully the nature and properties of a large number of metallic carbides, borides, and _ silicides, most of them hitherto Annual Report of the Counce. litt absolutely unknown, or, like the metals mentioned already, only obtainable as impure and fragmentary specimens. There is perhaps no need to consider, at the present time, in how far industry is directly indebted to Moissan’s work. He himself had invariably expressed his desire not to be considered in such discussions, and, so far as the merit of his work is concerned, it needs no support of this nature. Indirectly both science and industry have benefited enormously. On the Continent his scientific investigations are directly credited with a renaissance in the study of inorganic chemistry, which, particularly in Germany, had been almost entirely neglected for the more productive field of organic chemical research. Even in England, which has always held a high position in the pursuit of inorganic chemistry, his work has been of great assistance in instilling enthusiasm and encouraging the deeper study of the subject. As a teacher, Moissan will be affectionately remembered by all his pupils; even during the tenure of his professorship of toxicology he maintained a research laboratory for chemistry, and attracted to ita number of students, and from the time of his appointment, in 1900, to the chair of inorganic chemistry at the Sorbonne larger numbers were able to avail themselves of his teaching. Henri Moissan was elected an honorary member of this Society on April 26th, 1892, and on more than one occasion he had expressed his appreciation of this early recognition of his work. By his death at the early age of 55, Science has lost one of her most indefatigable workers. The publication of a translation, with additions, of his experimental researches with the electric furnace* and articles in Cian WO. By TO. TG. SOL 4 Tn O24, WO G5. jo. Bee render much of his work readily available to the English reading public. REO: El *«°The Electric Furnace” by H. Moissan, Transl. by A. T. de Mouilpied, London 1904, Edward Arnold. liv - Annual Report of the Council. By the death of Professor MarsHaLL Warp in August last, botanical science has lost one of its ablest exponents. Born in 1854 at Hereford, he distinguished himself while studying at the Royal College of Science under Sir William Thiselton-Dyer, both by his great ability and his keen enthusiasm. After further studies both at the University of Cambridge and at Wiirzburg, under the late Professor Sachs, he was appointed by the Government of Ceylon; in 1880, to investigate the coffee-leaf disease in that island. He accom- plished his task with considerable success and on his return in 1882, was elected Berkeley Fellow in the Owens College and subsequently became assistant to the late Professor Williamson. While in Manchester he published a number of botanical papers, some of which appear in Vol. 1 of the Owens College Biological Studies. They indicate that already at that time Ward’s attention was strongly drawn to the group of fungi in which field of research he became one of the most prominent workers. Throughout his original investigations he displayed an originality and fertility of ideas and an indomitable perseverance which have rarely been equalled. The expositions of his investigations are characterised by a lucidity which carries conviction with it, and the results he obtained will be of lasting interest and importance. Marshall Ward left Manchester to take up the post of Professor of Botany at the Royal Indian Engineering College at Cooper’s Hill, where for ten years he prepared his pupils on Indian Woods and Forest Service. In 1895 he succeeded the late Professor Babington in the chair of Botany at the Cambridge University, which post he occupied with signal success until his death, two years after the opening of the new botanical institute at the University. This was the outward and visible manifesta- tion of the great work he had done in raising the School of Botany at Cambridge to the foremost in the Kingdom. But while Marshall Ward was always successful and inspiring as a teacher his unremitting work in botanical research raised Annual Report of the Council. lv him to a foremost position among botanists and brought him acknowledgment from all learned Societies and Universities. He was elected Fellow of the Royal Society in 1888 and received a Royal Medal in 1893, and in 1902 he received the degree of D.Sc. honoris causa from the University of Man- chester and was elected honorary member of the Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society in 1894. Those who knew him as a friend mourn in his death a genial companion, a man of varied interests but one who above all else was dominated by a whole-hearted devotion to his science. ba EW. CHARLES SNEATH ALLOTT was born at Lincoln, on May 17th, 1842, and there he received his early education. He was the son of the late Joseph Allott, maltster, of Lincoln and Newark-upon-Trent. After being articled to Mr. L. H. Moorsom, M.Inst.C.E., he joined the Fairbairn Engineering Company in 1862, and remained with the firm till 1875, when he occupied the position of assistant manager. During this period he had charge of many important engineering works, including the roofs of the Albert Hall and of the Liverpool Street Station, London, the framework of the Spithead Ports and the Bridges of the Inter- Colonial Railway, Canada. In 1875 he commenced practice on his own account in Manchester, and was employed by different Railway Companies in the construction and repair of their iron bridges. He also designed large cotton mills for Brazil and China, and was responsible for the whole of the buildings of the new Electricity Generating Station of the Man- chester Corporation in Stuart Street. Mr. Allott was well known in masonic circles and was a past provincial officer of Freemasons and also of Royal Arch Masons in East Lancashire. At the time of his death he was Captain of the Manchester Golf Club, in the affairs of which he took the keenest interest for many years. Much of his time lvi Annual Report of the Council. was devoted to church and philanthropic work and he was a member of the committee of the Hospital Sunday Fund. Mr. Allott was a member of the Institution of Civil Engineers, the Institution of Mechanical Engineers, also of the Liverpool Engineering Society and has been a member of this Society since 1902. He was a man of genial disposition and generous impulses and will be much missed by the large circle of his friends. His death took place with startling suddenness while in the Manchester Athenzeum, on February 27th, 1907. Fei: Treasurer's Accounts. lvii NotTe.—The Treasurer’s Accounts of the Session 1906- 1907, of which the following pages are summaries, have been endorsed as follows: April 15th, 1907. Audited and found correct. We have also seen, at this date, the certificates of the following Stocks held in the name of the Society :—£1,225 Great Western Railway Company 5% Consolidated Preference Stock, Nos. 12,293, 12,294, and 12,323; £258 Twenty years’ loan to the Manchester Corporation, redeemable 25th March, 1914 (No. 1564); 47,500 Gas Light and Coke Company Ordinary Stock (No. 6,389); and the deeds of the Natural History Fund, of the Wilde Endowment Fund, those conveying the land on which the Society’s premises stand, and the Declaration of Trust. Leases and Conve yance dated as follow :— 22nd Sept., 1797. 23rd Sept., 1797. 25th Dec., 1799. 22nd Dec., 1820. 23rd Dec., 1820. Declarations of Trust :— 8th Jan., 1878. 24th June, 1801. 23rd Dec., 1820. 30th April, 1851. We have also verified the balances of the various accounts with the bankers’ pass books. D. L. CHAPMAN. ( Signed ) €. L. BARNES. Treasurers Accounts. MANCHESTER LITERARY Dr. Arthur McDougall, Treasurer, in Account with the To Cash in hand, 1st April, 1906 To Members’ Subscriptions :— Half Subscriptions, 1901-02 zr at £1 15. od. ” ” 1905-06, 5 » oe) id ELD 1906-07, 18 ” Subscriptions :— 1903-04, Tie hes 2s. od. ” 1904-05, 4» ” “0 1905-06, 12 ,, aD on 1906-07, 108 ,, a 2» 1907-08, I 59 ot) To Transfers from the Wilde Endowment Fund To Sale of Publications | ae 66 To Dividends :— Natural History Fund Joule Memorial Fund To Income Tax Refunded :— Natural History Fund Joule Memorial Fund To Balance 1st April, 1906 To Dividends on £1,225 Great Western Railway Company’ s Stock .. To Remission of Income Tax, 1906. . To Balance, 1st Apri], 1906 To Dividends on fase Loan to Manchester Corporation To Remission of Income Tax, 1906.. ne ‘ oF LwS- ade 4 Suds 142 10 2 Fy rely Ce) 5 5 0 18 18 o 2520 81.8 0: 25 4 0 226 16 o 22 0 = 289 16 o 83 22 40 25 Jw 58 3 8 Tie Tene —_ 65 10 10 BV LES O17. 8 3 8m #610 5 8 £ sid r 1699 58 3 8 3 ae JOULE MEMORIAL £ sae 72) Tae 7 Toe oO Fas #80 6 2 To Balance tst April, 1906 To Dividends on £7,500 Gas Light ai and Coke Company's s Ordinary § Stock . To Remission of Income Tax, rg06 To Bank Interest 5 To Discount on bills WILDE ENDOWMENT 4 ‘sods 248 16 313 Io 1€ 10 3 10 ° 19 HW O0O-OH 4583: Saas To Balance, 1st April, oa To Bank Interest DALTON TOMB £ sds AND. NATURAL HISTORY > Treasurer's Accounts. PHIBOSOPHICAL SOCIETY. Saceety, from rst April, 1906, to 31st March, 1907. Lee Sin ice 4 8 By Charges on Property :— Chief Rent (Income Tax deducted) - Daas ed Income Tax on Chief Rent aa 12 II Insurance against Fire righ adh a8) War avdise Baya ea EIU BES gues Plies tay I a TO me ot a hr ere — 2635 9 Coals, Gas, Electric Light, Water, &c. ACh ren) Tea, Coffee, &c., at Meetings .. sie 1515 7% Cleaning, Sw eeping Chimneys, &c. 9 2 Crockery ° © 4 0 ; By Administrative Charges: _ === — 65 10 x4 Housekeeper 63 8 o Postages, and Carriage of Parcels and of “ Memoirs” 38 7 To Stationery, Cheques, Receipts, and Engrossing 6 8 411 Printing Circulars, Reports, &c. 13) 6) 6 Extra attendance at Meetings, and during housekeeper’ Ss holidays SEroO Miscellaneous Expenses 56 a6 es : 414 7% = — 129 I5 104 By Publishing :— Printing “ Memoirs and Proceedings” 166 14 10 Illustrations for ‘‘ Memoirs” except Nat. Hist. papers) « 6 € 10 Binding ‘‘ Memoirs”’ 26 2aAanO By Library : — ——— sys, (8) 2 Books and Periodicals (except those charged to Natural History Fund) 3 42 010 Periodicals formerly subscribed for oom the Miorescopical and Natural History Section .. 2c : 56 3 yo) By Natural History Fund :— ————— 45 7 10 (Items shown in the Balance Sheet of this Fund below) 60 7 9 By Joule Memorial Fund :— (No Expenditure this Session) ste 0! (Ovo By Balance at Williams Deacon’s Bank, 1st st April, 1907, Oy Be 3 >> in Treasurer’s hands Z 1) 6) ©) ————— 107 2 2 #610 5 8 FUND, 1906—1907. (Included in the General Account, above.) Se Gls By Natural History Books and Periodicals 60 as ; y 3 A) 3G) By illustrations for papers on Nat. Hist. in ‘‘ Memoirs ” be 5 TZ 2O » Balance, ist April, 1907 6 Boats} sa 463 1 8 FUND, 1906—1907. (Included in the General Account, above.) Ss. (No expenditure this Session). s By Balance, ist April, 1907 80 6 2 £80 6 2 FUND, 1906—1907. BS Ge Gh By Assistant Secretary's Salary, April, 1906, to March, 1907 .. 135 0 Oo By Maintenance of Society’s Library :— Binding and Repairing Books me Z 5 23 16 ro By Repairs and Improvements to Society's Premises .. : : 92 13 8 By Providing and Furnishing Ladies’ Lavatory 2 i 139 8 8 By Extension and Improvement of Electric e Hightine F : Io 9 oO By Renewal of Furnishings, etc. 5 5 (Cyrayrl By Honorarium to Wilde ‘Lecturer, 1907 S : I5 15 0 By Expenses incurred by Lecture od 5 i APO wy, By Transfers to Society's Funds Se % 83 12 0 By Cheque Book o 2 6 By Balance at District Bank, Ist April, 1907 7112 9 £583 5 5 FUND, 1906-1907. j : Ay Sede (No Expenditure this Session). By Balance at Manchester and Salford Savings Bank, rst April, 1907 3 a on & 36 1 8 lx The Counczt. elt CO OMUMING sb AND MEMBERS CF THE MANCHESTER LITERARY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY. (Corrected to July 15th, £907.) resident, lal, 185 IDIOXOIN, IWioAlc ISIN, ltC.S, Pice-Presidents. Str WILLIAM H. BAILEY, M.I.Mech.E. HORACE WAMB. MeAcy Llu. Ds DSc. FARES: FRANCIS JONES, M.Sc., F.R.S.E., F.C.S. W. E. HOYLE, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E. Secretaries. F. W. GAMBLE, D.Sc., F.R.S. IR, Iby DANALONR, TEKCMS, IEIGC. Oreasurer. ARTHUR McDOUGALL, B.Sc. Hibrarian. k. S. HUTTON, D.Sc. Other stlembers of the Council. FRANCIS NICHOLSON, F.Z.S. CHARLES BAILEY, M.Se., F.L.S. THOMAS THORP, F.R.A.S. CHARLES OLDHAM. ERNEST F. LANGE, F.C:S. WWODUIDIUAINE fo TONE, IIR Sh, | IoCaSh Assistant Secretary and Drbrarian. APSR, EIUING Buse Date of Election. DEC EIOs I9QOI, 1902, 1870, 1896, 1865, 1888, 1895, 1903, 1895, 1898, 1868, 1901, 1896, 1875, 1889. 1861, 1889, 1860, 1886, 1889, 1889, Mar. 18. Dec. 13. Jan. 31. Nov. 14. Feb. 7. Jam Oct. 20. Mar. 5. Nov. 29. Dec. 15. Novy. 12. Oca: Nov. 16. Oi, 15, April 2. April 16. Jan. 24. April 6, Jan. 8. Ociens. Ordinary Members. |xi ORDINARY MEMBERS. Adamson, Harold. Oaklands Cottage, Godley, near Man- chester. Allen, J. Fenwick. 147, Wethington Road, Whalley Range, Manchester. Angell, John, F.C.S., F.I.C. 6, Beaconsfield, Derby Road, Withington, Manchester. Armstrong, Frank. 88, Deansgate, Manchester. Bailey, Charles, M.Sc., F.L.S. Atherstone LTouse, North Drive, St. Annes-on-the-Sea, Lancs. Bailey, Alderman Sir William H., M.I.Mech.E. Sale Flall, Sale, Cheshtre. Barnes, Charles L., M.A. 8, Swinton Avenue, Chorlton-on- Medlock, Manchester. Barnes, Jonathan, F.G.S. South Cliff House, 301, Great Clowes Street, Higher Broughton, Manchester. Behrens, Gustav. ffolly Royde, Withington, Manchester. Behrens, Walter L. 22, Oxford Street, Manchester. Bickham, Spencer H., F.L.S. Underdown, Ledbury. Bles, Abraham J. S. Palm House, Higher Broughton, Manchester. Bowman, F.H., D.Sc., F.R.S.E. 4, Albert Square, Manchester. Boyd, John. Barton House, 11, Didsbury Park, Didsbury, Manchester. Bradley, Nathaniel, F.C.S. Sznnyside, Whalley Range, Manchester. Brogden, Henry, F.G.S., M.I.Mech.E. ale Lodge, Altrincham, Cheshire. Brooks, Samuel Herbert. Slade House, Levenshulme, Manchester. Brothers, Alfred. Aandforth, near Manchester. Brown, Alfred, M.A., M.D. Sandycroft, Higher Brough- ton, Manchester. Brownell, Thomas William, F.R.A.S. 64, Upper Brook Street, Manchester. Budenberg, C. F., M.Sc., M.I.Mech.E. Bozwdon Lane, Marple, Cheshtre. Ixii Date of Election. 1906, Feb. 27. 1894, Nov. 13. 1904, Oct. 18. 1907, Jan. 15. 1899, Feb. 7. 1901, Nov. 26. 1902, Nov. 4. 1901, Nov. 12. 1895, April 30. 1884, Nov. 4. 1903, Oct. 20. 1906, Oct. 30. 1906, Nov. 27. 1895, Nov. 12. 1904, Jan. 5. 1901, Nov. 26. 1895, April 9. Ordinary Members. Burton, Joseph, A.R.C.S., Dublin. 7Z7z/e Works, Clifton Junction, near Manchester. Burton, William, F.C.S. Zhe Hollies, Clifton Junction, near Manchester. Campion, George Goring, L.D.S. 264, Oxford Street, Manchester. Carpenter, H. C. H., M.A., Ph.D., Professor of Metal- lurgy in the University of Manchester. 11, Oak Road, Withington, Manchester. Chapman, D. L., M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Jesus College, Oxford. Chevalier, Reginald C., M.A., Mathematical Master at the Manchester Grammar School. 103, Clyde Road, West Didsbury, Manchester. Clerk, Dugald, M.Inst.C.E., F.C.S. 18, Southampton Buildings, Chancery Lane, London, W.C. Coignou, Caroline, M.A., Science Mistress at the Manchester High School for Girls. 60, Cece Street, Creenheys, Manchester. Collett, Edward Pyemont. §, St. John Street, Manchester. Corbett, Joseph. Zow2 Hall, Salford. Core, William Hamilton, M.Se. Groombridge House, Withington, Manchester. Coward, H. F., M.Sc., Assistant Lecturer in Chemistry in the University of Manchester. —Aa/me Hall, Plymouth Grove, Manchester. Coward, Thomas Alfred, F.Z.S. Aventwood, Bowdon, Cheshire. Crossley, W. J., M.I-Mech.E. Openshaw, Manchester. Darbishire, Arthur D., M.A., B.Sc., Lecturer and Demon- strator of Zoology in the Royal College of Science, London. Loyal College of Science, London, S.W. Darbishire, Francis V., B.A., Ph.D., Demonstrator and Analyst at the South Eastern Agricultural College. Zhe College, Wye, Kent. Dawkins, W. Boyd, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of Geology in the Victoria University of Manchester. frallowfield House, Fallowfield, Manchester. Date of Election. 1894. Mar. 1887, Feb. 1905, Jan. 1906, Jan. 1906, Oct. 1902, May 1905, May 1906, Nov. 1898, Nov. 1896, Nov. 1905, Nov. 6. {0. 30. 30. 7133. 20. 20. 1902, April 29. 1905, Oct. 1902, Jan. 72 7. Ordinary Members. Ixiil Delépine, A. Sheridan, M.B., B.Sc., Professor of Pathology in the Victoria University of Manchester. The University, Manchester. Dixon, Harold Baily, M.A., M.Sc., F.R.S., F.C.S., Professor of Chemistry in the Victoria University of Manchester. Zhe Unzversity, Manchester. Duffield, W. Geoffrey, B.A., B.Sc., Research Fellow in the University of Manchester. Zhe Untversity, Man- chester. Dunkerley, Stanley, D.Sc., Professor of Engineering in the University of Manchester. Zhe Unzversety, Manchester. Edgar, E. C., D.Sc., Assistant Lecturer and Demonstrator in Chemistry in the University of Manchester. Dalton Fall, Victoria Park, Manchester. Ellison, Robert William. ‘ Brookstde,’ Crofts Bank Road, Urmston, Manchester. Fearon, Ernest, Chemist to the Salford Corporation Gas Works. 31, Azssell Road, Whalley Range, Manchester. Fisher, Kenneth, B.A. Oxon., Ph.D. Jena, Research Student in the University of Manchester. Zhe Lzlacs, Timperley, Cheshire. Gamble, F. W., D.Sc., F.R.S., Assistant Director of the Zoological Laboratories of the Victoria University of Manchester. Zhe University, Manchester, and 16 Am- herst Street, With¢ngton, Gordon, Rev. Alexander, M.A. Szsmmerville, Victoria Park, Manchester. Grimshaw, William Edwin, B.A., Physics Master, Man- chester Grammar School. 46, Broadway Street, Oldham. Herbert, Arthur M., B.A. Frankwyn, Hale, Cheshire. Hewitt, Charles Gordon, B.Sc., Lecturer in Economic Zoology in the Victoria University of Manchester. Zhe University, Manchester. Hewitt, David B., M.D. Grove Mount, Davenham, Cheshire. lxiv Date of Election. 1895, Mar. 1884, Jan. 1906, Oct. 1905. Nov. 1896, Nov. 1889, Oct. 1900, Oct. 1899, Oct. 1901, Nov. 1870, Nov. 1878, Nov. 1886, Jan. 1895, Nov. 1903, Feb. 1904, Oct. 1902, Feb. 1893, Nov. 5. 8. 16. 14. 15. es) Ordinary Members. Hickson, Sydney J., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of Zoology in the Victoria University of Manchester. Zhe University, Manchester. Hodgkinson, Alexander, M.B., B.Sc. Manchester. Holmes, H. T., M.A. (Cantab.). Aastzor, 77, Wellington Road, Heaton Chapel. Holt, Alfred, M.A., Research Fellow of the University of Manchester. Cvofton, Azgburth, Liverpool.. Hopkinson, Edward, M.A., D.Sc., M.Inst.C.E. ferns, Alderley Edge, Cheshire. Hoyle, William Evans, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., Director of the Manchester Museum. Zhe University, Alanchester. 18, St. John Street, Hutton, R.S., D.Sc., Lecturer on Electro-Chemisiry in the Victoria University of Manchester. Zhe Unzversity, Manchester. Ingleby, Joseph, M.I.Mech.E. Summer Hill, Pendleton, Manchester. Jackson, Frederick. 14, Cross Slreet, Manchester. Johnson, William H., B.Sc. JVoodleigh, Altrincham. Jones, Francis, M.Sc., F.R.S.E., F.C.S. Afanchester Grammar School, and Beaufort House, Alexandra Park, Manchester. Kay, Thomas. Moorfield, Stockport, Cheshire. Kirkman, William Wright. Zhe Grange, Timperiey, Cheshzre. Knecht, Edmund, Ph.D., Professor of Tinctorial Chemistry at the Municipal School of Technology, Beech Mount, Marple, Cheshire. Knowles, H. B., M.A., Principal of the Royal Technical Institute, Salford. ‘ Morcote,’ Swinton Park, Salford. Kolp, Noah. Woodthorpe, Victoria Park, Manchester. Manchester. Lamb, Horace, M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of Mathematics in the Victoria University of Manchester, 6, Wilbraham Road, Fallowfield, Manchester. Date of Election. 1902, Jan. 7. 1904, Mar. 15. 1903, Nov. 17. 1902, Nov. 4. 1902, Jan. 7. 1857, Jan. 27. 1866, Nov. 13. O05, Oct.) 3. 1902, Mar. 4. 1875, Jan. 26. 1901, Dec. Io. 1873, Mar. 4. Ordinary Members. Ixv Lange, Emest F, F.C.S. Fairholne, 3, Willow Bank, Fillowfielt, Manchester. Lea, Arnold W. W., M.D. 246, Oxford Road, Manchester. Leigh, Charles W. E., Librarian of the University. Zhe University, Manchester. Leigh, Joseph Egerton. Zhe Towers, Didsbury, Manchesier. Longridge, Michael, M.A., M.Inst.C.E. Zeneéuvretten, Ashley Road, Bowdon, Cheshire. Longridge, Robert Bewick, M.I.Mech.E. Yew 77ee House, Tabley, Knutsford, Cheshire. McDougall, Arthur, B.Sc. Lyndhurst, The Park, Buxton. McNicol, Mary, B.Sc., Research Scholar in the Victoria University of Manchester. 182, Upper Chorlton Road, Manchester. Makower, Walter, B.A., B.Sc. 214, Upper Brook Street, Manchester. Mandleberg, Goodman Charles. edclyffe, Victoria Park, Manchester. Mann, J. Dixon, M.D., F.R.C.P. (Lond.), Professor of Medical Jurisprudence in the Victoria University of Manchester. 16, St. John Street, Manchester. Massey, Herbert. luy Lea, Lurnage, Didsbury, Manchester. Mather, Sir William, M.Inst.C.E., M.I.Mech.E. JZroz Works, Salford. Melvill, James Cosmo, M.A., F.L.S. dfeole-Brace Hail, Shrewsbury. Mond, Ludwig, D.Sc., Ph.D., F.RS., F.C.S. Winnington Hlali, Northwich, Cheshire. Mond, Robert Ludwig, M.A., F.R.S.E., F.C.S. Winning- ton Hall, Northwich, Cheshire. Moore, Frederick. Craven, M.D., M.Sc., 61, Azdwick Green, Manchester. ; Morris, Edgar F., M.A., F.C.S. Grey House, Barring’on Road, Altrincham, Cheshire. Moss, William E., B.A. C/o Messrs. Davies, Benachz & Co., 7, Rumford Street, Liverpool. Nicholson, Francis, F.Z.S. Zhe Knoll, Windermere, Westmorland. Ixvi Date of Election. 1900, April 3. 1889 April 16. 1884, April 15. 1903, Jan. 6. Toor, Nov. 26. 1892, Nov. 15. 1901, Oct. 29. 1835, Nov. 17. 1902, Oct. 21. 1903, Dec. 15. 1904, Feb. 2. 1900, Feb. 20. 1901, Dec. Io. 1888, Feb. 21. 1906, Oct. 30. 1869, Noy. 16. Ordinary Memters. Nicolson, John T., D.Sc., Professor of Engineering at the Municipal School of Technology, Manchester. Vazz-y- Glyn, Marple, Cheshzre. Norbury, George. A7llstde, Prestwich Park, Prestwich, Lancs. Okell, Samuel, F.R.A.S. Overley, Langham Road, Bowdon, Cheshire. Oldham, Charles. rook Cottage, Knutsfoxd, Cheshire. Paine, Standen. Devisdale, Bowdon, Cheshtre. Perkin, W. H., jun., Ph.D., M.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of Organic Chemistry in the Victoria University of Man- chester. Zhe University, Manchester. Petavel, J. E., B.A., M.Sc., F.R.S., Lecturer on Mechanics in the Victoria University of Manchester. Zhe Unt- versity, Manchester. Phillips, Henry Harcourt, F.C.S. Lynwood, Turton, nmr. Bolton, Lancs. Pope, W. J., F.R.S., F.C.S., Professor of Chemistry at the Municipal School of. Technology, Manchester. Corchester, Branhall, Cheshire. Prentice, Bertram, Ph.D., D.Sc., Lecturer in Chemistry, Royal Technical Institute, Salford. sca Mount, Manchester Road, Swintoz, Radford, Catherine, B.Sc. 31, Cawdor Road, Fallowfield, Manchester. Ragdale, John R. Zhe Beeches, Whitefield, near Man- chester, Ramsden, Herbert, M.D. (Lond.), M.B., Ch.B. (Vict.). Sunnyside, Dobcross, near Oltham, Lanes. Rée, Alfred, Ph.D., F.C.S. 15, AZauldeth Road, With- tngton, Manchester. Renold, Charles G., Engineer. 35, Jlabjield Road, Fallowfield, Manchester. Reynolds, Osborne, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., M.Inst.C.E. 19, Ladybarn Road, Fallowfield, Manchester. Date of Election, 1880, Mar. 23. 1897, Oct. 1905, Oct. 1873, Nov. 1898, Jan. 1890, Nov. 1903, April 28. 1906, Oct. 1906, Nov. 1895, Nov. 1896, Feb. 1901, Dec. 1904, Nov. 1905, May 1897, Nov. 1905, Nov. 1895, April 9. 19. 31. 18. 25. 4. 30. DL. 18. 10. 30. Ordinary Members. Ixvii Roberts, D. Lloyd, M.D., F.R.S.E., F.R.C.P. (Lond.), Ravenswood, Broughton Park, Manchester. Rothwell, William Thomas. Heath Brewery, Newton Fleath, near Manchester. Saxelby, Edith Mary, B.Sc., Research Scholar in the Victoria University of Manchester. 3, Alexandra Road South, Alexandra Park, Manchester. Schuster, Arthur, Sc. D., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Honorary Professor of Physics in the Victoria University of Man- chester. Aezt House, Victoria Park, Manchester. Schwabe, Louis. Hart Ail, Eccles Old Road, Pendleton, Manchester. Sidebotham, Edward John, M.A., M.B., .M.R.C.S. Etrlesdene, Bowdon, Cheshire. Sidebottom, Henry. Zhe Hall Cottage, Cheadle Hulme, near Stockport. Smedley, Ida, D.Sc., Assistant Lecturer in Chemistry in the Victoria University of Manchester. Zhe Unzverszty, Manchester. Smith, Norman, D.Sc., Assistant Lecturer in Chemistry in the Victoria University of Manchester. Zhe Unzverszty, Manchester. Southern, Frank, B.Sc. 6, Park Avenue, Timperley, Cheshire. Spence, David. Honeyhanger, Haslemere, Surrey. Spence, Howard. Audley, Broad Road, Sale, Cheshire. Stansfield, Herbert, B.Sc., A.I.E.E. 20, Every Street, Ancoats, Manchester. Stopes, Marie C., D.Sc., Ph.D., Demonstrator of Botany in the University of Manchester. 1:1, evszngton Avenue, Victoria Park, Manchester. Stromeyer, C. E., M.Inst.C.E. Steam Users’ Association, 9, Mount Street, Albert Square, Manchester. Sutcliffe, William Henry, F.G.S. Shore, Littleborough, Lancs. Tatton, Reginald A., M.Inst.C.E. Engineer to the Mersey and Irwell Joint Committee. anor House, Chelford, Cheshire. Ixviil Date of Election. 1893, Nov. 1906, April Io. 1873, April 15. 1896, Jan. 1896, Jan. 1899, Oct. 1899, Oct. 1873, Nov. 1906, Nov. 1892, Nov. 1906, Oct. 1901, Oct. 1859, Jan. 1905, Oct. 1901, Novy. 1905, Oct. 14. 21. 21 31. U7 25 Alls 20. aie 1860, April 17. Ordinary Members. Taylor, R. L., F.C.S.,F.LC. Central Schoo, Whitworth Street, and 4, St. Werburgh’s Road, Chorlton-c.-Hardy, Manchester. Thewlis, Councillor J. H. Dazsy Mount, Victoria Park, Manchester. Thomson, William, F.R.S.E., F.C.S., F.1LC. eyal Institution, Manchester. Thorburn, William, M.D., B.Sc. 2, St. Peter's Square, Manchester. ; Thorp, Thomas, F.R.A.S. A/oss Bank, Whitefield, near Manchester. Thorpe, Jocelyn F., Ph.D., Demonstrator in Organic Chemistry in the Victoria University of Manchester. The University, Manchester. Todd, William Henry. Gveenfieli’, Flixton, near Man- chester, and Sickle Street, corner of 84, Market Street. Waters, Arthur William, F.L.S., F.G.S. ‘* Alderley,” McKinley Road, Bournenouth. Watson, D. M.S. 466, A/oss Lane East, Manchester. Weiss, F. Ernest, D.Sc., F.L.S., Professor of Botany in the Victoria University of Manchester. 30, Brznzsweck Road, Withington, Manchester. Wigglesworth, Grace, M.Sc. Sfarth Mount, Heaton Norres. Wild, Robert B., M.D., M.Sc., M.R.C.P., Professor of Materia Medica and Therapeutics in the Victoria University of Manchester. Broome House, Fallowfield, Manchester. Wilde, Henry, D.Sc., D.C.L., F.R.S. Zhe Hurst, Alderley Ledge, Cheshire. Willis, Ethel G., M.A., B.Sc., Science Mistress, Man- chester High School for Girls. 2, Lancaster Road, Fallowfield, Manchester. Wilson, William, M.A. Carroz Vale, 80, Pitzwarren Street, Pendletoz, Manchester. Woodall, Herbert J., A.R.C.S. 32, Warket Place, Stockport. Woolley, George Stephen. Vectoria Bridge, Manchester. Date of Election. 1903, Nov. 17. 1863, Nov. 17. 1865, Feb. to 1895, Jan. 1897, Oct. 10. eo Ordinary Members. lxix Worthington, John Henry William, B.A., Assistant Master at the Manchester Grammar School. 9, Woodfield Road, Cheadle Hulme, near Stockport. Worthington, Samuel Barton, M.Inst.C.E., M.I.Mech.E. Mill Bank, Bowdon, and 37, Princess Street, Manchester. Worthington, Thomas, F.R.I.B.A., Broomfield, Alderley Ledge, Manchester. Worthington, Wm. Barton, B.Sc., M.Inst.C.E. Azrkstyles, Duffield, near Derby. Wyatt, Charles H., M.A., Chelford, Cheshire. N.B.—Of the above list the following have compounded for their subscriptions, and are therefore life members :— Bailey, Charles, M.Sc., F.L.S. Bradley, Nathaniel, F.C.S. Brogden, Henry, F.G.S. Ingleby, Joseph, M.I.Mech. KE. Johnson, William H., B.Sc. Worthington, Wm. Barton, B.Sc. Ixx Date of Election. 18y2, April 26. 1892, April 26. 1894, April 17. 1892, April 26. 1889, April 30. 1892, April 26. 1886, Feb. 9. 1888, April 17. 1889, April 30. 1903, April 28. 1866, Oct. 30. 1892, April 26. 1892, April 26. 1894, April 17. 1888, April 17. Honorary Members. HONORARY MEMBERS. Abney, Sir W. de W., K.C.B., D.Sc., F.R.S. Rathmore Lodge, Bolton Gardens South, South SW. Amagat, E. H., For. Mem. R.S., Memb. Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci.), Examinateur a4 l'Ecole Polytechnique. Avenue @ Orléans, 19, Paris. Appell, Paul, Membre de l'Institut, Professor of Theoretical Mechanics. Faculté des Sczences, Paris. Ascherson, Paul F. Aug., Professor of Botany. Unzversztat, Berlin. Avebury, John Lubbock, Lord, D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S. High Elis, Down, Kent. vensington, London, Baeyer, Adolf von, For. Mem. R.S., Professor of Chemistry. 1, Avcesstrasse, Munich. Baker, John Gilbert, F.R.S., F.L.S. Road, Kew. 3, Cumberland Mem. k.S., Corr. Memb. Reale Cannizzaro, Stanislao, For. Inst. Fr. (Acad. Sci.), Professor of Chemistry. Oniversita, Rome. Carruthers, William, F.R.S., F.L.S. Norwood, London, S.E. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth, D.Sc. United States Geological Survey, Washington, D.C., U.S.A. Clifton, Robert Bellamy, M.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Pro- fessor of Natural Philosophy. 3, Sardwell Road, Banbury Road, Oa ford. 14, Vermont Road, Curtius, Theodor, Professor of Chemistry. Ovzversitat, Kiel. Darboux, Gaston, Membre de l'Institut, Professor of Geometry, Faculté des Sciences, Seerétaire perpétuel de Académie des Sciences. 36, Rue Gay Lussac, Paris. Debus, H., Ph.D., F.R.S. 4. Schlangenweg, Cassez, lessen, Germany. Dewalque, Gustave, Professor of Geology. Unzversité, Liéve. Date'oy Election. 1900, April 24. 1892, April 26. 1892, April 26. 1895, April 30. 1900, April 24. 1889, April 30. 1900, April 24. 1892, April 26. 1900, April 24. 1895, April 30. 1894, April 17. 1894, April 17. 1900, April 24. 1894, April 17. 1894, April 17. 1892, April 26. Honorary Members. Isreal Dewar, Sir James, M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., V.P.C.S., Fullerian Professor of Chemistry, Moyal Instztuwttor, Albemarle Street, London, W. Dohrn, Dr. Anton, For. Mem. R.S. Zoolog¢sche Station, Naples. Edison, Thomas Alva. Ovange, N./., U.S.A. Elster, Julius, Ph.D. 6, Lessengstrasse, Wolfenbiittel. Ewing, James Alfred, C.B., M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Director of Naval Education to the Admiralty. Royal Naval College, Greenwich. Farlow, W. G., Professor of Botany. Cambridge, Mass., U.S.A. Forsyth, Andrew Russell, M.A., Sc.D., F.R.S., Sadlerian Professor of Pure Mathematics. Z7dzty College, Camt- Harvard College, bridge. Fiirbringer, Max, Professor of Anatomy. Onzvers7tat, fTLevdelberg. Geikie, James, D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., Murchison Pro- fessor of Geology and Mineralogy. 5 W1P(CoSe Laboratory; Passage, Strand, London, W.C. Sire Wivaibeyr, ICe 185 IMI ID CI. IP IR.S.- 6, “ton Terrace, Government Clement's Lunn Turner, F.R.S.E., Professor of Anatomy. Ldinburgh. Tylor, Edward Burnett, D.C. L. (Oxon), LL.D. (St. And. and McGill Univs.), F.R.S., Professor of Anthropology. Meseum Louse, Oxford. Vines, Sidney Howard, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S,, Sherardian Professor of Botany. Headington Hill, Oxford. Date of Election. 1894, April 17. 1894, April 17. 1886, Feb. 9. 1888, April 17. Corresponding Member. Ixxv Warburg, Emil, Professor of Physics, Physthkalisches Institut, Neue Withelmstrasse, Berlin. Weismann, August, Professor of Zoology. Universitat, Freiburg t. Br. Young, Charles Augustus. Hanover, New Hampshire, UESOAG Zirkel, Ferdinand, For.Mem.R.S., Professor of Mineralogy. Thralstrvasse, 33, Letpsic. CORRESPONDING MEMBER. 1850, April 30 Harley, Rev. Robert, Hon. M.A.(Oxon), F.R.S.,F.R.A.S., Hon. Memb. R.S. Queensland. Rosslyn, Westbourne Road, Forest Hill, London, S.E., and The Atheneum Club, London, S.W. Ixxvi Awards oj Medals and Premtums. Awards of the Wilde Medal under the conditions of the 1806. 1897. 1898. 1899. 19OO. 1901. 1903. 1905. 1898. 1900. 1903. Awards 1897. 1898. 1899. 1900. I9O!. Wilde Endowment Fund. Sir GEORGE (Gy SfOiees, Bart. He kes: Sir WILLIAM HUGGINS, K.C.B., F.R.S. Sir JOSEPH! DALTON HOOKER). G- ©: Sule Gane IBEW Sir EDWARD FRANKLAND, K.C.B.; F.R.S. Iie Jaloay ILOMD IRA wwiiiaGle, JIR.S- Dr. ELIE METSCHNIKOFF, For.Mem.R:S. JEON, JARVIS WAG (CILNRIBS ID Se Prof. CHARLES LAPWORTH, LL.D., F.R.S. Awards of the Dalton Medal. EDWARD SCHUNCK, Ph.D., F.R.S. Sir HENRY E. ROSCOE, F.R.S. Prof. OSBORNE REYNOLDS, LL.D., F.R.S. of the Premium under the conditions of the Wilde Endowment Fund. PETER CAMERON. JOHN BUTTERWORTH, F.R.M.S. CHAREES a EBSD. Se Loh e A NG JEONG, NUL THOMAS THORP. 1897. 1808. 1899. 1900. 19Ol. 1902. 1903. 1904. 1905. 1900. 1907. The Welde Lectures. Ixxvii UIGUS. SIS LIOY TN Tor HO TM UIKIS Sy, (July 2.) “On the Nature of the Rontgen Rays.” Byjsin GG: STOKES, Bart, F.ReS) (Gs 77>) (Mar. 29.) “On the Physical Basis of Psychical lewis Ibe Site INOKCISUNE, TO Swipe, IK (C18) WSR Se (C10) 9772) (Mar. 28.) “The newly discovered Elements ; and their relation to the Kinetic Theory of Gases.” By Prof. WILLIAM RAMSAY, F.R.S. (79 2p.) (Feb. 13.) “The Mechanical Principles of Flight.” Iss te It, Inlom, JLORD) IAWLWGls,, Isls S- (26 pp.) (April 22.) “Sire lla ilere cl (Cores Islincnenin.” ler 1D ye. ELIE METSCHNIKOFF, For.Mem.R.S. (38 2p.) Qseo, 25.) “Om tie WiyolonsGin Of Une NWieincal Faculties in relation to some Fundamental Principles of Motion.” By Dr. HENRY WILDE, ROS (G2 Ds 3 Db) (May 19.) ‘* The Atomic Theory.” By Professor 18. Wi. (CILNRIKIS, IDESe; (42 2.) (Feb. 23.) “ The Evolution of Matter as revealed by the Radio-active Elements.” By FREDERICK Soppy, M.A. (42 fp.) (Feb. 28.) “The Early History of Seed-bearing Plants, as recorded in the Carboniferous Flora.” iy IDye 1D), tals SCO, IIIS. (Ge ar 2 jl) (Marchi 20a; otal Solan Eclipses: | Bye seno= fessonmn. ia. (uURNER DES Fuk Sa (G20) (February 18.) “The Structure of Metals.” By 1D Jo A EWING ets Mase CIE, (20 22. 5 pls. and 5 text-figs.) RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY.—-Continued. Rome.—Ministero della Istruzione Pubblica. Le Opere di Galileo Galilei, Ed. naz., vols. 17, 18. 1906. Walmsley, Ben. India. By P. Loti. Transl. by Dr. G. A. F.Inman. [1906.] Washington.—Bureau of American Ethnology. Antiquities of the Jemez Plateau, New Mexico. By E. L. Hewett. (Bulletin, 32). 1906. —— Bureau of the Census. Special Reports. The Blind and the Deaf, 1900. 1906. —— Volta Bureau. Helen Keller. By John Hitz. 1906. Purchased. London.—Science Progress in the Twentieth Century. Nos. 1, 2. 1906. — Chemical Society. Annual Reports of the Progress of Chemistry. Vols. I, 2. 1905, 1900. Mourlon, M.—Bibliographia Geologica... Sér A, tome 9. 1906. NEW EXCHANGES. Grahamstown.—Albany Museum. Records. Lyon.—Societe d’ Agriculture, Sciences et Industrie. Annales. Pietermaritzburg.—Natal Government Museum. Annals. SanjSalvador.—Museo Nacional. Anales. And the usual Exchanges and FPertodicals. mci 8 01303 5936